micom p124 · technical guide p124/en t/e44 micom p124 page 1/2 self & dual powered overcurrent...

MiCOM P124

Self & Dual Powered Overcurrent Relays

P124/EN T/E44

Technical Guide

Technical Guide P124/EN T/E44 MiCOM P124 Page 1/2

SELF & DUAL POWERED OVERCURRENT RELAYS

MiCOM P124

CONTENT

Safety instructions

Introduction Chapter 1

Handling, installation and case dimensions Chapter 2

User Guide P124 Self-powered Relay Chapter 3-1

Menu Content MiCOM P124 Self-powered Chapter 3-2

User Guide P124 Dual-powered Relay Chapter 4-1

Menu Content MiCOM P124 Dual-powered Chapter 4-2

Technical data & curves characteristics Chapter 5

Applications Guide Chapter 6

Commissioning and Maintenance Guide Chapter 7

Communication Database Chapter 8

Connection Diagrams APPENDIX 1

Commissioning test and record sheets APPENDIX 2

P124/EN T/E44 Technical Guide Page 2/2 MiCOM P124

Pxxx/EN SS/G11

SAFETY SECTION

Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Safety Section Page 1/8

STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL LABEL INFORMATION FOR SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT

1. INTRODUCTION 3

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3

3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4

3.1 Symbols 4 3.2 Labels 4

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 4

5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 7

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 8

6.1 Protective fuse rating 8 6.2 Protective Class 8 6.3 Installation Category 8 6.4 Environment 8

Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Page 2/8 Safety Section

BLANK PAGE


1. INTRODUCTION

This guide and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Guide also includes descriptions of equipment label markings.

Documentation for equipment ordered from Schneider Electric is despatched separately from manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided to ensure that printed information which may be present on the equipment is fully understood by the recipient.

The technical data in this safety guide is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant product publication(s) for data specific to a particular equipment.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Guide and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.

Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced.

Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY

The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.

It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide.

When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage.

Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.

Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

• Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected;

• Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it;

• Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices;

• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the necessary information.


3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the equipment is installed or commissioned.

3.1 Symbols

Caution: refer to equipment documentation

Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal

Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal. Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) Terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply.

*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.

3.2 Labels

See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M/G11) for equipment labelling information.

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections

Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.

The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning, or servicing the equipment.

Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.

The clamping screws of all terminal block connectors, for field wiring, using M4 screws shall be tightened to a nominal torque of 1.3 Nm.

Equipment intended for rack or panel mounting is for use on a flat surface of a Type 1 enclosure, as defined by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken.

If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.

Voltage and current connections shall be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety.

Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate the health of the device. Schneider Electric strongly recommends that these contacts are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.


To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used.

The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram.

Protection Class I Equipment

- Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.

- The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost.

- When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or similar.

The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm² (3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations.

The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible.

All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.

Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked:

- Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation),

- CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections,

- Protective fuse rating,

- Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where applicable),

- Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.

Accidental touching of exposed terminals

If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided.

Equipment use

If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.

Removal of the equipment front panel/cover

Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts, which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.


UL and CSA/CUL Listed or Recognized equipment

To maintain UL and CSA/CUL Listing/Recognized status for North America the equipment should be installed using UL or CSA Listed or Recognized parts for the following items: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation.

For external protective fuses a UL or CSA Listed fuse shall be used. The Listed type shall be a Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15 A and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c., for example type AJT15.

Where UL or CSA Listing of the equipment is not required, a high rupture capacity (HRC) fuse type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c. may be used, for example Red Spot type NIT or TIA.

Equipment operating conditions

The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.

Current transformer circuits

Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it.

For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies.

For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module.

External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs)

Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched.

Battery replacement

Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons.

Insulation and dielectric strength testing

Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.

Insertion of modules and pcb cards

Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage.

Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards

Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card.


External test blocks and test plugs

Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.

*Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe.

Fiber optic communication

Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.

Cleaning

The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.

5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

De-commissioning The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to de-commissioning.

Disposal

It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.


6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.

6.1 Protective fuse rating

The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A, high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. Unless otherwise stated in equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable. The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible.

CAUTION - CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may produce lethal hazardous voltages.

6.2 Protective Class

IEC 60255-27: 2005

EN 60255-27: 2006

Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation). This equipment requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.

6.3 Installation Category

IEC 60255-27: 2005

EN 60255-27: 2006

Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III):

Distribution level, fixed installation.

Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 Ω, 0.5 J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits.

6.4 Environment

The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).

Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference Altitude - Operation up to 2000m to safety standards.

IEC 60255-27:2005

EN 60255-27: 2006

Technical Guide P124/EN T01/B44 MiCOM P124

CHAPTER 1 Introduction

Technical Guide P124/EN T01/B44 Introduction CHAPTER 1 MiCOM P124 Page 1/6

CONTENT

1. INTRODUCTION 3

2. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 3

3. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS 4

4. MAIN FUNCTIONS 5

P124/EN T01/B44 Technical Guide CHAPTER 1 Introduction Page 2/6 MiCOM P124

PAGE BLANCHE


1. INTRODUCTION

The overcurrent relays of the MiCOM P124 series are Schneider Electric™s self- and dual-powered relays. The MiCOM P124 series are designed to control, protect and supervise industrial plants as well as public distribution systems and substations and do not require an external power supply. They may also be used as backup to distance protection relays in electrical transmission networks.

2. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This guide provides a description of the overcurrent relays:

− MiCOM P124 self-powered relay,

− MiCOM P124 dual-powered relay.

It allows the user to become familiar with the relays' applications, installation, setting and commissioning.

This manual has the following format :

Chapter 1. Introduction

Contents of the manual and general introduction to the MiCOM P124 of relays covered by the Guide.

Chapter 2. Handling, installation and case dimensions

Precautions to be taken when handling electronic equipment.

Chapter 3. User Guide of MiCOM P124 self-powered relays

A detailed description of the features of the MiCOM P124 self-powered relay.

Chapter 4. User Guide of MiCOM P124 dual-powered relays

A detailed description of the features of the MiCOM P124 dual-powered relay.

Chapter 5. Technical specifications and curves characteristics

Comprehensive details on nominal values, setting ranges, specifications and curves characteristics

Chapter 6. Application Guide

Detailed recommendations for choosing the CTs.

Chapter 7. Commissioning and Maintenance Guide

Guide to commissioning, problem solving and maintenance of MiCOM P124 relays.

APPENDICES :

• Connection diagrams

• Commissioning test records

• Hardware and Software versions historical


3. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS

The range of MiCOM protection relays follows on from the success of the MIDOS, K, MODN and OPN ranges by incorporating the last changes in digital technology. The relays from the MiCOM P124 are fully compatible and use the same modular box concept. The MiCOM P124 of relays provides more protection for the most demanding applications.

Each relay has a large number of functions for controlling and collecting data. This can form part of a fully integrated system covering protection, control, instrumentation, data acquisition and the recording of faults, events and disturbances. The relays are equipped on the front panel with a liquid crystal display (LCD) with 2 x 16 back-lit alphanumerical characters, a tactile 7 button keypad (to gain access to all the parameters, alarms and measurements) and 8 LEDs simply displaying the state of the MiCOM P124 relays. In addition, the use of the RS485 communication port makes it possible to read, reinitialise and change the settings of the relays, if required, from a local or remote PC computer equipped with appropriate software.

An RS232 port is available on the front panel of the MiCOM P124 relays for downloading a software version (for updating, changing language, etc) and connecting the PC equipped with the support software MiCOM S1.

Its flexibility of use, reduced maintenance requirements and ease of integration allow the MiCOM P124 to provide an evolving solution for the problems of the protection of electric networks.

The MiCOM P124 relays provide earth fault and overcurrent protection for electrical distribution systems, industrial systems and any application requiring overcurrent protection where no auxiliary supply is available or where the auxiliary supply is not reliable. The earth fault element is sensitive enough for use with electrical systems where the earth fault current is low.


4. MAIN FUNCTIONS

The following table shows the functions available in the various models of the MiCOM P124 of relays.

Type SELF-POWERED (Order code Vaux = S)

DUAL-POWERED (Order code Vaux = A, F, or M)

Protection functions

Non-directional three-phase overcurrent (50/51)

X X

Non-directional earth fault overcurrent (50N/51N)

X X

Instantaneous thresholds X X

Thermal overload (49) X X

Negative sequence overcurrent (46) X

Undercurrent (37) X (note 1)

Circuit breaker failure (50 BF) X

Cold load pickup X (note 1)

Broken conductor detection X

Blocking logic X (note 1)

Relay selective scheme logic X (note 1)

Output relays latching (86) X (note 1)

Fail-safe operation X

Autorecloser option (79) X (note 1)

Ancillary functions

Dual power supply (Vaux + CT) X

Output for striker X X

Trip changeover output relay for CB coil

X X

Healthy LED 1 led (note 2) 1 led (note 2)

Other LEDs No 3 + 4 programmable

Magnetic flag for trip information 1 1

4 magnetic flags option No option 4 programmable

Setting groups 1 2

Measurements (true RMS values) X X

Current maximum and average values X X

Fault records X (note 4) X

Event records X (note 1)

Disturbance records X (note 1)

Circuit breaker supervision X

Communication RS485 rear port Not applicable X

Communication RS232 front port X (note 3) X (note 3)


NOTES : (1) Functions not available in case of loss of auxiliary power supply

(2) The Healthy LED indicates that the relay is being powered by either the auxiliary voltage or the CTs above the minimum required current.

(3) For the self-powered MiCOM P124 relay, and for the dual- powered MiCOM P124 relay during loss of auxiliary voltage, the power necessary to set the relay can be provided via this RS232 port, thanks to the battery box MiCOM E1.

(4) Simplified fault record (date and time not available).

Technical Guide P124/EN T02/C44 MiCOM P124

CHAPTER 2 Handling, Installation and Case

Dimensions

Technical Guide P124/EN T02/C44 Handling, installation and CHAPTER 2 case dimensions Page 1/8 MiCOM P124

CONTENT

1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 3

1.1 Receipt of relays 3

1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 3

2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 4

3. RELAY MOUNTING 5

4. UNPACKING 5

5. STORAGE 5

6. CASE DIMENSIONS 6

P124/EN T02/C44 Technical Guide CHAPTER 2 Handling, installation and case dimensions Page 2/8 MiCOM P124

BLANK PAGE


1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

1.1 Receipt of relays

Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained during transit a claim should be made to the transport contractor and Schneider Electric should be promptly notified.

Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be returned to their protective polythene bags.

1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges.

The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal module should not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the module outside its case, care should be taken to avoid contact with components and electrical connections. If removed from the case for storage, the module should be placed in an electrically conducting antistatic bag.

There are no setting adjustments within the module and it is advised that it is not unnecessarily disassembled. Although the printed circuit boards are plugged together, the connectors are a manufacturing aid and not intended for frequent dismantling; in fact considerable effort may be required to separate them. Touching the printed circuit board should be avoided, since complementary metal oxide semiconductors (CMOS) are used, which can be damaged by static electricity discharged from the body.


2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.

The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily.

Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured.

1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case.

2. Handle the module by its frontplate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or connectors.

3. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.

4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself.

5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.

If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500kΩ − 10ΜΩ.

If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent a build-up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible.

More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a special handling area such as described in the above-mentioned BS and IEC documents.


3. RELAY MOUNTING

Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly.

If an MMLG test block is to be included it should be positioned at the right-hand side of the assembly (viewed from the front). Modules should remain protected by their metal case during assembly into a panel or rack.

For individually mounted relays an outline diagram is supplied in section 6 of this chapter showing the panel cut-outs and hole centres.

4. UNPACKING

Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts is damaged or the settings altered. Relays must only be handled by skilled persons. The installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays that have been removed from their cases should not be left in situations where they are exposed to dust or damp. This particularly applies to installations which are being carried out at the same time as construction work.

5. STORAGE

If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt they should be stored in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de- humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag has been exposed to ambient conditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour, prior to replacing it in the carton.

Dust which collects on a carton may, on subsequent unpacking, find its way into the relay; in damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humifier will lose its efficiency.

Storage temperature : 25°C to +70°C.


6. CASE DIMENSIONS

MiCOM P124 relays are available in a 4U metal case for panel or flush mounting.

Weight : about 2.9 Kg

External size : Height Case 152 mm Front panel 177 mm Width Case 148,1 mm Front panel 155 mm Depth Case 140,8 mm Front panel + case 166 mm

150(Top)

Front panel

148.1

4 holes Ø 3.4

4 holes Ø 4.4

168

(Holes sizes)

158 ±0.5

Flush mounting

139.825.1155

(Front)

177

(Right)

10

Flush mounting

155.2

129.6

103.6

10.2

23.2

Trip

Alarm

Warning

Healthy

MiCOM P124

+ 0.80

Trip

IA = 214A


MiCOM E1 Battery case sizes :

Height Case 30 mm Width Case 68 mm Length Case 110 mm


BLANK PAGE


CHAPTER 3-1 User Guide

P124 Self-powered Relay

Technical Guide P124/EN T31/B44 User Guide CHAPTER 3-1 MiCOM P124 Page 1/24

CONTENT

1. DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS 3

1.1 General information 3

1.2 Trip of the circuit breaker 3

2. USER INTERFACE 5

2.1 Front panel display and keypad 5

2.1.1 The display 5

2.1.2 Keypad 5

2.2 Front panel LED and magnetic flag 6

2.3 The two areas under the top and bottom flaps 6

2.4 The battery box 6

2.5 Description of the MiCOM P124 self-powered front panel 7

2.5.1 LEDs 7

2.5.2 Magnetic flag 7

3. MENUS 8

3.1 Default display 8

3.2 Access to the menu 8

3.3 Password 8

3.3.1 Password protection 8

3.3.2 Entering the password 8

3.3.3 Changing the password 9

3.4 ALARM display 9

3.4.1 Electrical system ALARMS 9

3.4.2 Relay Hardware or Software ALARMS 10

3.5 Menu contents 11

3.5.1 O.P. Parameters menu 12

3.5.2 CONFIGURATION Menu 13

3.5.3 MEASUREMENTS Menu 14

3.5.4 PROTECTION Menu 15

3.5.4.1 [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu 15

3.5.4.2 [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu 17

3.5.4.3 [49] Therm OL sub-menu 19

P124/EN T31/B44 Technical Guide CHAPTER 3-1 User Guide Page 2/24 MiCOM P124

3.5.5 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu 20

3.5.5.1 Trip Commands sub-menu 20

3.5.6 RECORD Menu 21

3.5.6.1 Fault Record sub-menu 21

3.5.6.2 Time Peak Value 22

4. WIRING 23

4.1 Current inputs (measurement) 23

4.2 Output relays 23

4.3 Striker output 24

4.4 RS 232 Front Communication port 24


1. DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS

1.1 General information

The MiCOM P124 relays, in their self-powered and dual-powered versions, make best use of numerical techniques to provide protection and control functions.

They have 4 analogue inputs (3 phase currents and 1 earth current). The current inputs have to be specified on order (1A or 5A).

The front panel allows the user access to the information in the relay, either via the LEDs and/or magnetic flags, or via the LCD and keypad.

The various alarms are saved in memory and are available to the user on the backlit LCD. Reading and clearing of these alarms are possible without password.

Wiewing the settings and measurements is not password protected but modification or deletion can only be done after entering the saved password.

MiCOM P124 dual-powered version:

The MiCOM relay dual-powered version can be powered either by an external power supply source or by the line currents from the CTs (the minimum load current must be over 0.2 In on at least one phase).

MiCOM P124 self-powered version:

This model provides fully comprehensive protection functions without and external power supply.

The power is taken from line currents provided by the CTs (the minimum load current must be over 0.2 In on at least one phase).

THIS CHAPTER 3 OF THE P124 TECHNICAL GUIDE DESCRIBES THE USER INTERFACE AND THE CONNECTIONS OF THE SELF-POWERED VERSION OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAY.

1.2 Trip of the circuit breaker

Whatever the version (dual or self-powered), the MiCOM P124 relays can trip the circuit breaker via a C/O contact or striker output.

Trip via a striker output:

The relay performs a capacitance discharge output capable of putting out sufficient power (20mJ at 12V) to a striker (K1.3 type or equivalent) releasing the actuating mechanism of the CB.

P124

Striker output

39 +

41

FIGURE 1: STRIKER SUPPLIED FROM P124


This tripping output is completely independent from any auxiliary supply.

Trip via a changeover contact:

The relay performs a changeover contact relay output with a high breaking capacity to trip the circuit breaker coil.

The operation of the changeover contact is completely independent from any auxiliary supply. On the other hand, an auxiliary supply will be necessary for the supply of the CB coil.

Auxiliary supply

P124

RL1

44

42

40

Auxiliary supply

FIGURE 2: TRIP OF THE CB COIL VIA A CHANGEOVER CONTACT


2. USER INTERFACE

The MiCOM P124 relay front panel serves as an interface between the user and the protection relay. It enables the user to enter relay settings, display the measured values, alarms and display clearly the various actions carried out by MiCOM P124 relay.

The front panel of the relay consists of three separate sections:

− The LCD display and the keypad,

− The LED's

− The two zones under the upper and lower flaps.

The battery box (accessory):

Associated with the MiCOM P124 relays, the battery box MiCOM E1 can be used to allow the user to access the menu when there is no line current (circuit breaker open).

2.1 Front panel display and keypad

2.1.1 The display

The front panel of the MiCOM P124 relays caries a liquid crystal display (LCD) on which data such as settings, measured values and alarms can be viewed. The data is accessed through a menu system.

The liquid crystal display has two lines each with sixteen characters. A back-light is activated when any key is pressed and will remain lit for five minutes after the last key press. This allows the display to be read in most lighting conditions.

NOTA : IN ORDER TO SAVE ENERGY, THE LCD IS BACKLIT ONLY WHEN THERE IS AT LEAST ONE PHASE CURRENT ABOVE 0.5 In.

2.1.2 Keypad

The keypad has seven keys divided into two groups :

Two keys situated immediately under the screen (keys ! and ").

Five main keys situated at the middle of the front face are for programming.

The two keys ! and " are dedicated for reading and acknowledging the alarms. So as to display successive alarms, press on key ". The alarms are presented in reverse order for their detection (the most recent first, the oldest last). So as to acknowledge the alarms, the user can either acknowledge each alarm using ! or go to the end of the ALARM menu and carry out a general acknowledgement.

NOTA : NO PASSWORD IS REQUIRED TO ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS.

The five keys situated in the middle of the MiCOM front panel are dedicated to setting the relay.

The # $ % & keys make it possible to move in the direction indicated to the various levels of the menus. The ' key validates a choice or value (modification of settings).


2.2 Front panel LED and magnetic flag

One LED and one magnetic flag are available for the self-powered version of the P124 relay.

The default corresponding labels on the front panel are in the English language but the user is provided with a set of French stickers.

2.3 The two areas under the top and bottom flaps

Under the upper flap, a label identifies the relay according to its model (ordering code) and series number. This information defines the product uniquely and specifically.

In making all requests for information from Schneider Electric After Sales Department, please quote these two numbers.

Information indicated in the lower portion of this label covers the nominal earth current value and the rated current (1A or 5A).

Under the lower flap, an RS232 port is available to download a new version of the protection software, as well as the settings created in a dedicated PC software MiCOM S1. The same software allows to view all the relays internal data (measurements, events…).

When there is no line current from the CTs (circuit breaker open), the user can view or modify the settings by powering the MiCOM P124 relay with the battery box MiCOM E1 connected to the RS232 port.

The withdrawal of the MiCOM active part (chassis) from the case is effected by opening the two flaps, then with a 3mm screwdriver, turn the extractor situated under the upper flap, and pull using the two slots situated behind these flaps.

2.4 The battery box

To MiCOM P124RS 232

Battery box

Input forexternal supply12Vcc – 24Vcc

FIGURE 3: BATTERY BOX MiCOM E1

The battery box performs the two following functions:

1. Temporary powering of the relay in order to allow the user to view or modify data. The battery used is a 6LR61 type (9V) which can power the relay up to 3 hours. When the battery is flat it is possible to power the battery box with an external dc supply. The dc voltage value must be comprised between 12Vdc and 24Vdc.

2. RS232 interface between the MiCOM P124 relay and the PC equipped with the setting software MiCOM S1.


2.5 Description of the MiCOM P124 self-powered front panel

2 tactile buttonsto view andacknowledgealarms andindications

Healthy LED

5-key keypad forsettings andviewing

RS 232

Retractable flapsallowing toremove theactive part of therelay

2 x 16 characterbacklit display

Magnetic flag fortrip indication

Battery boxMiCOM E1

FIGURE 4: MiCOM P124 SELF-POWERED FRONT PANEL

2.5.1 LEDs

One LED is available on the left hand side of the front panel:

LED 4 Colour: GREEN Label: HEALTHY

This LED is lit when the relay correctly powered by a sufficient line current, provided by one or several CTs.

The LED is also lit when the relay is powered by the battery box.

Note: the front panel of the self-powered relay has holes meant for the dual-powered relay. On the self-powered relay, only LED 4 is used.

2.5.2 Magnetic flag

The magnetic flag indicates that a tripping command has been issued to the CB coil or striker by switching to yellow.

The flag can be reset (black side) by depressing the ! key either the relay is being powered by the battery box when the circuit breaker is open, or when it is powered by a sufficient line current.


3. MENUS

The menu of the MiCOM P124 relays is organised into main and sub menus.

3.1 Default display

By default, the value of the current IA is continuously displayed.

As soon as an alarm is generated by the MiCOM relay, that information is considered as priority and replaces the default value.

3.2 Access to the menu

Complete menu access is performed by manipulation of the keys # $ % &.

The general arrangement of the menus is shown in figure 3.

Reading of parameters and measurements is possible without entering the password.

Modification of the parameters requires entering the password.

Should an error be made in entering a parameter, press ! to cancel.

Except for reading and cancelling, the keys ! and " are inactive.

NOTA : The letter P is displayed at the botton-right of each first (main menu) and second menu level when the password is entered.

This password remains active for 5 minutes of keypad inactivity.

3.3 Password

3.3.1 Password protection

Password protection is applicable to the relay settings, especially to the selection of the various thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of inputs and outputs relays.

The password consists of four alphabetical capital characters. When leaving the factory, the password is AAAA. The user can define his own combination of characters. Should the password be lost or forgotten, the modification of the stored parameters of the relay is prohibited. It is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his agent by specifying the serial number of the relay so as to receive a stand-by password specific to the relay concerned.

3.3.2 Entering the password

The input of the password is requested as soon as a modification of a parameter is made for any one of the menus or sub-menus. The user enters for each of the 4 characters/letters and validates the entire password with '.

After 5 seconds, the display returns to the point of the preceding menu. If no action is taken on the keypad for 5 minutes, the password is deactivated. A new request shall be associated with any subsequent parameter modification.

NOTE : WHILE THE PASSWORD IS ACTIVE, IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO DOWNLOAD A SETTING FILE FROM THE PC SETTING SOFTWARE MiCOM S1.


3.3.3 Changing the password

To change the active password, go to the OP. PARAMETERS menu and then to the point of the Password sub menu. Enter the old password and validate. Then press ' and enter the new password character per character and validate the new password using '.

The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the password has changed.

3.4 ALARM display

The management of alarms is directly displayed on the LCD. The display of alarm messages has priority over the default current value. As soon as an alarm is detected by the relay (threshold crossing for example), the message is displayed on the MiCOM LCD display.

The alarm messages are classed as follows :

• Electrical power network alarm message

• Hardware or software fault message from the relay.

3.4.1 Electrical system ALARMS

Any crossing of a threshold (instantaneous or time delay) generates an "electrical network alarm". For each threshold the involved threshold is indicated. If several alarms are triggered, they are all stored in their order of appearance the most recent alarm first, the oldest alarm last. Each message is numbered and the total of messages is shown.

The user read all the alarm messages using " without entering the password.

The user acknowledges the alarms using !. The user can acknowledge each message one by one or all by going to the end of the list and acknowledge all the messages using !.

The different Electrical system alarms are described below :

I0> 1ST stage earth fault pick-up

I0>> 2nd stage earth fault pick-up

I0>>> 3rd stage earth fault pick-up

I> 1st stage overcurrent pick-up

I>> 2nd stage overcurrent pick-up

I>>> 3rd stage overcurrent pick-up

tI0> 1st stage earth fault time-out

tI0>> 2nd stage earth fault time-out

tI0>>> 3rd stage earth fault time-out

tI> 1st stage overcurrent time-out

tI>> 2nd stage overcurrent time-out

tI>>> 3rd stage overcurrent time-out

THERMAL ALARM thermal alarm threshold pick-up

THERMAL TRIP thermal trip threshold pick-up


3.4.2 Relay Hardware or Software ALARMS

Any software or hardware Fault of the MiCOM relay generates a "hard/software alarm". If several alarms are acquired they are all stored in their order of appearance. Display of the alarms is in reverse order (the most recent first and the oldest last). Each message is numbered and the total of messages is indicated below.

The user can read all the alarm messages with the aid of ", without entering the password.

The acknowledgement of the relay alarm messages is IMPOSSIBLE. Only the disappearance of the cause reset the alarm.

Possible Hardware or Software alarm messages :

« EEPROM ERROR DATA » : Data in EEPROM memory in fault

« CT ERROR » : Analogue channel in fault

« EEPROM ERROR CALIBR » : Calibration zone in fault

WARNING: IN ORDER TO SAVE ENERGY, THE WATCHDOG RELAY RL0 IS USED ONLY WHEN THERE IS A 0.4 IN CURRENT ON AT LEAST ONE PHASE. RL0 IS DE-ENERGISED BELOW THAT CURRENT LEVEL OR IN CASE OF HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE PROBLEM.


3.5 Menu contents

DEFAULT DISPLAY

IA = 1245 AOP PARAMETERS

CONFIGURATION

MEASUREMENTS

PROTECTION

AUTOMAT.CTRL

RECORDS

FIGURE 3 : ORGANISATION OF MICOM P124 SELF-POWERED MAIN MENU

The menu of the MiCOM P124 Self-powered (without auxiliary power supply) relays is divided into 6 sections :

OP PARAMETERS

CONFIGURATION

MEASUREMENTS

PROTECTION

AUTOMAT. CTRL

RECORDS

To access these menus from the default display use $.

To return to the default display from these menus or sub-menus press #.

NOTE: A menu content table is given in the chapter 3-2.


3.5.1 O.P. Parameters menu

OP Parameters Heading of the OP PARAMETERS menu To gain access to the menu content, press $.

Password = * * * *

Entry of the password to be able to modify the MiCOM relaysettings and parameters. To enter the password, press '.

Password = AAAA

Entry of the password is made letter by letter using # $ to go up or down the alphabet. After each letter, press % to enter the following letter. At the end, press ' to validate the password. If the password is correct, the message « PASSWORD OK » is displayed on the screen. The password is initailly set in the factory to AAAA

WARNING : AS SOON AS THE PASSWORD HAS BEEN ENTERED, NO SETTING CHANGE USING THE FRONT PORT COMMUNICATION CAN BE ACCEPTED AND THIS DURING 5 MINUTES.

Description = P124 S

Displays the MiCOM P124applicable relay model S = Without auxiliary power supply (self-powered) D = Dual-powered (with auxiliary power supply)

Reference = ALST

Displays the name of the equipment associated with the relay. NOTE : The reference is initially set in the factory to ALST.

Software Version 1.B

Displays the version of the software

Frequency = 50 Hz

Nominal value of the network frequency. Select either 50 or 60 Hz. To modify this value, press ' and press # $ to select the desired value. Validate your choice using '.

Relay Status = 1 0

Displays the state of the trip logic output. (RL1) - state 0 : output relay inactive - state 1 : output relay active NOTA : The Watch-dog output (RL0) is not display in the output status menu.


3.5.2 CONFIGURATION Menu

The CONFIGURATION menu is used to set the earth and phase CT ratios so that primary values can be displayed.

CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the CT RATIO menu, press $, %.

CT Ratio

Heading of the CT RATIO sub-menu. To gain access to the sub-menu content, press $.

Line CT primary = 1000

Display of the primary ratio of the phase CT. The value consists of 4 digits: Minimum 1, Maximum 9999. Press ' to modify this value and use # $ % & to display the new primary phase CT ratio. Enable your choice using ' at the end of selection

E/Gnd CT primary = 1000

Display of the primary ratio of the earth CT. The consist of 4 digits : Minimum 1, Maximum 9999. Press ' to modify this value and use # $ % & to display the new primary earth CT ratio. Enable your choice using 'at the end of selection.


3.5.3 MEASUREMENTS Menu

MEASUREMENTS

Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu. To gain access to the MEASUREMENTS menu, press $, %, 2 times.

Frequency = 50.01 Hz

Display the network frequency calculated from phase currents

I A = 257.05 A

Display the A phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub-menu).

I B = 258.80 A

Display the B phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub-menu)

I C = 257.50 A

Display the C phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub-menu).

I N = 20.00 A

Display the earth current (True RMS value) taking into account the earth CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub-menu).

Thermal 2 = RST = [C] 0%

Display the % thermal state based on true RMS values. To clear the % values, press !.

Max. & Average. I RST = [C]

Allows the user to clear the maximum (peak) and average (rolling) memorised values of the current. To clear these values, press !.

Max. IA Rms = 350 A

Display the peak value for phase A. The value is the true RMS maximum value.

Max. IB Rms = 0.00 A

Display the peak value for phase B. The value is the true RMS maximum value.

Max. IC Rms = 0.00 A

Display the peak value for phase C. The value is the true RMS maximum value.

Average. IA Rms = 150 A

Display the rolling value for phase A. The value is the true RMS average value.

Average. IB Rms = 148 A

Display the rolling value for phase B. The value is the true RMS average value.


Average. IC Rms = 153 A

Display the rolling value for phase C. The value is the true RMS average value.

3.5.4 PROTECTION Menu

The PROTECTION menu enables a user to program various protection functions and settings (thresholds, time delay) associated with each of the phase or earth protection functions.

The various sub-menus are :

⇒ [50/51] Phase OC

⇒ [50N/51N] E/Gnd

⇒ [49] Therm OL

3.5.4.1 [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu

PROTECTION

Heading of the PROTECTION menu.

[50/51] Phase OC Heading of the [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu To gain access to the sub-menu points, press $.

I> ? Yes

Selection of the first phase threshold (I>). Select Yes or No. If the user enters I>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I> (No), go to I>> menu.

I> = 0.1 In

Displays the threshold current value I>. To modify this value, press '.The threshold I> is adjustable from 0.1 to 4 In. Press ' to enable your adjustment.

Delay Type DMT

Selection of the I> time delay type threshold. Select (DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve).

3.5.4.1.1 I> DMT threshold menu

Delay Type DMT

Display of the I> DMT time delay.

tl > 100 ms

Selection of the I> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.


3.5.4.1.2 I> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curve menu

Delay Type IDMT

Display the I> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).

Idmt = IEC SI

Selection of the I> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI using # and enable your choice using the key '

Tms = 0.025

Select the curve TMS value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and enable your choice using '

3.5.4.1.3 I> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu

Delay Type RI

Display of the I> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve)

K = 0.1

Selection of the RI curve K value. Select from 0.100 to 10 using # and enable your choice using '.

3.5.4.1.4 I>> threshold menu

I >> ? Yes

Selection of the I>> second phase threshold. Select Yes or No. If the user enters I>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I>> (No) go to I>>> menu.

I >> 2.0 In

Selection of the I>> second threshold current value. To modify this value, press '. The threshold I>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In. Press ' to enable your adjustment.

tI >> 300 ms

Selection of the second threshold I>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.

3.5.4.1.5 I>>> threshold menu

I >>> ? Yes

Selection of the I>>> third phase threshold. Select Yes or No. If the user enters I>>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I>>> (No), the LCD display returns to the heading of the menu [50/51] Phase OC.

I >>> 10.0 In

Selection of the I>>> third threshold current value. To modify this value, press '. The threshold I>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In. Press ' to enable your adjustment.

tI >>> 110 ms

Selection of the third threshold I>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.


3.5.4.2 [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu

PROTECTION


[50N/51N] E Gnd Heading of the [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu To gain access to the sub-menu content, press $.

le> ? Yes

Selection of the first earth threshold (Ie>). Select Yes or No. If the user enters Ie>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. User enters > (No), go to Ie>> menu.

le> 0.01 len

Displays the current threshold value Ie>. To modify this value, press '. The threshold Ie> is adjustable from :

0.002 to 1 Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range) 0.01 to 1 Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien Range) 0.1 to 25 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ien Range) Press ' to enable your adjustment.

Delay Type DMT

Selection of the Ie> threshold time delay type. Select (DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve) using # and enable your choice using '.

3.5.4.2.1 Ie> DMT threshold menu

Delay Type DMT

Display of the Ie> DMT time delay.

t le> 100 ms

Selection of the Ie> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.

3.5.4.2.2 Ie> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu

Delay Type DMT

Display of the Ie> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).

Idmt IEC SI

Selection of the Ie> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI using # and enable your choice using the key '.

Tms 0.025

Selection of the selected curve Tms value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and enable your choice using '.


3.5.4.2.3 Ie> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu

Delay Type RI

Display of the Ie> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve)

K 0.1


3.5.4.2.4 Ie>> threshold menu

le >> ? Yes

Selection of the Ie>> second earth threshold. Select Yes orNo. If the user enters Ie>>(Yes), the following menu isdisplayed. If the user enters>> (No) go to Ie>>> menu.

Ie >> 0.1 Ien

Selection of the Ie>> second threshold current value. To modify this value, press '. The threshold Ie>> is adjustable from : 0.002 to 1Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range) 0.01 to 8 Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien Range) 0.5 to 40 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ion Range) Press ' to validate your adjustment.

t Ie >> 300 ms

Selection of the second threshold Ie>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and validate your choice using '.

3.5.4.2.5 Seuil I0>>> à temps constant CST

le >>> ? Yes

Selection of the Ie>>> third earth threshold. Select Yes or No. If the user validates Ie>>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters Ie>>> (No), the LCD display returns to the heading of the menu [50N/51N] E/Gnd.

Ie >>> 1.0 Ien

Selection of the Ie>>> third threshold current value. To modify this value, press 'T he threshold Ie>>> is adjustable from : 0.002 to 1Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range) 0.01 to 8 Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien Range) 0.5 to 40 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ion Range) Press ' to validate your adjustment.

t Ie >>> 300 ms

Selection of the third threshold Ie>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and validate your choice using '.


3.5.4.3 [49] Therm OL sub-menu

PROTECTION


[49] Therm OL [Heading of the [49] Therm OL (Thermal Overload) sub- menu.

Therm OL Yes

Selection of the thermal overload function. Select Yes or No. If the user enters Yes, the following menu is displayed. If the user enters No, no menu content is displayed.

Iθ> = 0.3 In

Displays the thermal current threshold value Iθ>. To modify this value, press '. The threshold Iθ> is adjustable from 0.2 to 3.2 In step of 0.01. Press ' to validate your choice.

Te = 1 mn

Displays the Te thermal time constant associated with the thermal overload formula. To modify this value, press '. The time constant Te is adjustable from 1 min to 200 min, step of 1 min. Press ' to validate your adjustment.

k = 1.05

Displays the k factor associated with the thermal overload function. To modify this value, press '. k factor is adjustable from 1 to 1.5, step of 0.01. Press ' to validate your adjustment.

θ Trip 100%

Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload trip threshold. To modify this value, press '. θ Trip is adjustable from 50 % to 200 % step of 1%. Press ' to validate your adjustment.

θ Alarm ? Yes

Selection of the thermal overload alarm function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates Yes, the following menu is displayed. If the user validate No, refer to the THERMAL OVERLOAD sub-menu.

θ Alarm ? Yes

Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload alarm threshold. To modify this value, press '. θ Trip is adjustable from 50 % to 200 % step of 1%. Press ' to validate your adjustment.


3.5.5 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu

The AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu makes it possible to programme the various automation functions included in the MiCOM P124.

⇒ Trip Commands

3.5.5.1 Trip Commands sub-menu

This sub-menu is used to set the time-delayed thresholds which activate the striker and/or the special tripping relay and send a tripping command to the circuit breaker or contactor.

AUTOMAT. CTRL

Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu.

Trip Commands Heading of the Trip ORDER sub-menu.

Trip tI > = Yes

Allocation of the first phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>) to the trip output relay and/or the striker (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, the trip output relay (RL1) shall be activated at the end of the time delay tI>. If the user validates No, the trip output relay (RL1) shall never be activated, even at the end of the time delay tI>.

Trip tI >> Yes

Allocation of the second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.

Trip tI >>> Yes

Allocation to the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.

Trip tIe > Yes

Allocation of the first earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.

Trip tIe >> Yes

Allocation of the second earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.

Trip tIe >>> Yes

Allocation of the third earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.

Trip Thermal θ Yes

Allocation of the thermal overload Trip information (θ Trip) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.


3.5.6 RECORD Menu

The RECORD menu makes it possible to read the MiCOM P124 records.


⇒ Fault Record

⇒ Time Peak Value

3.5.6.1 Fault Record sub-menu

The Fault RECORD sub-menu makes possible to read the various parameters and measurement for each of the five fault store in MiCOM P124 memory.

RECORD Heading of the RECORD menu.

Fault record

Heading of the Fault Record sub-menu

Record Number 4

Selection of the Fault record number (by selecting either 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) to be displayed. To modify this fault record number, press ' then using # enter the required number. Validate your choice using '.

Faulted Phase Phase A

Display the faulty phase for the chosen fault record. (NONE, phase A, B, C, EARTH, AB, AC, BC, or ABC).

Threshold I>>

Display the origin of the fault that as generated the trip order.

Magnitude 1200 A

Display the magnitude of the faulty current. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.


3.5.6.2 Time Peak Value

The DISTURBANCE sub-menu makes possible to set the various parameters and thresholds associated to this recording function.


Time Peak Value

Heading of the Time Peak Value sub-menu.

Time Window = 5 mn

Display of the time window during which the mean and maximum current values are stored. To change this value, press the ' key. This window can be set with the following values: 5mn, 10mn, 15mn, 30mn or 60mn. Press the ' key to confirm the setting.


4. WIRING

The external connection diagrams of MiCOM P124 are provided in APPENDIX 1 to this document.

4.1 Current inputs (measurement)

The MiCOM P124 relays have 4 analogue inputs (3 phase current inputs and 1 earth current input). The rated current value of these measurement inputs is either 1A or 5A (must be specified on order).

The rated current is indicated on the front panel of the relay, behind the top flap.

WARNING: THE CONNECTION OF THE EARTH CURRENT INPUT MAY DIFFER DEPENDING ON WHETHER IT IS CONNECTED TO A CORE BALANCED CT OR TO A SUMMATION OF THE 3 PHASE CTS.

Connection to 3 phase CTs and 1 core balanced CT:

Generally, when the relay is used with three phase CTs and one core balanced CT, there is not need to power the relay through the earth channel.

In this case, the core balanced CT can be connected to terminals 47 and 48.

For some phase to earth faults, when some specific cores are used, it can be possible that the fault does not generate a current high enough* to power the relay from only one phase circuit. It will then be necessary to connect the core TC to terminals 55 and 56 in order to power the relay through the earth circuit as well.

*reminder: the MiCOM P124 relay is self-powered from a 0.2 In current on at least one phase.

Connection to 3 phase CTs:

In this case the earth current is derived from the summation of the 3 phase currents.

It is not necessary to power the relay via the earth circuit. The summation of the 3 CTs must be connected to terminals 47 and 48.


In this case it is necessary to power the relay through the earth circuit. The core balanced CT must be connected to terminals 55 and 56.

4.2 Output relays

Two output relays are available on the self-powered model:

• One trip relay (RL1) with a C/O contact (1 common, 1 normally open, 1 normally closed)

• One watchdog relay (RL0) with a C/O contact (1 common, 1 normally open, 1 normally closed)

WARNING : IN ORDER TO SAVE ENERGY, THE WATCHDOG RELAY IS USED ONLY WHEN THERE IS A 0.4 IN CURRENT ON AT LEAST ONE PHASE. IT IS DE-ENERGISED BELOW THAT CURRENT LEVEL OR WHEN A SOFTWARE OR HARDWARE FAULT IS PRESENT.


4.3 Striker output

The P124 relays are fitted with a striker output used to trip the circuit breaker via a striker device in the absence of an external auxiliary supply.

The 2 terminals to be connected to the striker are polarised:

− + terminal 39

− terminal 41

according to the external connection diagrams provided in Appendix 1 of the Technical Guide.

4.4 RS 232 Front Communication port

MiCOM P124 relays provide the user an RS 232 communication port. This link is dedicated to the Setting software MiCOM S1.

The cable between the P124 and the PC is a standard RS 232 shield-cable.

RS232 PC port RS 232 Cable

MiCOM P124 end 9 pin male connector

2 2

3 3

5 5

7 7

In cases where the battery box MiCOM E1 is used to power the P124 relay, it is placed between the PC and the P124 relay.


CHAPTER 3-2 Menu Content

MiCOM P124 Self-powered

Technical Guide P124/EN T32/B44 Menu content CHAPTER 3-2 MiCOM P124 Page 1/2

MiC

OM

P1

24

S

Men

u co

nten

tFr

om V

1A

Sof

twar

e

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

IA =

1245

A

Pass

wor

d**

**

Des

crip

tion P1

24-

S

Refe

renc

eA

LST

Soft

war

e ve

rsio

n1.B

Freq

uenc

y50 H

z

OP

PARA

MET

ERS

Rela

y St

atus

1 0

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

CT

Ratio

Line

CT

prim

ary

1000

E/G

nd C

T pr

imar

y10

00

Freq

uenc

y50

.01 H

z

I A25

7.0

5 A

I B25

8.8

0 A

I C25

7.5

0 A

MEA

SURE

MEN

TS

Ther

mal

θRS

T =

[C

]0%

Max

& A

vera

ge I

RST

= [

C]

Max

IA R

ms

0.0

2 A

I N20

.00 A

Max

IB

Rm

s0.0

2 A

Max

IC

Rm

s0.0

2 A

Ave

rage

IA R

ms

0.0

0 A

Ave

rage

IB R

ms

0.0

0 A

Ave

rage

IC R

ms

0.0

0 A

PRO

TEC

TIO

N

[50/5

1]

Phas

e O

C

I >

?Yes

I >

0.1

In

Del

ay T

ype DM

T

Del

ay T

ype ID

MT

Idm

tIE

C S

I

Del

ay T

ype

RI

K =

0.1

I>>

?Ye

sI>

>2.

0 In

tl>>

300

ms

tl >

100

ms

Tms

0.02

5

[50N

/51N

] E/G

nd

Ie >

?Yes

Ie >

0.0

1 Ie

n

Del

ay T

ype D

MT

Idm

t

IEC

SI

Tms

0.025

K0.1

Ie>

> ?

Yes

Ie>

> 0

.1 Ie

nt

Ie >

>300

ms

Ie>

>>

?Yes

Ie>

>>

1.0

Ien

t Ie

>>

> 3

00

ms

t le

>10

0 m

s

Del

ay T

ype

RI

[49]

The

rm O

L

Ther

m O

L ? Ye

s

Iθ>

0.3

In

Te1 m

n

θ Tr

ip100

%

θ A

larm

?Yes

K1.0

5

θ A

larm

100

%

AU

TOM

AT.

C

TRL

Trip

C

omm

ands

Trip

tI >

Yes

Trip

tI >

> Yes

Trip

tI >

>>

Yes

Trip

tIe

>>

Yes

Trip

tIe

>>

>Ye

s

Trip

The

rmal

θYe

s

Trip

tIe

> Yes

Faul

t Re

cord

Tim

e Pe

ak

Val

ue

Tim

e W

indo

w =

5 m

n

REC

ORD

Reco

rd N

umbe

r 4

Faul

ted

Phas

ePH

ASE

A B

Thre

shol

d l>>

Mag

nitu

de 120

0 A

I>>

> ?

Yes

I>>

>10

.0 In

tl>>

>11

0 m

s

Del

ay T

ype ID

MT

P124/EN T32/B44 Technical Guide CHAPTER 3-2 Menu content Page 2/2 MiCOM P124

BLANK PAGE


CHAPTER 4-1 User Guide

P124 Dual-Powered Relay


CONTENT

1. DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS 5

1.1 General information 5

1.2 Trip of the circuit breaker 6

2. USER INTERFACE 7

2.1 The LCD display and the keypad 7

2.1.1 The LCD display 7

2.1.2 Keypad 7

2.2 Front panel LED and magnetic flag 8

2.3 The two areas under the top and bottom flaps 8

2.4 The battery box 9

2.5 Description of the MiCOM P124 dual-powered front panel 10

2.5.1 Leds 10

2.5.2 Magnetic flags 11

2.5.3 Battery backup 11

3. MENUS 12

3.1 Default display 12

3.2 Access to the menu 12

3.3 Password 12

3.3.1 Password protection 12

3.3.2 Entering the password 12

3.3.3 Changing the password 13

3.4 ALARM display 13

3.4.1 Electrical system ALARMS 13

3.4.2 Relay Hardware or Software ALARMS 16

3.5 Contenu du menu 17

3.5.1 OP. PARAMETERS Menu 19


3.5.2.1 DISPLAY sub-menu 21

3.5.2.2 CT RATIO sub-menu 22

3.5.2.3 RL1 Output Relay sub-menu 22

3.5.2.4 Led 5 to 8 configuration sub-menus 23

3.5.2.5 Group Select sub-menu 26

3.5.2.6 Alarms sub-menu 27


3.5.2.7 Configuration Inputs sub-menu 27

3.5.2.8 Date format sub-menu 28

3.5.3 MEASUREMENTS Menu 29

3.5.4 COMMUNICATION Menu 32

3.5.4.1 MODBUS COMMUNICATION Menu 32

3.5.4.2 Courier COMMUNICATION Menu 32

3.5.4.3 IEC 60870-5-103 COMMUNICATION Menu 33

3.5.4.4 DNP3 COMMUNICATION Menu 33


3.5.5.1 [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu 34

3.5.5.1.1 I> DMT threshold menu 35

3.5.5.1.2 I> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curve menu 35

3.5.5.1.2.1 I> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu 35

3.5.5.1.2.2 I> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu 35

3.5.5.1.2.2.1 I> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu 35

3.5.5.1.3 I> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu 36

3.5.5.1.3.1 I> DMT reset time, Electromechanical RI curves menu 36

3.5.5.1.4 >> threshold menu 36

3.5.5.1.5 I>>> threshold menu 36

3.5.5.2 [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu 37

3.5.5.2.1 Ie> DMT threshold menu 37

3.5.5.2.2 Ie> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu 37

3.5.5.2.2.1 Ie> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu 38

3.5.5.2.2.2 Ie> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu 38

3.5.5.2.2.3 Ie> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu 38

3.5.5.2.3 Ie> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu 38

3.5.5.2.3.1 Ie> DMT reset time, RI curves menu 38

3.5.5.2.4 Ie> threshold, LABORELEC curve 38

3.5.5.2.5 Ie>> threshold menu 39

3.5.5.2.6 Ie>>> threshold menu 39

3.5.5.3 [46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE I2> sub-menu 39

3.5.5.3.1 I2> DMT threshold menu 40

3.5.5.3.2 I2> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu 40

3.5.5.3.2.1 I2> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu 40


3.5.5.3.2.2 I2> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu 40

3.5.5.3.2.3 I2> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu 41

3.5.5.3.3 I2> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu 41

3.5.5.3.3.1 I2> DMT reset time, RI curves 41

3.5.5.4 [49] Therm OL sub-menu 42

3.5.5.5 [37] UNDERCURRENT I< sub-menu 43

3.5.5.6 [79] AUTORECLOSE sub-menu 43

3.5.5.6.1 [79] EXTERNAL CB FAILURE 44

3.5.5.6.2 [79] EXTERNAL BLOCKING 44

3.5.5.6.3 [79] DEAD and RECLAIM TIMES 44


3.5.6.1 Trip Commands sub-menu 46

3.5.6.2 Latch Functions Sub-Menu 48

3.5.6.3 Blocking Logic sub-menu 49

3.5.6.4 Logic Select sub-menu 51

3.5.6.5 Outputs Relays sub-menu 52

3.5.6.6 Latch of the Output relays RL2 to RL6 55

3.5.6.7 Inputs sub-menu 56

3.5.6.8 BROKEN CONDUCTOR sub-menu 57

3.5.6.9 COLD LOAD PICK-UP sub-menu 58

3.5.6.10 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE sub-menu 59

3.5.6.11 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION sub-menu 60

3.5.7 RECORDS Menu 62

3.5.7.1 CB MONITORING sub-menu 62

3.5.7.2 Fault Record sub-menu 63

3.5.7.3 DISTURBANCE RECORD sub-menu 64

3.5.7.4 Time PEAK VALUE sub-menu 65

4. WIRING 66

4.1 Current inputs (measurement) 66

4.2 Output relays 66


4.4 RS232 front communication port 67

4.5 Auxiliary supply 67

4.6 Logic inputs 68

4.7 RS485 rear communication port 68


BLANK PAGE


1. DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS

1.1 General information

The MiCOM P124 relays, in their self-powered and dual-powered versions, make best use of numerical techniques to provide protection and control functions.

They have 4 analogue inputs (3 phase currents and 1 earth current). The current inputs have to be specified on order (1A or 5A).

The front panel allows the user access to the information in the relay, either via the LEDs and/or magnetic flags, or via the LCD and keypad.

The various alarms are saved in memory and are available to the user on the backlit LCD. Reading and clearing of these alarms are possible without password.

Viewing the settings and measurements is not password protected but modification or deletion can only be done after entering the saved password.

MiCOM P124 Self-powered :

This model provides fully comprehensive protection functions without and external power supply.

The power is taken from line currents provided by the CTs (the minimum load current must be over 0.2 In on at least one phase).

MiCOM P124 Dual-powered :

The MiCOM relay dual-powered version can be powered either by an external power supply source or by the line currents from the CTs (the minimum load current must be over 0.2 In on at least one phase).

The auxiliary power supply of the relay is provided by a dc or ac auxiliary source through a high capacity internal transformer which protects the relays against short interruptions (<50ms). In case of auxiliary power loss, the relay is powered by the line CTs (downgraded mode) and performs the same functions as the self-powered model.

MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relays have available via their rear connectors, a standard RS485 port. Communication protocols can be chosen at the time of order, from MODBUS RTU, Courier, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3. Using the communication channel, all stored information (measurements, alarms, parameters) can be read, and settings can be modified.

RS485 based communication allows MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relays to be directly linked to a digital control system (MiCOM S10 for example). All the available data is then placed at the disposal of the supervisor and can be processed either locally or remotely.

Consultation and modification of this data can be carried out on site with a normal PC and the appropriate Schneider Electric software MiCOM S1.

It is possible to assign the output relays to any of the available control or protection functions. The logic inputs can also be assigned to the control functions.

CHAPTER 4 OF THE TECHNICAL GUIDE DESCRIBES THE USER INTERFACE AND THE CONNECTIONS OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAY DUAL-POWERED VERSION.


1.2 Trip of the circuit breaker

Both versions of the MiCOM P124 relays can trip the circuit breaker from a C/O output contact and/or a heavy burden output to power a striker

Whatever the version (dual or self-powered), the MiCOM P124 relays can trip the circuit breaker via a C/O contact or striker output.

Trip via a striker output:

The relay performs a capacitance discharge output capable of putting out sufficient power (20mJ at 12V) to a striker (K1.3 type or equivalent) releasing the actuating mechanism of the CB.

P124

Striker output

39 +

41

FIGURE 1: STRIKER SUPPLIED FROM P124

This tripping output is completely independent from any auxiliary supply.

Trip via a changeover contact:

The relay performs a changeover contact relay output with a high breaking capacity to trip the circuit breaker coil.

The operation of the changeover contact is completely independent from any auxiliary supply. On the other hand, an auxiliary supply will be necessary for the supply of the CB coil.

Auxiliary supply

P124

RL1

44

42

40

Auxiliary supply

FIGURE 2: TRIP OF THE CB COIL VIA A CHANGEOVER CONTACT NOTE: The change over contact can be used with fail-safe operation.

This mode can be programmed in the "Configuration/RL1 output relay/fail-safe relay".


2. USER INTERFACE

The MiCOM P124 relay front panel serves as an interface between the user and the protection relay. It enables the user to enter relay settings, display the measured values, alarms and display clearly the various actions carried out by MiCOM P124 relay.

The front panel of the relay consists of three separate sections:

− The LCD display and the keypad,

− The Led's

− The two zones under the upper and lower flaps.

The battery box (accessory):

Associated with the MiCOM P124 relays, the battery box MiCOM E1 can be used to allow the user to access the menu when there is no line current (circuit breaker open).

2.1 The LCD display and the keypad

2.1.1 The LCD display

The front panel of the MiCOM P124 relays caries a liquid crystal display (LCD) on which data such as settings, measured values and alarms can be viewed. The data is accessed through a menu system.

The liquid crystal display has two lines each with sixteen characters. A back-light is activated when any key is pressed and will remain lit for five minutes after the last key press. This allows the display to be read in most lighting conditions.

NOTA : IN CASE OF AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY FAILURE AND IN ORDER TO SAVE ENERGY, THE LCD IS BACKLIT ONLY WHEN THERE IS AT LEAST ONE PHASE CURRENT ABOVE 0.5 IN.

2.1.2 Keypad

The keypad has seven keys divided into two groups :

Two keys situated immediately under the screen (keys ! and ").

Five main keys situated at the middle of the front face are for programming.

The two keys ! and " are dedicated for reading and acknowledging the alarms. So as to display successive alarms, press on key ". The alarms are presented in reverse order for their detection (the most recent first, the oldest last). So as to acknowledge the alarms, the user can either acknowledge each alarm using ! or go to the end of the ALARM menu and carry out a general acknowledgement.

NOTA : NO PASSWORD IS REQUIRED TO ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS.


The five keys situated in the middle of the MiCOM front panel are dedicated to set the relay.

The keys make it possible to move in the direction indicated to the various levels of the menus.

The key validates a choice or value (modification of settings).

2.2 Front panel LED and magnetic flag

Height LEDS and up to 5 magnetic flags are available for the dual-powered version of the P124 relay.

The default corresponding labels on the front panel are in the English language but the user is provided with a set of French stickers.

2.3 The two areas under the top and bottom flaps

Under the upper flap, a label identifies the relay according to its model (ordering code) and series number. This information defines the product uniquely and specifically.

In making all requests for information from Schneider Electric After Sales Department, please quote these two numbers.

Information indicated in the lower portion of this label covers the auxiliary supply voltage, the nominal earth current value and the rated current (1A or 5A).

Under the lower flap, a RS232 port is available to download a new version of the protection software, as well as the settings created in a dedicated PC software MiCOM S1. The same software allows to view all the relays internal data (measurements, events…).

In case of auxiliary power supply failure and when there is no line current from the CTs (circuit breaker open), the user can view or modify the settings by powering the MiCOM P124 relay with the battery box MiCOM E1 connected to the RS232 port.

The withdrawability of the MiCOM active part (chassis) from the case is effected by opening the two flaps, then with a 3mm screwdriver, turn the extractor situated under the upper flap, and pull using the two slots situated behind these flaps.


2.4 The battery box

To MiCOM P124RS 232

Battery box

Input forexternal supply12Vcc 24Vcc

FIGURE 3: BATTERY BOX MiCOM E1

The battery box performs the two following functions:

1. Temporary powering of the relay in order to allow the user to view or modify data when the auxiliary power supply has failed. The battery used is a 6LR61 type (9V) which can power the relay up to 3 hours.

When the battery is flat it is possible to power the battery box with an external dc supply. The dc voltage value must be comprised between 12Vdc and 24Vdc.

2. RS232 interface between the MiCOM P124 relay and the PC equipped with the setting software MiCOM S1.


2.5 Description of the MiCOM P124 dual-powered front panel

2 tactile keys to readand clear alarms andmessages

Healthy LEDWarning LEDAlarm LEDTrip LED

Pile

5-key keypad forsettings and viewing

RS 232

Removable flapsto extract theactive part

2 x 16 characterbacklit LCD display

Magnetic flags :- 1 trip- 4 programmable

4 programmable LEDs

FIGURE 4: MiCOM P124 DUAL-POWERED FRONT PANEL

2.5.1 Leds

Eight Leds are located in the left portion of the front face (numbered from 1 to 8 starting from the top):

Led 1 Colour : RED Label : Trip

Led 1 indicates when a trip order has been issued by the relay to the cut-off element (circuit breaker, contactor). This Led recopies the trip order issued to the Trip logic output relay and/or the striker output. Its normal state is unlit. It is illuminated as soon as a triggering order is issued. It goes out when the associated alarm is acknowledged.

NOTE: this LED is out of service when the auxiliary power supply has failed, even if sufficient line currents are present in the CTs.

Led 2 Colour : ORANGE Label : Alarm

Led 2 indicates that an alarm has been registered by MiCOM P124 relay. The alarms are either threshold crossings (instantaneous), or tripping orders (time delayed). As soon as an alarm is registered, the Led flashes. When all the stored alarms are read, the Led is illuminated continuously.

When all the alarms are acknowledged, the Led goes out.

NOTE: - the alarms generated by intantaneous indications are self or hand-resettable. - the programmation self-reset (Yes or No) is possible in the "Configuration/Alarms" menu. - this Led is out of service when the auxiliary supply has failed, even if sufficient line currents are present in the CTs.


Led 3 Color : ORANGE Label : Warning

Led 3 is dedicated to the internal alarms of MiCOM P124 relay. When a « minor » internal alarm (typically communication Fault) is detected, the Led flashes continuously. When the Fault is classed as « major », the Led is illuminated continuously. The extinction of this Led is only possible by the disappearance of the cause that provoked it (repair of the module, disappearance of the Fault).

NOTA : this LED is out of service when the auxiliary power supply has failed, even if sufficient line currents are present in the CTs. In that case, equipment failure is indicated by the watchdog contact (RL0).

Led 4 Colour : GREEN Label : Healthy

This LED indicates that the MiCOM P124 relay is powered by an auxiliary voltage within the rated operative range (0.8 to 1.2Uaux). In case of auxiliary supply failure, the LED indicates that the relay is correctly powered by a sufficient line current, provided by one or several CTs.

The LED is also lit when the relay is powered by the battery box.

Led 5 to 8 Colour : RED Label : Aux.1 to 4.

These Leds can be programmed by the user on the basis of information on available thresholds (instantaneous and time-delayed) and state of the logic. The user selects the information he wishes to see associates with each Led from the menu element (Logic OR). Each Led illuminates when the associated information is valid. The extinction of each Led is linked to the acknowledgement of the associated alarms.

NOTE: these LEDs are out of service when the auxiliary power supply has failed, even if sufficient line currents are present in the CTs.

2.5.2 Magnetic flags

There are five flags on the right hand side of the front panel.

On the base model, only one flag is available. It indicates that a tripping command has been issued to the CB coil or striker by switching to yellow. This flag is functional even during auxiliary power supply failure.

Optionally (selectable on order), four extra magnetic flags are functional even during power supply failure. These flags are used as backups of LEDS 5 to 8.

2.5.3 Battery backup

The front panel of each dual-powered MiCOM P124 relay is fitted with a battery to save the event, fault and disturbance records as well as thermal state in case of auxiliary power failure

The battery used is a 3.6V lithium battery.

WARNING: ONLY RECORDS MADE WHEN AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY IS PRESENT ARE SAVED IN MEMORY.


3. MENUS

The menu of the MiCOM P124 relays is organised into main and sub menus.

3.1 Default display

By default, the current value (selected phase or earth) is continuously displayed.

As soon as an alarm is generated by the MiCOM relay, that information is considered as priority and replaces the default value.

The default display choice is made in the CONFIGURATION/Display menu.

3.2 Access to the menu

Complete menu access is performed by manipulation of the keys # $ % &.

The general arrangement of the menus is shown in figure 3.

Reading of parameters and measurements is possible without entering the password.

Modification of the parameters requires entering the password.

Should an error be made in entering a parameter, press ! to cancel.

Except for reading and cancelling, the keys ! and " are inactive.

NOTA : The letter P is displayed when the password is entered.

If no key is pushed during 5 minutes, the password becomes inactive.

3.3 Password

3.3.1 Password protection

Password protection is applicable to the relay settings, especially to the selection of the various thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of inputs and outputs relays.

The password consists of four alphabetical capital characters. When leaving the factory, the password is AAAA. The user can define his own combination of characters.

Should the password be lost or forgotten, the modification of the stored parameters of the relay is prohibited. It is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his agent by specifying the serial number of the relay so as to receive a stand-by password specific to the relay concerned.

3.3.2 Entering the password

The input of the password is requested as soon as a modification of a parameter is made for any one of the menus or sub-menus. The user enters for each of the 4 characters/letters and validates the entire password with '.

After 5 seconds, the display returns to the point of the preceding menu.

If no action is taken on the keypad for 5 minutes, the password is desactivated. A new request shall be associated with any subsequent parameter modification. WARNING : WHILE THE PASSWORD IS ACTIVE, IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO

DOWNLOAD A SETTING FILE FROM THE PC SETTING SOFTWARE.


3.3.3 Changing the password

To change the active password, go to the OP. PARAMETERS menu and then to the point of the Password sub menu. Enter the old password and validate. Then press ' and enter the new password character per character and validate the new password using '.

The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the password has changed.

3.4 ALARM display

The management of alarms is directly displayed on the LCD. The display of alarm messages has priority over the default current value. As soon as an alarm is detected by the relay (threshold crossing for example), the message is displayed on the MiCOM LCD display and the Alarm Led (2nd Led) lights up.

The alarm messages are classed as follows :

⇒ Electrical power network alarm message

⇒ Hardware or software fault message from the relay.

3.4.1 Electrical system ALARMS

Any crossing of a threshold (instantaneous or time delay) generates an "electrical network alarm". For each threshold the involved threshold is indicated.

If several alarms are triggered, they are all stored in their order of appearance the most recent alarm first, the oldest alarm last. Each message is numbered and the total of messages is shown.

The user read all the alarm messages using " without entering the password.

The user acknowledges the alarms using !. The user can acknowledge each message one by one or all by going to the end of the list and acknowledge all the messages using !.

NOTE : note that the self-reset of the alarms generated by instantaneous (crossing of threshold) is possible by configuration in the "Configuration/Alarms/Inst. Self-reset. ?" menu.

The management of the Alarm Led is directly linked to the status of the stored alarms.

If one or several messages are NOT READ and NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the alarm Led flashes.

If all the messages have been READ but NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the alarm Led remains lights up continuously.

If all the messages have been READ and ACKNOWLEDGED, (if the alarm cause has been cleared) the alarm Led goes out.


The different electrical systems alarms are described below :

Ie> 1ST stage earth fault pick-up

Ie>> 2nd stage earth fault pick-up

Ie>>> 3rd stage earth fault pick-up

I> 1st stage overcurrent pick-up

I>> 2nd stage overcurrent pick-up

I>>> 3rd stage overcurrent pick-up

tIe> 1st stage earth fault time-out

tIe>> 2nd stage earth fault time-out

tIe>>> 3rd stage earth fault time-out

tI> 1st stage overcurrent time-out

tI>> 2nd stage overcurrent time-out

tI>>> 3rd stage overcurrent time-out

THERMAL ALARM thermal alarm threshold pick-up

THERMAL TRIP thermal trip threshold pick-up

I< undercurrent element pick-up

BRKN COND. broken conductor indication. I2/I1 element pick-up for longer than tBC. TBC is settable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Broken cond. menu.

t AUX 1 t AUX1 time-out

t AUX 2 t AUX2 time-out

CB FAILURE cirduit breaker failure indication (the CB does not trip on tBF time-out) tBF is settable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Fail menu.

I 2> negative sequence current threshold pick-up

tI 2> negative sequence current threshold time-out

SF6 LOW Faulty circuit breaker indication by assignable logic input (settable in AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu).

T operating CB Operating (or tripping) time of the circuit breaker longer than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.

CB OPEN NB Number of circuit breaker operation higher that the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.

Sum An Broken current measured higher than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.

TRIP CIRCUIT Circuit breaker trip circuit failure for longer than the supervision timer t SUP settable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.


CB CLOSE FAILURE Circuit breaker closing time longer than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.

RECLOSER SUCCESS Successful reclose indication. Indicates that when the fault has been cleared upon circuit breaker reclosure, and has not re-appeared before expiry of the reclaim time.

RECLOSER LOCKED Recloser blocking indication. Generated by:

- auxiliary power supply failure during dead time (definitive trip).

- external breaker failure indication (ex. SF6 low). Indication provided via a logic input assigned to the CB FAILURE function in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu.

- external blocking indication, external blocking can be set by the user in the PROTECTION/ [79] AUTORECLOSE/EXT BLOCK menu. This blocking information is provided via a logic input assigned to the Block [79] function in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu.

- definitive trip.

- remote trip command during the reclaim time.

- pick-up of I2> or thermal trip during dead time.

- breaker failure (circuit breaker failure to trip on expiry of tBF).

- breaker operating time (or tripping time) longer than the set time.

CONFLICT RECLOS. Configuration conflict of the recloser function. This indication is generated by:

- O/O Interlock not assigned to a logic input or assigned but not wired to the input.

- no output relay assigned to the CB CLOSE function (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays menu ).

- trip contact latched.

- no recloser cycle assigned to the protection functions (PROTECTION/ [79] Autoreclose menu ).

LATCH OUTPUT RELAY Information displayed when at least an output relay (RL2 to RL6) is latched.


3.4.2 Relay Hardware or Software ALARMS

Any software or hardware Fault of the MiCOM relay generates a "hard/software alarm". If several alarms are acquired they are all stored in their order of appearance. Display of the alarms is in reverse order (the most recent first and the oldest last). Each message is numbered and the total of messages is indicated below.

The user can read all the alarm messages with the aid of ", without entering the password.

The acknowledgement of the relay alarm messages is IMPOSSIBLE. Only the disappearance of the cause reset the alarm.

The management of the WARNING Led is directly linked to the status of the alarms stored in the memory.

If the fault is major (the relay cannot perform protection functions), the WARNING Led is lit fixed.

If the Fault is minor (no influence on the protection and automation function e.g.communication failure), the WARNING Led is flashing.

Possible Hardware or Software alarm messages :

Major fault :

The protection and automation functions are stopped. The RL0 watchdog relay is de-energised (35-36 contact closed).

« AUX SUPPLY LOST » : Information displayed in case of loose of auxiliary power supply and RL1 configured in fail-safe operation. The MiCOM P124 relay being self-powered by CTs.

« EEPROM ERROR DATA » : Data in EEPROM memory in fault

« CT ERROR » : Analogue channel in fault

« EEPROM ERROR CALIBR » : Calibration zone in fault

Minor fault :

The MiCOM P124 is fully operational. The RL0 watchdog relay is energised (35-36 contact open, 36-37 contact closed).

« BATTERY FAIL » : Battery in fault ; battery flat or not correctly in place.

« COMM. ERROR » : Communications failure

« RAM ERROR » : Battery backed memory

« CLOCK ERROR » : Clock error

NOTE : the "Battery fail" and "RAM error" messages can be configured displayed yes or no in the "Configuration/Alarms" menu.


3.5 Contenu du menu

DEFAULT DISPLAY

IA = 1245 AOP PARAMETERS

CONFIGURATION

MEASUREMENTS

COMMUNICATION

PROTECTION G1

PROTECTION G2

AUTOMAT. CTRL

RECORDS

FIGURE 3 : ORGANISATION OF MiCOM P124 DUAL-POWERED MAIN MENU


The menu of the MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relays is divided into 8 sections :

⇒ OP PARAMETERS

⇒ CONFIGURATION

⇒ MEASUREMENTS

⇒ COMMUNICATION

⇒ PROTECTION G1

⇒ PROTECTION G2

⇒ AUTOMAT. CTRL

⇒ RECORDS

To access these menus from the default display use $

To return to the default display from these menus or sub-menus press #. NOTE : a Menu content table is given in the chapter 4-2.


3.5.1 OP. PARAMETERS Menu

OP PARAMETERS Heading of the OP PARAMETERS menu.

Password ****

Entry of the password to be able to modify the MiCOM relay settings and parameters. To enter the password, press '

Password AAAA

Entry of the password is made letter by letter using # $ to go up or down the alphabet. After each letter, press % to enter the following letter. At the end, press ' to validate the password. If the password is correct, the message « PASSWORD OK » is displayed on the screen.

WARNING : AS SOON AS THE PASSWORD HAS BEEN ENTERED, NO SETTING CHANGE USING THE COMMUNICATION (RS485 OR RS232) CAN BE ACCEPTED AND THIS DURING 5 MINUTES

Description P124 D

Displays the MiCOM P124 applicable relay model S = Self-powered (Without auxiliary power supply) D = Dual-powered power supply (with auxiliary supply)

Reference = ALST

Displays the name of the equipment associated with the relay. The entry of the reference is made by character by character using # $. After each character (letter, number or sign), press % to enter the following character. At the end of entering, press ' to validate the reference. NOTE : The reference is initially set in the factory to ALST.

Software Version 4.A

Displays the version of the software.

Frequency = 50 Hz

Nominal value of the network frequency. Select either 50 or 60 Hz. To modify this value, press ' and press # $ to select the desired value. Validate your choice using '.

Active Group = 1

Displays the Active Group 1 = Protection Group G1 2 = Protection Group G2


Input 54321 Status 01011

Displays the state of the logic Inputs. The Logic Inputs are numbered from 1 to 5 starting from the right. The state of each input is : - state 0 : input inactive - state 1 : input active

Relay 654321 Status 001011

Displays the state of the logic outputs. The Logic Outputs are numbered from 1 to 6 starting from the right. The state of each output is : - state 0 : output relay inactive - state 1 : output relay active NOTE : The Watch-dog output (RL0) is not display in the output status menu.

Date 09/11/01

Displays the date. To modify this date press 'then using % to enter the required value. Enable your choice using '. In this example the date is : 09 November 2001.

Time 13:15:33

Displays the hour. To modify this hour press ' then using % to enter the required value. Enable your choice using '. In this example the time is : 13 hours, 15 minutes, 33 secondes



The CONFIGURATION menu makes it possible to configure the labels used to display currents, the Earth and Phase CT ratios and also configure Leds 5 to 8.


⇒ Display

⇒ CT Ratio

⇒ Led 5

⇒ RL1 Output Relay

⇒ Led 6

⇒ Led 7

⇒ Led 8

⇒ Group Select

⇒ Alarms

⇒ Configuration Inputs

⇒ Date format

To gain access to the CONFIGURATION menu from the default display, press $ then %.

3.5.2.1 DISPLAY sub-menu

CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu.

Display

Heading of the DISPLAY sub-menu.

Default Display RMS I A

Display of the default current value (by selecting either Phase A, Phase B , Phase C, or Earth N). To modify this default value, press ' then using % to enter the required value. Enable your choice using '.

Phase A Text A

Edit phase A label by selecting A, L1, or R. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement.

Phase B Text B

Edit phase B label by selecting B, L2, or S. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement.


Phase C Text C

Edit phase C label by selecting C, L3, or T. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement.

E/Gnd Text N

Edit earth label by selecting N, E, or G. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement.

3.5.2.2 CT RATIO sub-menu


CT Ratio

Heading of the CT RATIO sub-menu.

Line CT primary 1000

Display of the primary ratio of the phase CT. The value consists of 4 digits: Minimum 1, Maximum 9999.

Press ' to modify this value and use # $ % & to display the new primary phase CT ratio.

Enable your choice using ' at the end of selection.

E/Gnd CT primary 1000

Display of the primary ratio of the earth CT. The consistof 4 digits : Minimum 1, Maximum 9999.

Press ' to modify this value and use # $ % & to display the new primary earth CT ratio.

Enable your choice using ' at the end of selection.

3.5.2.3 RL1 Output Relay sub-menu

This sub-menu enables the user to choose the operation mode of the trip output relay RL1. Fail-safe operation is possible.


RL1Output Relay Heading of the RL1 Output Relay sub-menu.

Fail-safe Relay Yes

Choice of the operation mode of the trip output relay RL1. Yes = fail-safe operation

NOTE : the fail-safe operation programmation is possible only without

alarm displayed.


3.5.2.4 Led 5 to 8 configuration sub-menus

25 different parameters can be assigned to each led.

These parameters are :

TEXT Information

I> Instantaneous first phase threshold

I>> Instantaneous second phase threshold

I>>> Instantaneous third phase threshold

tI> Time delayed first phase threshold

tI>> Time delayed second phase threshold

tI>>> Time delayed third phase threshold

Ie> Instantaneous first earth threshold

Ie>> Instantaneous second earth threshold

Ie>>> Instantaneous third earth threshold

tIe> Time delayed first earth threshold

tIe>> Time delayed second earth threshold

tIe>>> Time delayed third earth threshold

Therm Trip Trip on Thermal overload

Brkn Cond. Broken conductor detection

CB Fail Detection of a Circuit Breaker failure

tI2> Time delayed negative phase sequence

Input 1 Copy of the state of the Logic Input n°1





Recloser Run Auto-recloser function in progress

Recloser Blocked Auto-recloser function locked

t Aux 1 Copy of the state of the Logic Input delayed by t Aux 1

t Aux 2 Copy of the state of the Logic Input delayed by t Aux 2

NOTES : - Each parameter can be assigned to one or more Led's. - Each Led can be lit by one or more parameters (OR logic).


Example of Led 5 setting :


Led 5

Heading Led 5 sub-menu.

Led I > No

Displays the instantaneous threshold I> associated withLed 5. To modify this choice, press ' and using # scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using '.

Led tI > No

Displays the time delay threshold tI> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press ' and using # scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using '.

Led I >> No

Displays the instantaneous threshold I>> associated with LED 5.

Led tI >> No

Displays the time delay threshold tI>> associated with LED 5.

Led I >>> No

Displays the instantaneous threshold I>>> associated with LED 5.

Led tI >>> No

Displays the time delay threshold tI>>> associated with LED 5.

Led Ie > No

Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie> associated with LED 5.

Led tIe > No

Displays the time delay threshold tIe> associated with LED 5.

Led Ie >> No

Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie>> associated with LED 5.


Led tIe >> No

Displays the time delay threshold tIe>> associated with LED 5.

Led Ie >>> No

Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie>>> associated with LED 5.

Led tIe >>> No

Displays the time delay threshold tIe>>> associated with LED 5.

Led Therm. Trip Yes

Displays the thermal threshold tIθ trip order associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press ' and using # scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using '.

Led Brkn. Cond No

Displays the broken conductor information associated with LED 5.

Led CB Fail Yes

Displays the circuit breaker failure information associated with LED 5.

Led tI2 > Yes

Displays the negative phase sequence threshold tI2> associated with LED 5.

Led Input 1 No

Displays the state of the logic input 1 associated with LED 5.

Led Input 2 No


Led Input 3 No


Led Input 4 No



Led Input 5 No


Led Recloser Run No

Displays the state of the auto-recloser function (running or not) associated with LED 5.

Led Recloser Blocked No

Displays the state of the auto-recloser function (locked or free) associated with LED 5.

Led t Aux 1 Yes

Displays the state of the logic input delayed by t Aux 1.

Led t Aux 2 Yes

Displays the state of the logic input delayed by t Aux 2.

3.5.2.5 Group Select sub-menu

CONFIGURATION

Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the menu, press $, %, $, % 6 times.

Group Select

Heading of the CONFIGURATION SELECTION sub-menu. This allows the user to select the active setting group (1 or 2)

Change Group Input = EDGE

Displays the operation mode of the digital input associated to the change of group of protection : "EDGE" or "LEVEL". To change the operation mode, press ' then using #enter the required value. Enable your choice using '.

Setting Group 1

Display of the active setting group (1 or 2). To change the active setting group, press ' then using #enter the required value (1 or 2).


3.5.2.6 Alarms sub-menu

CONFIGURATION Heading of the configuration menu. To gain access to Alarms menu, press $, %, $, % 7 times.

Alarms Heading of the Alarms sub-menu. To gain access to the sub-menu content, press $.

Inst. Self-reset ? No

Displays the reset mode of the alarms concerning the instantaneous : self-reset Yes or No. If the user choosesNo, the reset will be done by push button. To change the reset mode press ' then using # scroll throught the available selections. Enable your choice using '.

Alarm Battery No

Displays the possibility Yes or No to display the alarm "RAM ERROR" or "BATTERY FAIL" in case of ram error orbattery failure.

3.5.2.7 Configuration Inputs sub-menu

It is possible to configure the operation of the digital input, either on falling edge/low level, or on rising edge/high level.

Falling edge or low level (idem for rising edge or high level) depends of the application of the digital inputs.

Example : a digital input configured "blocking logic" will operate on level, on the other hand a digital input configured "Cold load pick up" will operate on edge.

ONLY a digital input configured "change of setting group" can operate either on edge or on level.

Function allocated to the Digital Input Operation of the Digital Input

Unlatch of the output relays On level Position of the CB, 52a or 52b On level Blocking logic 1 & 2 On level Logic Selectivity 1 & 2 On level Aux 1 & Aux 2 On level CB Fault On level Reset of the thermal state On edge Blocking of the Autorecloser On level Cold load Pick Up On edge Start of disturbance record On edge Trip circuit supervision On level Change of setting group On edge, or on level CB Fail start On edge


CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to Configuration Inputs menu, press $, %, $, %8 times.

Configuration Inputs

Heading of the Configuration Inputs sub-menu. To gain access to the sub-menu content, press $.

Inputs 5 4 3 2 1 1 0 1 1 0

Displays the operation of the digital Inputs either on falling edge/low level, or on rising edge/high level. 0 = falling edge/low level 1 = rising edge/high level To change the operation mode press ' then using # scroll throught the available selections. Enable your choice using '.

3.5.2.8 Date format sub-menu

This sub-menu enables the user to choose the format of the date for Modbus communication.


Date format Heading of the Date format sub-menu.

Date format = PRIVATE

Displays the format of the date either PRIVATE or IEC protocol.


3.5.3 MEASUREMENTS Menu

MEASUREMENTS Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu. To gain access to the MEASUREMENTS menu, press $, %, 2 times.

Frequency 50.01 Hz

Display the network frequency calculated from phase currents

I A 257.05 A

Display the A phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CTRATIO sub-menu).

I B 258.80 A

Display the B phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CTRATIO sub-menu).

I C 257.50 A

Display the C phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CTRATIO sub-menu).

I N 20.00 A

Display the earth current (True RMS value) taking into account the earth CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub-menu).

I1 103 A

Display the positive sequence component

I2 50 A

Display the negative sequence component

RATIO I2/I1 50%

Display the ratio I2/I1

In - fn RST = [C] 0.0 A

Display the earth current (True RMS value) minus the current value at the fundamental frequency (value of the harmonics).

Thermal θ RST = [C] 0%

Displays the % thermal state based on true RMS values. To clear the % values, press !.


Max & Average I RST = [C]

Allows the user to clear the maximum (peak) and average (rolling) memorised values of the current. To clear these values, press !.

Max IA Rms 350 A

Display the peak value for phase A. The value is the true RMS maximum value.

Max IB Rms 0.00 A

Display the peak value for phase B. The value is the true RMS maximum value.

Max IC Rms 0.00 A

Display the peak value for phase C. The value is the true RMS maximum value.

Average IA Rms 150 A

Display the rolling value for phase A. The value is the true RMS average value.

Average IB Rms 148 A

Display the rolling value for phase B. The value is the true RMS average value.

Average IC Rms 153 A

Display the rolling value for phase C. The value is the true RMS average value.

Reclose Stats RST = [C]

Allows the user to clear the reclosing statistics. To clear these values, press !.

Total Recloses 0

Display the total number of reclosers.

Cycle 1 Recloses 0

Display the total number of cycle 1 reclosers.

Cycle 2 Recloses 0



Cycle 3 Recloses 0


Cycle 4 Recloses 0


Total Trip & Lockout 0

Display the total number of definitive trips issued from the autorecloser.


3.5.4 COMMUNICATION Menu

The COMMUNICATION menu depends on the type of communication : MODBUS, Courier, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.

3.5.4.1 MODBUS COMMUNICATION Menu

COMMUNICATION

Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. To gain access to the menu, press $, %, 3 times.

Communication ? Yes

Use MODBUS RTU communication via the RS485 on the rear of the relay. To activate communication, press the key ' and use $ to select Yes. Enable your choice using '.

Baud Rate 19200 Bd

Display of the speed of MODBUS transmission. Select from : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bauds using # and enable your choice using '.

Parity None

Display the parity in the MODBUS frame. Select Even, Odd or None using # and enable your choice using '.

Data Bits 8

Display of the number of data bits in the MODBUS frame. Select 7 or 8 using # and enable your choice using '.

Stop Bits 1

Display of the number of stop bits in the MODBUS frame. Select 0 or 1 using # and enable your choice using '.

Relay Address 12

Display of the network address of the MiCOM relay in the MODBUS network. Select from 1 to 255 using # and enable your choice using '.

WARNING : A MODBUS NETWORK CAN ONLY COMPRISE 32 RELAY ADDRESSES ON THE SAME MODBUS SUB-LAN.

3.5.4.2 Courier COMMUNICATION Menu

COMMUNICATION


Communication ? Yes

Use Courier communication via the RS485 on the rear of the relay. To activate communication, press the key ' and use # to select Yes. Enable your choice using '.

Relay Address 12

Display the network address of the MiCOM relay in the Courier network. Select from 1 to 255 using # and enable your choice using '.


3.5.4.3 IEC 60870-5-103 COMMUNICATION Menu

COMMUNICATION


Communication ? Yes

Use IEC 60870-5-103 communication via the RS485 on the rear of the relay. To activate communication, press the ' key and use # to select Yes. Enable your choice using '.

Data Bits 19200 Bd

Display of the speed of IEC 60870-5-103 transmission.Select from : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bauds using # and enable your choice using '.

Relay Address 29

Display of the network address of the MiCOM relay in the IEC 60870-5-103 network. Select from 1 to 255 using # and enable your choice using the key '.

3.5.4.4 DNP3 COMMUNICATION Menu

COMMUNICATION


To gain access to the sub-menu content, press $.

Communication ? Yes

Use DNP3 communication via the RS485 on the rear ofthe relay. To activate communication, press the key ' and use # to select Yes. Enable your choice using '.

Data Bits 9600 bd

Display of the speed of DNP3 transmission. Select from : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bauds using # and enable your choice using '.

Relay Address 29

Display of the network address of the MiCOM relay in the DNP3 network. Select from 1 to 255 using # and enable your choice using the key '.


3.5.5 PROTECTION Menu

The PROTECTION menu (design as PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menus in MiCOM P124 Dual-powered enables a user to program various protection functions and settings (thresholds, time delay) associated with each of the phase or earth protection functions.


⇒ [50/51] Phase OC

⇒ [50N/51N] E/Gnd

⇒ [46] Neg seq OC

⇒ [49] Therm OL

⇒ [37] Under Current

⇒ [79] Autoreclose

To gain access to the PROTECTION G1 menu for press $ then % four times.

To gain access to the PROTECTION G2 menu, press $ then % five times.

3.5.5.1 [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu

PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION menu.

50/51] Phase OC

Heading of the [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu.

I > ? Yes

Selection of the first phase threshold (I>). Select Yes or No. If the user enters I>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I> (No), go to I>> menu.

I > 0.1 In

Displays the threshold current value I>. To modify this value, press '.The threshold I> is adjustable from 0.1 to 4 In. Press ' to enable your adjustment.

Delay Type DMT

Selection of the I> time delay type threshold. Select (DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve).


3.5.5.1.1 I> DMT threshold menu

Delay Type DMT

Display of the I> DMT time delay.

t I > 100 ms

Selection of the I> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.

3.5.5.1.2 I> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curve menu

Delay Type IDMT

Display the I> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).

Idmt IEC SI

Selection of the I> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, IEC RC, using # and enable your choice using the key '.

Tms 0.025

Select the curve TMS value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and enable your choice using '.

3.5.5.1.2.1 I> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu

t Reset 60 ms

Selection of the t Reset value from 40 ms to 100 s using # and enable your choice using '.

3.5.5.1.2.2 I> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu

Type Tempo Reset DMT

Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using # and enable your choice using '.

t Reset 60 ms

Selection of the t Reset value associated with the DMT reset time choice. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using # and enable your choice using '.

3.5.5.1.2.2.1 I> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu

Type Tempo Reset IDMT


Rtms 0.025

Selection of the Rtms value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and enable your choice using '.


3.5.5.1.3 I> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu

Delay Type RI

Display of the I> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve)

K 0.1


3.5.5.1.3.1 I> DMT reset time, Electromechanical RI curves menu

t Reset 60 ms


3.5.5.1.4 >> threshold menu

I >> ? Yes

Selection of the I>> second phase threshold. Select Yes or No. If the user enters I>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I>> (No) go to I>>> menu.

I >> 2.0 In

Selection of the I>> second threshold current value. Tomodify this value, press '. The threshold I>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In. Press ' to enable your adjustment.

tI >> 300 ms

Selection of the second threshold I>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.

3.5.5.1.5 I>>> threshold menu

I >>> ? Yes

Selection of the I>>> third phase threshold. Select Yesor No. If the user enters I>>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I>>> (No), the LCD display returns to the heading of the menu [50/51] Phase OC.

I >>> 10.0 In

Selection of the I>>> third threshold current value. To modify this value, press '. The threshold I>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In. Press ' to enable your adjustment

tI >>> 110 ms

Selection of the third threshold I>>> time delay. Selectthe time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.


3.5.5.2 [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu


[50N/51N] E/Gnd Heading of the [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu

Ie> ? Yes

Selection of the first earth threshold (Ie>). Select Yes or No. If the If the user enters Ie>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user user enters > (No), go to Ie>> menu

le > 0.01 I0n

Displays the current threshold value Ie>. To modify thisvalue, press '. The threshold Ie> is adjustable from : 0.002 to 1 Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range) 0.01 to 1 Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien Range) 0.1 to 25 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ien Range) Press ' to enable your adjustment.

Delay Type DMT

Selection of the Ie> threshold time delay type. Select (DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve and LABOR.* for Laborelec curves) using # and enable your choice using '. *Note: available for 0.01 to 8 Ien range only.

3.5.5.2.1 Ie> DMT threshold menu

Delay Type DMT

Display of the Ie> DMT time delay.

tIe > 100 ms

Selection of the Ie> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.

3.5.5.2.2 Ie> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu

Delay Type DMT

Display of the Ie> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).

Idmt IEC SI

Selection of the Ie> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, or IEC RC, using # and enable your choice using the key '.

Tms 0.025

Selection of the selected curve Tms value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and enable your choice using '.


3.5.5.2.2.1 Ie> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu

t Reset 60 ms


3.5.5.2.2.2 Ie> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu



t Reset 60 ms

Selection of the t Reset value associated with the DMT reset time choice. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using # and enable your choice using '.

3.5.5.2.2.3 Ie> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu



Rtms 0.025

Selection of the Rtms value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and enable your choice using '.

3.5.5.2.3 Ie> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu

Delay type RI

Display of the Ie> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve).

K 0.1


3.5.5.2.3.1 Ie> DMT reset time, RI curves menu

t Reset 60 ms


3.5.5.2.4 Ie> threshold, LABORELEC curve

Delay Type LABOR.

Display of the Ie> inverse time delay type LABORELEC

Idmt 1

Selection of the associated curve. Select curve 1, curve 2 or curve 3.

t Reset 40 ms

Selection of the t Reset value associated to the LABORELEC curve. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using ' and enable your choice using '.


3.5.5.2.5 Ie>> threshold menu

Ie>> ? Yes

Selection of the Ie>> second earth threshold. Select Yes or No. If the user enters Ie>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters>> (No) go to Ie>>> menu

Ie>> 0.1 I0n

Selection of the Ie>> second threshold current value. To modify this value, press '. The threshold Ie>> is adjustable from : 0.002 to 1Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range) 0.01 to 8 Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien Range) 0.5 to 40 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ien Range) Press ' to validate your adjustment.

tIe>> 300 ms

Selection of the second threshold Ie>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using # and validate your choice using '.

3.5.5.2.6 Ie>>> threshold menu

Ie>>> ? Yes

Selection of the Ie>>> third earth threshold. Select Yes or No. If the user validates Ie>>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters Ie>>> (No), the LCD display returns to the heading of the menu [50N/51N] E/Gnd.

Ie>>> 1.0 I0n

Selection of the Ie>>> third threshold current value.The threshold Ie>> is adjustable from : 0.002 to 1Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range) 0.01 to 8 Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien Range) 0.5 to 40 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ion Range) Press ' to validate your adjustment.

tIe>>> 300 ms

Selection of the third threshold Ie>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and validate your choice using '.

3.5.5.3 [46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE I2> sub-menu


[46] Neg Seq OC Heading of the [46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE I2>sub-menu.

I2 > ? Yes

Selection of the negative phase sequence overcurrent function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), no menu is activated.


I2 > 0.1 In

Displays the negative phase sequence threshold value I2>. To modify this value, press '. The threshold I2> is adjustable from 0.01 to 40 In step of 0.01 In. Press ' to validate your adjustment.

Delay Type DMT

Selection of the I2> threshold time delay type. Select (DMT for independent time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve) using # and validate your choice using '.

3.5.5.3.1 I2> DMT threshold menu

Delay Type DMT

Display of the I2> DMT time delay.

t I2 > 100 ms

Selection of the I2> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using # and validate your choice using '.

3.5.5.3.2 I2> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu

Delay Type IDMT

Display of the I2> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSIcurves).

Curve IEC SI

Selection of the I2> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI using # and validate your choice using the key '.

Tms 0.025

Selection of the selected curve Tms value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and validate your choice using '.

3.5.5.3.2.1 I2> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu

t Reset 60 ms

Selection of the t Reset value from 40 ms to 100 s using # and validate your choice using '.

3.5.5.3.2.2 I2> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu


Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using # and validate your choice using '.

t Reset 60 ms

Selection of the t Reset value associated with the DMT reset time choice. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using # and validate your choice using '.


3.5.5.3.2.3 I2> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu


Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using # and validate your choice using '.

Rtms 0.025

Selection of the Rtms value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and validate your choice using '.

3.5.5.3.3 I2> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu

Delay Type RI

Display of the I2> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve).

K 0.1

Selection of the RI curve K value. Select from 0.100 to 10 using # and validate your choice using '.

3.5.5.3.3.1 I2> DMT reset time, RI curves

t Reset 60 ms

Selection of the t Reset value from 40 ms to 100 s using # and validate your choice using '.


3.5.5.4 [49] Therm OL sub-menu


[49] Therm OL Heading of the [49] Therm OL (Thermal Overload) sub-menu

Therm OL ? Yes

Selection of the thermal overload function. Select Yes or No. If the user enters Yes, the following menu is displayed. If the user enters No, no menu content is displayed.

Iθ > 0.3 In

Displays the thermal current threshold value Iθ>. To modify this value, press '. The threshold Iθ> is adjustable from 0.2 to 3.2 In step of 0.01. Press ' to validate your choice.

Te 1 mn

Displays the Te thermal time constant associated with the thermal overload formula. To modify this value, press '. The time constant Te is adjustable from 1 min to 200 min, step of 1 min. Press ' to validate your adjustment.

k 1.05

Displays the k factor associated with the thermal overload function. To modify this value, press '. k factor is adjustable from 1 to 1.5, step of 0.01. Press ' to validate your adjustment.

θ Trip 100%

Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload trip threshold. To modify this value, press . θ Trip is adjustable from 50 % to 200 % step of 1%. Press ' to validate your adjustment.

θ Alarm ? Yes

Selection of the thermal overload alarm function. SelectYes or No. If the user validates Yes, the following menu is displayed. If the user validate No, refer to the THERMAL OVERLOAD sub-menu.

θ Alarm 100%

Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload alarm threshold. To modify this value, press '. θ Trip is adjustable from 50 % to 200 % step of 1%. Press ' to validate your adjustment.


3.5.5.5 [37] UNDERCURRENT I< sub-menu


[37] Under Current

Heading of the [37] Under-Current sub-menu.

I < ? Yes

Selection of the undercurrent function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), no menu points is activated.

I < 20 %

Displays the undercurrent threshold value I<. To modify this value, press '. The threshold I< is adjustable from 2 % to 100 % In, step of 1 %. Press ' to validate your adjustment.

tI < 100 ms

Selection of the tI< time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s.

3.5.5.6 [79] AUTORECLOSE sub-menu


[79] Autoreclose Heading of the [79] AUTORECLOSER sub-menu

Autoreclose ? Yes

Selection of the autoreclose function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), no menu is activated.

Ext CB Fail ? Yes

Selection of the external circuit breaker failure function associated with the autorecloser function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), the Ext Block sub menu is activated.


3.5.5.6.1 [79] EXTERNAL CB FAILURE

Ext CB Fail Yes

Allows the use of a dedicated input (CB FLT) to inform the autorecloser function of the state (failure or operational) of the CB.

Ext CB Fail Time 10 ms

Selection of the external CB failure time delay tCFE. Select the time delay from 10 ms to 600 s using #. Validate your choice using '.

3.5.5.6.2 [79] EXTERNAL BLOCKING

Ext Block ? No

Allows the use of a dedicated input (Block_79) to block the autorecloser function.

3.5.5.6.3 [79] DEAD and RECLAIM TIMES

Dead Time tD1 150 ms

Selection of the First Cycle Dead Time (tD1) value associated with the autoreclose function. Select from 10 ms to 300 s step of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '.

Dead Time tD2 1.5 s

Selection of the Second Cycle Dead Time (tD2) value associated with the autoreclose function. Select from 10 ms to 300 s step of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '.

Dead Time tD3 10 s

Selection of the Third Cycle Dead Time (tD3) value associated with the autoreclose function. Select from 10 ms to 600 s step of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '.

Dead Time tD4 10 s

Selection of the Fourth Cycle Dead Time (tD4) value associated with the autoreclose function. Select from 10 ms to 600 step of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '.

Reclaim Time tR 10 s

Selection of the Reclaim Time (tR) value associated with the autoreclose function. Select from 20 ms to 600 s step of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '.

Inhib Time tI 520 ms

Selection of the Inhibit Time (tI) value associated with the autoreclose function (following a manual CB closure). Select from 20 ms to 600 s step of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '.

Phase Cycles 3

Selection of the number of cycles associated with the phase autoreclose function. Select from 0 to 4 using # and validate your choice using '.


E/Gnd Cycles 2

Selection of the number of cycles associated with the earth autoreclose function. Select from 0 to 4 using # and validate your choice using '.

CYCLES 4321 tI > 1101

0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tI> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tI> pick-up

CYCLES 4321 tI >> 1211

0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tI>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tI>> pick-up

CYCLES 4321 tI >>> 1110

0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tI>>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tI>>> pick-up

CYCLES 4321 tIe > 0111

0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tIe> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tIe> pick-up

CYCLES 4321 tIe >> 1121

0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tIe>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tIe>> pick-up

CYCLES 4321 tIe >>> 1111

0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tIe>>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle

CYCLES 4321 tAux1 1112

0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tAux1 pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on t Aux1 pick-up

CYCLES 4321 tAux2 0111

0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on t Aux2 pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tAux2 pick-up



The AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu makes it possible to programme the various automation functions included in the MiCOM P124.


⇒ Trip Commands

⇒ Latch Functions (associated to trip relay RL1)

⇒ Blocking logic 1

⇒ Blocking Logic 2

⇒ Logic Select. 1

⇒ Logic Select. 2

⇒ Outputs Relays (RL2 to RL6)

⇒ Latch output relay (RL2 to RL6)

⇒ Inputs

⇒ Broken Conductor

⇒ Cold load PU

⇒ CB Fail

⇒ CB Supervision

To access the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu, press # then the key $ six times.

3.5.6.1 Trip Commands sub-menu

This sub-menu makes it possible to assign to the trip output (RL1) part or all the selected thresholds.

AUTOMAT.CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu.

Trip Commands Heading of the Trip ORDER sub-menu.

Trip tI> Yes

Allocation of the first phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>) to the trip output (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, the trip output relay (RL1) shall be activated at the end of the time delay tI>. If the user validates No, the trip output relay (RL1) shall never be activated, even at the end of the time delay tI>.

Trip tI>> Yes

Allocation of the second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.


Trip tI>>> Yes

Allocation to the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.

Trip tIe> Yes

Allocation of the first earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.

Trip tIe>> Yes

Allocation of the second earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.

Trip tIe>>> Yes

Allocation of the third earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.

Trip tI < No

Allocation of the under-current threshold to the trip output Select Yes or No.

Trip tI2 > Yes

Allocation of the delayed negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.

Trip Thermal θ Yes

Allocation of the thermal overload Trip information (θ Trip) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.

Trip Brkn.Cond No

Allocation of the broken conductor detection to the trip output. Select Yes or No.

Trip t Aux 1 Yes

Allocation of the delayed auxiliary input Aux 1 to the trip output. Select Yes or No.

Trip t Aux 2 Yes

Allocation of the delayed auxiliary input Aux 2 to the trip output. Select Yes or No.


3.5.6.2 Latch Functions Sub-Menu

This sub-menu makes it possible to latch the trip output relay (RL1) associated with one or several thresholds after the cause has disappeared.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

Latch Functions Heading of the Latch functions associated to the trip output relay RL1 sub-menu.

Latch tI> Yes

Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the first phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tI> disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tI>.

Latch tI>> Yes

Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tI>> disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tI>>.

Latch tI>>> Yes

Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tI>>> disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tI>>>.

Latch tIe> Yes

Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the first earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>) (selectYes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tIe> disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tIe>.

Latch tIe>> Yes

Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the second earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tIe>> disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tIe>>.

Latch tIe>>> Yes

Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the third earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tIe>>> disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tIe>>>.

Latch tI < Yes

Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the time delay undercurrent threshold (tI<) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tI< disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tI<.


Latch tI2 > Yes

Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the time delay negative phase overcurrent threshold (tI2>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tI2> disappeared. If the user validatesNo, RL1 shall drop out after tI2>.

Latch Thermal θ Yes

Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the thermal overload trip information (θ trip) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after θ trip disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after θ trip.

Latch Brkn.Cond No

Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the broken conductor function (Latch Brkn. Cond) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after Latch Brkn. Cond. Information disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after Latch Brkn. Cond.

Latch t Aux 1 Yes

Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the delayed auxiliary input (Aux 1) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tAux 1 disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tAux 1.

Latch t Aux 2 Yes

Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the delayed auxiliary input (Aux 2) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tAux 2 disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tAux 2.

3.5.6.3 Blocking Logic sub-menu

The Blocking Logic sub-menu is labelled as Blocking Logic 1 t and Blocking Logic 2 t for the dual powered MiCOM P124 relays.

The Blocking Logic (1) t allows blocking of each time delayed stage by the input assigned to the Blocking Logic function (1) BLOCK LG 1 (refer to inputs menu).

The same Blocking Logic (2) t submenu allows blocking of each time delayed stage by the input assigned to the Blocking Logic function (2) BLOCK LG 2 (refer to inputs menu).


Blocking Logic Heading of the Blocking Logic sub-menu.

Block 1 tI> Yes

Blocking logic of the first phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, the first threshold shall be locked on the transition (logic state 1) of the Logic "Blk log" logic input. If the user validates No, the transition of the "Blk log" logic input shall not alter the first phase threshold tI>.


Block 1 tI>> Yes

Blocking logic of the second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>). Select Yes or No.

Block 1 tI>>> Yes

Blocking logic of the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) Select Yes or No.

Block 1 tIe> Yes

Blocking logic of the first earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>). Select Yes or No.

Block 1 tIe>> Yes

Blocking logic of the second earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>). Select Yes or No.

Block 1 tIe>>> Yes

Blocking logic of the third earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>). Select Yes or No.

Block 1 tI2 > Yes

Blocking logic of the time delay negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.

Block 1 Thermal θ Yes

Blocking logic of the thermal state calculation. Select Yes or No.

Block 1 Brkn.Cond No

Blocking logic of the broken conductor function Select Yes or No.

Block 1 t Aux 1 No

Blocking logic of the time delay of the auxiliary input Aux 1. Select Yes or No.

Block 1 t Aux 2 No

Blocking logic of the time delay of the auxiliary input Aux 2. Select Yes or No.


3.5.6.4 Logic Select sub-menu

The Logic Select. 1 sub-menu allows the user to delay the 2nd and 3rd time delayed stages through the logic input assigned to the Log Sel 1 function (INPUTS sub-menu).

The Logic Select. 2 sub-menu allows the user to delay the 2nd and 3rd time delayed stages through the logic input assigned to the Log Sel 2 function (INPUTS sub-menu).


Logic Select. 1 Heading of the Logic Select. 1 sub-menu.

Sel1 tI>> Yes

Logic selectivity of the second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, operation of the second threshold shall be delayed for tSel1 on the transition (logic state 1) of the "Log Sel 1" logic input. If the user validates No, the transition of the "Log Sel 1" logic input shall notalter the second phase threshold tI>>.

Sel1 tI>>> Yes

Logic selectivity of the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) Select Yes or No.

Sel1 tIe>> Yes

Logic selectivity of the second earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>). Select Yes or No.

Sel1 tIe>>> Yes

Logic selectivity of the third earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>). Select Yes or No.

t Sel1 150 ms

Displays the selective scheme logic time delay t Sel1. To modify this value, press '. The t Sel1 is adjustable from 0 ms to 150 s by step of 10 ms. Press ' to validate your adjustment.


3.5.6.5 Outputs Relays sub-menu

This sub-menu makes it possible to allocate to each logic output (excepted Watchdog RL0 and Tripping RL1 refer to Trip Commands submenu) the various thresholds (instantaneous and/or time delay).

• MiCOM P124 dual-powered : allows 5 outputs, RL2 to RL6

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu.

Output Relays Heading of the Output Relays sub-menu.

Trip 65432 00101

Allocation of trip orders to the output relays RL2 to RL6 (copies the trip contact onto one or several selected relays). To allocate this information to the output relay(s), press ', then allocate to the desired output relay the value 1using #. Repeat the operation on the other output relays if desired, then validate using '.

I > 65432 00101

Allocation of the first phase instantaneous overcurrent threshold (I>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

tI > 65432 00101

Allocation of the first phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

I >> 65432 00101

Allocation of the second phase instantaneous overcurrent threshold (I>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6.

tI >> 65432 00101

Allocation of the second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

I >>> 65432 01101

Allocation of the third phase instantaneous overcurrent threshold (I>>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

tI >>> 65432 00101

Allocation of the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays .


Ie > 65432 00101

Allocation of the first earth instantaneous overcurrent threshold (Ie>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays .

tIe > 65432 00101

Allocation of the first earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

Ie >> 65432 00101

Allocation of the second earth instantaneous overcurrent threshold (Ie>>) to the output relays RL2 toRL6.

tIe >> 65432 00101

Allocation of the second earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

Ie >>> 65432 00101

Allocation of the third earth instantaneous overcurrent threshold (Ie>>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

tIe >>> 65432 00101

Allocation of the third earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

tI < 65432 00101

Allocation of the minimum current time delay threshold (tI<) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

tI2 > 65432 00101

Allocation of the negative phase sequence overcurrent time delay threshold (tI2>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6.

Therm. 65432 Alarm 00101

Allocation of the thermal alarm threshold to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

Therm. 65432 Trip 00101

Allocation of the thermal trip threshold to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

CB Alarm 65432 00101

Allocation of the Circuit Breaker Alarm function to the output relays (CB OPEN Nb, SUM An, Tripping and closing Time) RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.


52 Fail 65432 00101

Allocation of the Circuit Breaker Trip Supervision Failure function to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

Brkn. 65432 Cond 01101

Allocation of the broken conductor function to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

CB Fail 65432 01101

Allocation of the circuit breaker failure function to the output relays RL2 to RL6. CB Fail = CB not open at the end of tBF timer

CB 65432 Close 00101

Allocation of the circuit breaker closing order to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

t Aux 1 65432 00101

Allocation of the delayed auxiliary input Aux 1 to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

t Aux 2 65432 00101

Allocation of the delayed auxiliary input Aux 2 to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

79 Run 65432 00101

Allocation of the "autorecloser in progress" information to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

79 Trip 65432 00101

Allocation of the autorecloser final trip function to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.

Active 65432 Group 10000

Allocation of the Active Group indication to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.


3.5.6.6 Latch of the Output relays RL2 to RL6

This sub-menu makes it possible to latch the auxiliary output relays, relay by relay.

AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu. To gain access to the menu, press $, % 6 times.

Latch Output Relays

Heading of the Latch Output Relays sub-menu. To gain access to the sub-menu points, press $.

Output 2 No

Latch of the auxiliary output relay RL2. Select Yes or No.

Output 3 Yes


Output 4 Yes


Output 5 Yes


Output 6 No


Output 7 Yes


Output 8 No



3.5.6.7 Inputs sub-menu

This sub-menu makes it possible to allocate to each logic input either a label or an automation function, following the table :

Label abstract Label signification

None No allocation

Unlatch Delocking the latching of the outputs

52 a Position of the circuit breaker (open)

52 b Position of the circuit breaker (close)

CB FLT External failure information from the CB

Aux 1 Allocation to the input the external information Aux 1

Aux 2 Allocation to the input the external information Aux 2

Blk Log (1) Blocking logic 1

Blk Log 2 Blocking logic 2

Strt Dist Starting of the disturbance recording function

Cold L PU Cold load pick up alloction

Log Sel 1 Logic selectivity 1

Log Sel 2 Logic selectivity 2

Change set Change of setting group (default setting group 1)

θ Reset Reset of the thermal state

Block-79 Blocking of the autorecloser function [79]

Trip Circ Trip circuit supervision input

Start tBf Starting of the breaker failure timer


Inputs Heading of the Inputs sub-menu.

Input 1 O/O

Allocation of logic input 1. To allocate labels to logic input 1, press ' then with # $ select the desired label from the available list, then validate your choice using '.

Input 2 BLC LG



Input 3 AUX1


Input 4 C.L.S


Input 5 RAZ TH


Aux1 Time t Aux1 300 ms

Displays the time delay t Aux 1 associated with the logic input Aux1. To modify this value, press '. The t Aux 1 is adjustable from 0 ms to 200 s by step of 10 ms, then validate your choice using '.

Aux2 Time t Aux2 8 s

Displays the time delay t Aux 2 associated with the logic input Aux 2. To modify this value, press '. The t Aux 2 is adjustable from 0 ms to 200 s by step of 10 ms, then validate your choice using '.

3.5.6.8 BROKEN CONDUCTOR sub-menu


Broken Cond. Heading of the BROKEN CONDUCTOR sub-menu.

Brkn. Cond. ? Yes

Selection of the broken conductor function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user validates (No), the broken conductor function is inactive.

Brkn.Cond Time tBC 32 s

Display the broken conductor time delay tBC. To modify this value, press '. The tBC is adjustable from 1 to 14400 s with step of 1 s. Press ' to validate your adjustment

Ratio I2/I1 20%

Display the broken conductor threshold. This threshold is a ratio between the negative phase sequence and the positive phase sequence current. To modify this value, press '. The I2/I1 ratio is adjustable from 20 to 100% by step of 1%. Press ' to validate your adjustment


3.5.6.9 COLD LOAD PICK-UP sub-menu


Cold Load PU Heading of the Cold Load PU sub-menu.

Cold Load PU ? Yes

Selection of the cold load pick-up function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), the cold load pick-upfunction is inactive.

Cold Load PU tI> ? Yes

Associate the I> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold load pick-up function. Validate your choice using '.

Cold Load PU tI>> ? Yes

Associate the I>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using '.

Cold Load PU tI >>> ? Yes

Associated the I>>> time delay threshold to the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using '.

Cold Load PU tIe > ? Yes

Associated the Ie> time delay threshold to the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold load pick-up function. Validate your choice using '.

Cold Load PU tIe >> ? Yes

Associated the Ie>> time delay threshold to the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold load pick-up function. Validate your choice using '.

Cold Load PU tIe >>> ? Yes

Associated the Ie>>> time delay threshold to the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold load pick-up function. Validate your choice using '.


COLD LOAD P/UP tI2> ? Yes

Associated the I2> time delay threshold the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate desired threshold to the cold load start pick up function. Validate your choice using '.

Cold Load PU t Therm. ? Yes

Associated the Thermal overload time delay threshold to the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice,press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold load pick-up function. Validate your choice using '.

Cold Load PU level 120%

Selection of the cold load pick up percentage scaling value associated with the selected thresholds. Select from 20% to 500% with steps of 1 % using # and validate your choice using '.

Cold Load PU tCL = 2 s

Selection of the cold load pick up time delay. Select from 100 ms to 3600 s with steps of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '.

3.5.6.10 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE sub-menu


CB Fail Heading of the CB Fail sub-menu.

CB Fail ? Yes

Selection of the circuit breaker failure function. If the user validates (Yes), the next menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), the breaker failure function is inactive.

I< 20% In

Display of the I< threshold value which defines the current monitoring band zone. To modify that value, press '. The threshold is settable between 2% and 100%. To confirm the setting, press '.

CB Fail Time tBF 200 ms

Selection of the circuit breaker failure time delay. Select from 30 ms to 10 s with steps of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '.

Bloc I > ? No

Selection of the blocking function for 1st overcurrent stage assigned to the output relay upon breaker failure. Choose YES or NO.

Bloc Ie > ? No

Selection of the blocking function for 1st earth fault stage assigned to the output relay upon breaker failure. Choose YES or NO.


3.5.6.11 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION sub-menu


CB Supervision Heading of the CB Supervision sub-menu.

TC Supervision Yes

Selection of the trip circuit supervision function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the function is active. If the user does not validate (No), go to CB Open Time menu. The trip circuit supervision function is inactive.

t Trip Circuit t SUP 3 s

Selection of the Trip circuit supervision timer. Select from 100 ms to 10 s with steps of 10 ms using # Validate your choice using '.

CB Open S'vision Yes

Selection of the CB open operating time supervision function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes) the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), go to CB Close menu. The CB open operating time supervision function is inactive.

CB OpenTime 150 ms

Selection of the CB open operating time (tCBO). Select from 50 ms to 1.0 s with steps of 10 ms using #. Validate your choice using '.

CB Close S'vision Yes

Selection of the CB close operating time supervision function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), go to CB.Open Alarm menu. The CB close operating time supervision function is inactive.

CB Close Time 150 ms

Selection of the CB close operating time (tCBC). Select from 50 ms to 1.0 s with steps of 10 ms using #. Validate your choice using '.

CB Open Alarm ? Yes

Selection of the maximum CB operations function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), refer to ΣAmps(n) menu. The CB open maximum number function is inactive.


CB Open NB 1500

Selection of the CB open numbers alarm threshold. Select from 0 to 50000 by step of 1 using #. Validate your choice using '.

ΣAmps(n) ? Yes

Selection of the Summation Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by the CB function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), refer to t open pulse menu. The Summation Amps function is inactive.

ΣAmps(n) 3 E6

Selection of the summation Amps (or square Amps) alarm threshold. Select from 0 to 4000 E6 A (or A2) with steps of 1 E6 using #. Validate your choice using '.

n 2

Selection of the type of summation (Amps or square Amps). Select 1 or 2 using #. Validate your choice using '.

t Open Pulse 300 ms

Selection of the tripping pulse time. Select from 100 ms to 5 s with steps of 100 ms using #. Validate your choice using '.

t Close Pulse 500 ms

Selection of the closing time. Select from 100 ms to 5 s with steps of 100 ms using #. Validate your choice using '.


3.5.7 RECORDS Menu

The RECORDING menu makes it possible to read the records.


⇒ CB Monitoring

⇒ Fault record

⇒ Disturb record

⇒ Time peak value

3.5.7.1 CB MONITORING sub-menu

The CB Monitoring sub-menu makes possible to read and clear the parameters and measurements associated to this function.

RECORD Heading the RECORD menu.

CB Monitoring Heading the CB Monitoring sub-menu.

CB Opening Time 83 ms

Display the circuit breaker opening time in ms.

CB Closing Time 100 ms

Display the circuit breaker closing time in ms.

CB Operations RST=[C] 1312

Display the number of opening commands sent by the relay. To clear these values, press !.

Σ Amps (n) RST=[C]

Allows the user to clear the memorised summations of interrupted currents. All 3 phases currents are clear together. To clear these values, press !.

Σ Amps (n) IA 5 E6

Display the summation of the Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by the circuit breaker phase A.

Σ Amps (n) IB 5 E6

Display the summation of the Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by the circuit breaker phase B.


Σ Amps (n) IC 5 E6

Display the summation of the Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by the circuit breaker phase C.

3.5.7.2 Fault Record sub-menu

The Fault RECORD sub-menu makes possible to read the various parameters and measurement for each of the five fault store in MiCOM P124 memory.


Fault Record Heading of the Fault Record sub-menu.

Record Number 4

Selection of the Fault record number (by selecting either 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) to be displayed. To modify this fault record number, press ' then using # enter the required number. Validate your choice using '.

Fault Time 12:05:23:42

Display the time of the fault record. The format of the time is HH:MM:ss:msms In this example the fault appeared at 12H am, 05 minutes, 23 seconds and 420 ms.

Fault Date 12/10/99

Display the Date of the fault record. The format of the Date is DD/MM/YY. In this example, the fault appeared on 12 October 1999.

Active Set Group 2

Display the active setting group (1 or 2).

Faulted Phase Phase A

Display the faulty phase for the chosen fault record (NONE, phase A, B, C, EARTH, AB, AC, BC, or ABC).

Threshold I>>

Display the origin of the fault that as generated the trip order.

Magnitude 1200 A

Display the magnitude of the faulty current. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.

IA Magnitude 1200 A

Display the magnitude of the phase A current at the time of the Fault. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.


IB Magnitude 500 A

Display the magnitude of the phase B current at the time of the Fault. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.

IC Magnitude 480 A

Display the magnitude of the phase C current at the time of the Fault. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.

In Magnitude 103 A

Display the magnitude of the earth current at the time of the Fault. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.

3.5.7.3 DISTURBANCE RECORD sub-menu

The DISTURBANCE sub-menu makes possible to set the various parameters and thresholds associated to this recording function.


Disturb Record Heading of the Disturb Record sub-menu.

Pre-Time 1.3 s

Selection of the disturbance record pre-time. Select from 100 ms to 3s by step of 100 ms using #. Validate your choice using '.

Post-Time 0.2 s

Selection of the disturbance record post-time. Select from 100 ms to 3s by step of 100 ms using # and validate your choice using '.

WARNING : THE TOTAL DISTURBANCE RECORDING TIME IS 3 SECONDS (PRE TIME + POST TIME).

Disturb Rec Trig ON INST.

Selection of start criteria for the disturbance recording function. Select between ON INST. (start on instantaneous thresholds) or ON Trip (start on trip conditions) using # and validate your choice using '.


3.5.7.4 Time PEAK VALUE sub-menu

The Time PEAK VALUE sub-menu makes possible to set parameters associated to this function. (Peak and Average values displayed in the Measurements menu).


Time Peak Value Heading of the Time Peak Value sub-menu.

Time Window 5 mn

Selection of the time of the window during the peak and average values are stored. Select either 5mn, 10mn, 15mn, 30mn, or 60mn using '. Validate your choice using '.


4. WIRING

The external connection diagrams of the MiCOM P124 relays are provided in Appendix 1 of the Technical Guide.

4.1 Current inputs (measurement)

The MiCOM P124 relays have 4 analogue inputs (3 phase current inputs and 1 earth current input). The rated current value of these measurement inputs is either 1A or 5A (must be specified on order).

The rated current is indicated on the front panel of the relay, behind the top flap.

WARNING: THE CONNECTION OF THE EARTH CURRENT INPUT MAY DIFFER DEPENDING ON WHETHER IT IS CONNECTED TO A CORE BALANCED CT OR TO A SUMMATION OF THE 3 PHASE CTs.


Generally, when the relay is used with three phase CTs and one core balanced CT, there is not need to power the relay through the earth channel.

In this case, the core balanced CT can be connected to terminals 47 and 48.

For some phase to earth faults, when some specific cores are used, it can be possible that the fault does not generate a current high enough* to power the relay from only one phase circuit. It will then be necessary to connect the core TC to terminals 55 and 56 in order to power the relay through the earth circuit as well.

*reminder: the MiCOM P124 relay is self-powered from a 0.2 In current on at least one phase.

Connection to 3 phase CTs:

In this case the earth current is derived from the summation of the 3 phase currents.

It is not necessary to power the relay via the earth circuit. The summation of the 3 CTs must be connected to terminals 47 and 48.


In this case it is necessary to power the relay through the earth circuit. The core balanced CT must be connected to terminals 55 and 56.

4.2 Output relays

7 output relays are available on the DUAL-POWERED model.

6 relays are freely programmable (RL1 à RL6), the first relay RL0 being allocated to signalling an equipment Fault (WATCH DOG) :

• All the output relays are of change-over relays (1 common, 1 normally open contact, 1 normaly closed contact). The protection and control functions to which these relays respond can be selected by means of the AUTOMAT. CTRL. Menu.

NOTE : RL1 is the default trip contact. This relay can be programmed for fail-safe operation (Configuration/RL1 output relay menu).

• One watchdog relay with a C/O contact (1 common, 1 normally open, 1 normally closed)


WARNING : DURING AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY FAILURE, AND IN ORDER TO SAVE ENERGY, THE WATCHDOG RELAY IS USED ONLY WHEN THERE IS A 0.4 IN CURRENT ON AT LEAST ONE PHASE. IT IS DE-ENERGISED BELOW THAT CURRENT LEVEL OR WHEN A SOFTWARE OR HARDWARE FAULT IS PRESENT.

Only the relays RL0 and RL1 are functional during an auxiliary power supply failure:

− RL0: from a 0.4 In current on at least one phase,

− RL1: when the relay is not programmed in fail-safe operation. If RL1 is programmed in fail-safe operation, in that case the command of RL1 is blocked as well as the protection function.

4.3 Striker output

The P124 relays are fitted with a striker output used to trip the circuit breaker via a striker device in the absence of an external auxiliary supply.

The 2 terminals to be connected to the striker are polarised:

− + terminal 39

− terminal 41

according to the external connection diagrams provided in Appendix 1 of the Technical Guide.

4.4 RS232 front communication port

MiCOM P124 relays provide the user an RS 232 communication port. This link is dedicated to the MiCOM Setting software MiCOM S1.

Le câble entre le PC et le relais MiCOM doit être équipé de 2 connecteurs Sub D 9 points reliés en point à point.

RS 232 PC port RS 232 Cable

MiCOM P124 end 9 pin male connector

2 2

3 3

5 5

7 7

In case where the battery box MiCOM E1 is used to power the P124 relay, it is placed between the PC and the P124 relay.

4.5 Auxiliary supply

The auxiliary supply of the MiCOM P124 dual powered relays can be either :

• Dc (range 24-60 Vdc or 48-150 Vdc or 130-250 Vdc)

• Ac (100-250 Vac/ 50-60 Hz).

The voltage range is indicated on the front panel, under the top flag.

The power supply must be connected to terminals 33-34 only.


4.6 Logic inputs

MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model relays have 5 opto-isolated logic inputs. Each input has its own independent polarity. The voltage range of the inputs is identical to the dc auxiliary supply range of the MiCOM relay (e.g. Uaux = 48-150 Vdc, logic input voltage range = 48-150 Vdc).

On the same MiCOM P124 relay, the user can mixed different voltage level for the logic inputs (e.g. Uaux = 48-150 Vdc, Input 1= 48 Vdc, Input 2-5= 125 Vdc)

The automation operations and signalling functions to which these logic inputs respond can be selected by means of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu.

WARNING : THESE LOGIC INPUTS CAN ONLY BE USED WHEN THE MICOM RELAY IS POWERED BY AN EXTERNAL AUXILIARY SUPPLY.

4.7 RS485 rear communication port

All MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relays have an RS485 rear communication port.

The connection of communication is allocated to terminals 29-30-31-32, following the schemes given in the Appendix 1 of the Technical Guide.

WARNING : THE REARPORT COMMUNICATION CAN ONLY BE USED WHEN THE MICOM RELAY IS POWERED BY AN EXTERNAL AUXILIARY SUPPLY.


CHAPTER 4-2 Menu Content

MiCOM P124 Dual-powered


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

IA =

124

5 A

Pass

wor

d**

**

Des

crip

tion P1

24-D

Refe

renc

eA

LST

Soft

war

e V

ersi

on4

.A

Freq

uenc

y50

Hz

Inpu

t St

5432

1 01

011

OP

PARA

MET

ERS

Rela

y St

6543

2100

1011

Dat

e06

/08/

01

Tim

e13

:15:

33

Dis

play

Def

ault

Dis

play

RMS

I L1

Phas

e A

Tex

tL1

Phas

e B

Text

L2

Phas

e C

Tex

tL3

E/G

nd T

ext

N

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

CT

RATI

O

Line

CT

prim

ary

1000

E/G

nd C

T pr

imar

y10

00

LED

5 /

6 /

7 /

8

I>Y/N

tl>Y/N

I>>

Y/N

tI>

>Y/N

I>>

>Y/N

tI>

>>

Y/N

Ie>

Y/N

tIe>

Y/N

Ie>

>Y/

NtIe

>>

Y/N

Ie>

>>

Y/N

tIe>

>>

Y/N

Led

Ther

m T

rip

Y/N

Led

Brkn

. C

ond

Y/N

Led

CB

Fail

Y/N

Led

tI2>

Y/N

Led

Inpu

t 1

Y/N

Led

Inpu

t 2

Y/N

Led

Inpu

t 3

Y/N

Led

Inpu

t 4

Y/N

Led

Inpu

t 5

Y/N

Led

Recl

oser

Run

Y/N

Led

Recl

oser

Bloc

ked

Y/N

Led

tAux

1Y/N

Led

tAux

2Y/N

Gro

up S

elec

t

Cha

nge

Gro

upin

put

=ED

GE

MiC

OM

P1

24

D

with

aut

orec

lose

Men

u co

nten

t

From

V4

.A s

oftw

areRL

1 O

utpu

t Re

lay

Fail-

safe

Rel

ay No

Sett

ing

Gro

up1

Ala

rms

Inst

. Se

lf-re

set

?N

o

Ala

rm B

atte

ry = No

Act

ive

Gro

up = 1


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

IA =

124

5 A

Freq

uenc

y 50.0

1 H

z

I L1

=25

7.05

A

I L2

=25

8.80

A

I L3

=25

7.50

A

I1 =

103

A

I2 =

50 A

MEA

SURE

MEN

TS

IN -

fn

=RS

T =

[C

]0.

00A

Ther

mal

θRS

T =

[C

]0%

I N =

20.0

0 A

RATI

O I2

/ I1

=50

%

Max

& A

vera

ge I

RST

= [

C]

Max

1L1

Rms

350

A

Max

1L2

Rms

0.00

A

Max

1L3

Rms

0.00

A

Ave

rage

IL1

Rms

0.00

A

Ave

rage

IL2

Rms

0.00

A

Recl

ose

Stat

sRS

T =

[C

]

Tota

l rec

lose

s0

Cyc

le2

Recl

oses 0

Cyc

le3

Recl

oses 0

Cyc

le4

Recl

oses 0

Tota

l Tri

p &

Lock

out

0

Ave

rage

IL3

Rms

0.00

A

Cyc

le1

Recl

oses 0

Con

figur

atio

n In

puts

Inpu

ts :

5432

110

101

Dat

e fo

rmat

Dat

e fo

rmat

= PRIV

ATE

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

Com

mun

icat

ion

?Ye

s

Baud

Rat

e19

200

Bd

Pari

tyN

one

Dat

a bi

ts8

Stop

bits

1

Rela

y A

ddre

ss12

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

NPR

OTE

CTI

ON

G

1/G

2

[50

/51

] Ph

ase

OC

I > ?

Yes

I >0.

1 In

Del

ay T

ype

IDM

T

Tms

0.02

5

I>>

2.0

In

t I>

>30

0 m

s

I>>

> ?

Yes

I>>

>10

.01

In

t I>

>>

110

ms

Idm

tIE

C S

I

I>>

?Ye

s

[50

N/5

1N

] E/

Gnd

Ie >

?Ye

s

Ie >

0.01

Ien

Del

ay T

ype ID

MT

Tms

0.02

5

tRes

et60 m

s

Ie >

>0.

1 Ie

n

t Ie

>>

300 m

s

Ie >

>>

?Ye

s

Ie >

>>

1.0

1 Ie

n

t Ie

>>

>300 m

s

Idm

tIE

C S

I

Ie >

> ?

Yes

tRes

et60

ms

MiC

OM

P1

24

D

with

aut

orec

lose

Men

u co

nten

t

From

V4

.Aso

ftw

are


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

IA =

124

5 A

[46

] N

eg S

eq O

C

I2 >

?Ye

s

I2 >

0.1 In

Del

ay T

ype

IDM

T

Tms

0.025

Del

ay T

ype

RI

K0.1

Cur

veIE

C S

I

tRes

et40

ms

[49

] Th

erm

OL

Ther

m O

L ?

Yes

Iθ>

0.3

In

Te1 m

n

θ Tr

ip100

%

θ A

larm

?Yes

K1.0

5

θ A

larm

100

%

[37

] U

nder

Cur

rent

I <

?Ye

s

I <

20 %

In

[79

] A

utor

eclo

se

Aut

orec

lose

? Yes

[Ext

CB

Fail

? Yes

Ext

CB

Fail

Tim

e10

ms

Recl

aim

Tim

etR

10

ms

Inhi

b Ti

me

tI52

0 m

s

E/G

nd C

ycle

s2

Cyc

les

4

321

1

110

tI >

tI>>

tI>>

>tIe

>tIe

>>

tIe >

>>

t A

ux1

t A

ux2

Dea

d Ti

me

tD1/

tD2/

tD3/

tD4

Phas

e C

ycle

s0

Ext

Bloc

k ?

No

tI <

1 m

s

PRO

TEC

TIO

N

G1

/G2

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

Latc

h Fu

nctio

ns

Latc

h tI

>Yes

Latc

h tI

>>

Yes

Latc

h tI

>>

>Yes

Latc

h tIe

>>

Yes

Latc

h tIe

>>

>Yes

Latc

h Th

erm

al θ Y

es

Latc

h Br

kn.

Con

dYes

Latc

h tA

ux 1

Yes

Latc

h tA

ux 2

Yes

Latc

h tIe

>Yes

Latc

h tI2

>Yes

Bloc

king

Log

ic 1

/2

Bloc

k1 t

I >Yes

Bloc

k1 t

I >>

Yes

Bloc

k1 t

I >>

>Yes

Bloc

k1 t

Ie >

>Yes

Bloc

k1 t

Ie >

>> Y

es

Bloc

k1 T

herm

al θ Y

es

Bloc

k1 B

rkn.

Con

dN

o

Bloc

k1 t

Aux

1N

o

Bloc

k1 t

Aux

2 N

o

Bloc

k1 t

Ie >

Yes

Bloc

k1 t

I2 >

Yes

Trip

Com

man

ds

Trip

tI >

Yes

Trip

tI >

>Ye

s

Trip

tI >

>>

Yes

Trip

tIe

>>

Yes

Trip

tIe

>>

>Ye

s

Trip

tI2

>Ye

s

Trip

The

rmal

θ Yes

Trip

Brk

n. C

ond

No

Trip

tA

ux 1

Yes

Trip

tA

ux 2

Yes

Trip

tIe

>

Yes

Trip

tI <

Yes

Latc

h tI

<Yes

MiC

OM

P1

24

D

with

aut

orec

lose

Men

u co

nten

t

From

V4

.A s

oftw

are

tRes

et40

ms


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

IA =

124

5 A

Logi

c Se

lect

. 1

/2

Sel1

tI >

>Ye

s

Sel1

tI >

>>

Yes

Sel1

tle

>>

Yes

t Se

l115

0 m

s

Sel1

tle

>>

> Yes

Out

put

Rela

ysIn

puts

1/2

/3/4

/5Br

oken

Con

duct

or

Brkn

. C

ond

? Yes

Brkn

. C

ond

Tim

etB

C32 s

Ratio

I2/I

120

%

Trip

654

32

0010

1I > tl

>I >

>tl

>>

I >>

>tl

>>

>Ie

>tle

>Ie

>>

tle >

>Ie

>>

>tle

>>

>tl

<tl2

>Th

erm

Ala

rmTh

erm

Tri

pC

B A

larm

52 F

ail

Brkn

Con

dC

B Fa

ilC

B C

lose

tAux

1tA

ux 2

79 R

un79

Tri

pA

ctiv

e G

roup

Non

eU

nlat

ch52

a52

bC

B FL

TA

ux 1

Aux

2Bl

k Lo

g 1

Blk

Log

2St

rt D

ist

Col

d L

PULo

g Se

l 1Lo

g Se

l 2C

hang

e se

tBl

ock_

79θ

Rese

tTr

ip C

irc

Star

t_tB

F

Latc

h O

utpu

t Re

lays

Out

put

2N

o

Out

put

3Ye

s

Out

put

4N

o

Out

put

6N

o

Out

put

5Ye

s

CB

Fail

CB

Fail

?Ye

s

I< =

20 %

In

CB

Fail

Tim

etB

F200 m

s

Bloc

Ie>

?N

o

Bloc

I >

?N

o

Col

d Lo

ad P

U

Col

d Lo

ad P

U ? Ye

s

Col

d Lo

ad P

Utl>

?Ye

s

Col

d Lo

ad P

Utl>

> ?

Yes

Col

d Lo

ad P

Utle

> ?

Yes

Col

d Lo

ad P

Utle

>>

?Ye

s

Col

d Lo

ad P

Utl2

> ?

Ye

s

Col

d Lo

ad P

UtT

herm

?

Yes

Col

d Lo

ad P

ULe

vel

120 %

Col

d Lo

ad P

UtC

L 2

s

Col

d Lo

ad P

Utl>

>>

?Ye

s

Col

d Lo

ad P

Utle

>>

> ?

Yes

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

MiC

OM

P1

24

D

with

aut

orec

lose

Men

u co

nten

t

From

V4.A

sof

twar

e


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

IA =

124

5 A

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

CB

Supe

rvis

ion

TC S

uper

visi

on ?

Yes

t tr

ip c

ircu

itt S

UP

3 s

CB

Ope

n S

visi

onYe

s

CB

Clo

se S

vis

ion

Yes

CB

Clo

se T

ime

150

ms

CB

Ope

n N

B 150

0

∑A

mps

(n)

?Ye

s

∑A

mps

(n)

3 E6

n 2

CB

Ope

n Ti

me

150

ms

CB

Ope

n A

larm

?Ye

s

CB

Mon

itori

ng

CB

Ope

ning

Tim

e 8

3 m

s

CB

Clo

sing

Tim

e100

ms

CB

Ope

ratio

nsRS

T =

[C]

0

∑A

mps

(n)

IA5

E6

∑A

mps

(n)

RS

T =

[C]

Faul

t Re

cord

Dis

turb

Rec

ord

Pre-

Tim

e1.

3 s

Post

-Tim

e0.

2 s

Tim

e Pe

ak V

alue

Tim

e W

indo

w 5 m

n

Dis

turb

Rec

Tri

gO

N IN

ST.

tOpe

n Pu

lse

300

ms

REC

ORD

S

∑A

mps

(n)

IC5

E6

∑A

mps

(n)

IB5

E6

Reco

rd N

umbe

r 4

Faul

t Ti

me

12:0

5:2

3:42

Faul

t D

ate 06

/08/

01

Faul

ted

Phas

ePh

ase

A

Thre

shol

dI>

>

IA M

agni

tude

12

00 A

IB M

agni

tude 50

0 A

IC M

agni

tude 48

0 A

IN M

agni

tude 1

03 A

Act

ive

Set

Gro

up2

Mag

nitu

de12

00 A

tClo

se P

ulse

500 m

s

MiC

OM

P1

24

D

With

aut

orec

lose

Men

u co

nten

t

From

V4.A

sof

twar

e


BLANK PAGE


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

IA =

124

5 A

Pass

wor

d**

**

Des

crip

tion P1

24-D

Refe

renc

eA

LST

Soft

war

e V

ersi

on4

.A

Freq

uenc

y50

Hz

Inpu

t St

5432

1 01

011

OP

PARA

MET

ERS

Rela

y St

6543

2100

1011

Dat

e06

/08/

01

Tim

e13

:15:

33

Dis

play

Def

ault

Dis

play

RMS

I L1

Phas

e A

Tex

tL1

Phas

e B

Text

L2

Phas

e C

Tex

tL3

E/G

nd T

ext

N

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

CT

RATI

O

Line

CT

prim

ary

1000

E/G

nd C

T pr

imar

y10

00

LED

5 /

6 /

7 /

8

I>Y/N

tl>Y/N

I>>

Y/N

tI>

>Y/N

I>>

>Y/N

tI>

>>

Y/N

Ie>

Y/N

tIe>

Y/N

Ie>

>Y/

NtIe

>>

Y/N

Ie>

>>

Y/N

tIe>

>>

Y/N

Led

Ther

m T

rip

Y/N

Led

Brkn

. C

ond

Y/N

Led

CB

Fail

Y/N

Led

tI2>

Y/N

Led

Inpu

t 1

Y/N

Led

Inpu

t 2

Y/N

Led

Inpu

t 3

Y/N

Led

Inpu

t 4

Y/N

Led

Inpu

t 5

Y/N

Led

tAux

1Y/N

Led

tAux

2Y/N

Gro

up S

elec

t

Cha

nge

Gro

upin

put

=ED

GE

MiC

OM

P1

24

D

with

out

auto

recl

ose

Men

u co

nten

t

From

V4

.A s

oftw

areRL

1 O

utpu

t Re

lay

Fail-

safe

Rel

ay No

Sett

ing

Gro

up1

Ala

rms

Inst

. Se

lf-re

set

?N

o

Ala

rm B

atte

ry = No

Act

ive

Gro

up = 1


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

IA =

124

5 A

Freq

uenc

y 50.0

1 H

z

I L1

257.

05 A

I L2

258.

80 A

I L3

257.

50 A

I1 =

103

A

I2 =

50 A

MEA

SURE

MEN

TS

IN -

fn

=RS

T =

[C

]0.

00A

Ther

mal

θRS

T =

[C

]0%

I N20

.00

A

RATI

O I2

/ I1

=50

%

Max

& A

vera

ge I

RST

= [

C]

Max

1L1

Rms

350

A

Max

1L2

Rms

0.00

A

Max

1L3

Rms

0.00

A

Ave

rage

IL1

Rms

0.00

A

Ave

rage

IL2

Rms

0.00

A

Ave

rage

IL3

Rms

0.00

A

Con

figur

atio

n In

puts

Inpu

ts :

5432

110

101

Dat

e fo

rmat

Dat

e fo

rmat

= PRIV

ATE

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

Com

mun

icat

ion

?Ye

s

Baud

Rat

e19

200

Bd

Pari

tyN

one

Dat

a bi

ts8

Stop

bits

1

Rela

y A

ddre

ss12

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

NPR

OTE

CTI

ON

G

1/G

2

[50

/51

] Ph

ase

OC

I > ?

Yes

I >0.

1 In

Del

ay T

ype

IDM

T

Tms

0.02

5

I>>

2.0

In

t I>

>30

0 m

s

I>>

> ?

Yes

I>>

>10

.01

In

t I>

>>

110

ms

Idm

tIE

C S

I

I>>

?Ye

s

[50

N/5

1N

] E/

Gnd

Ie >

?Ye

s

Ie >

0.01

Ien

Del

ay T

ype ID

MT

Tms

0.02

5

tRes

et60 m

s

Ie >

>0.

1 Ie

n

t Ie

>>

300 m

s

Ie >

>>

?Ye

s

Ie >

>>

1.0

1 Ie

n

t Ie

>>

>300 m

s

Idm

tIE

C S

I

Ie >

> ?

Yes

tRes

et60

ms

MiC

OM

P1

24

D

with

out

auto

recl

ose

Men

u co

nten

t

From

V4

.Aso

ftw

are


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

IA =

124

5 A

[46

] N

eg S

eq O

C

I2 >

?Ye

s

I2 >

0.1

In

Del

ay T

ype

IDM

T

Tms

0.02

5

Del

ay T

ype

RI

K0.

1

Cur

veIE

C S

I

tRes

et40

ms

[49

] Th

erm

OL

Ther

m O

L ?

Yes

Iθ>

0.3

In

Te1

mn

θ Tr

ip10

0 %

θ A

larm

?Ye

s

K1.

05

θ A

larm

10

0 %

[37

] U

nder

Cur

rent

I < ?

Yes

I <20

% In

tI <

1 m

s

PRO

TEC

TIO

N

G1

/G2

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

Latc

h Fu

nctio

ns

Latc

h tI

>Ye

s

Latc

h tI

>>

Yes

Latc

h tI

>>

>Ye

s

Latc

h tIe

>>

Yes

Latc

h tIe

>>

>Ye

s

Latc

h Th

erm

al θ Ye

s

Latc

h Br

kn.

Con

dYe

s

Latc

h tA

ux 1

Yes

Latc

h tA

ux 2

Yes

Latc

h tIe

>Ye

s

Latc

h tI2

>Ye

s

Bloc

king

Log

ic 1

/2

Bloc

k1 t

I >Ye

s

Bloc

k1 t

I >>

Yes

Bloc

k1 t

I >>

>Ye

s

Bloc

k1 t

Ie >

>Ye

s

Bloc

k1 t

Ie >

>> Ye

s

Bloc

k1 T

herm

al θ Ye

s

Bloc

k1 B

rkn.

Con

dN

o

Bloc

k1 tA

ux 1

No

Bloc

k1 tA

ux 2

No

Bloc

k1 t

Ie >

Yes

Bloc

k1 t

I2 >

Yes

Trip

Com

man

ds

Trip

tI >

Yes

Trip

tI >

>Ye

s

Trip

tI >

>>

Yes

Trip

tIe

>>

Yes

Trip

tIe

>>

>Ye

s

Trip

tI2

>Ye

s

Trip

The

rmal

θ Yes

Trip

Brk

n. C

ond

No

Trip

tA

ux 1

Yes

Trip

tA

ux 2

Yes

Trip

tIe

>

Yes

Trip

tI <

Yes

Latc

h tI

<Ye

s

MiC

OM

P1

24

D

with

out

auto

recl

ose

Men

u co

nten

t

From

V4.A

sof

twar

e

tRes

et40

ms


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

IA =

124

5 A

Logi

c Se

lect

. 1

/2

Sel1

tI >

>Ye

s

Sel1

tI >

>>

Yes

Sel1

tle

>>

Yes

t Se

l115

0 m

s

Sel1

tle

>>

> Yes

Out

put

Rela

ysIn

puts

1/2

/3/4

/5Br

oken

Con

duct

or

Brkn

. C

ond

? Yes

Brkn

. C

ond

Tim

etB

C32 s

Ratio

I2/I

120

%

Trip

654

32

0010

1I > tl

>I >

>tl

>>

I >>

>tl

>>

>Ie

>tle

>Ie

>>

tle >

>Ie

>>

>tle

>>

>tl

<tl2

>Th

erm

Ala

rmTh

erm

Tri

pC

B A

larm

52 F

ail

Brkn

Con

dC

B Fa

ilC

B C

lose

tAux

1tA

ux 2

Act

ive

Gro

up

Non

eU

nlat

ch52

a52

bC

B FL

TA

ux 1

Aux

2Bl

k Lo

g 1

Blk

Log

2St

rt D

ist

Col

d L

PULo

g Se

l 1Lo

g Se

l 2C

hang

e se

tRe

serv

edθ

Rese

tTr

ip C

irc

Star

t_tB

F

Latc

h O

utpu

t Re

lays

Out

put

2N

o

Out

put

3Ye

s

Out

put

4N

o

Out

put

6N

o

Out

put

5Ye

s

CB

Fail

CB

Fail

?Ye

s

I< =

20 %

In

CB

Fail

Tim

etB

F200 m

s

Bloc

Ie>

?N

o

Bloc

I >

?N

o

Col

d Lo

ad P

U

Col

d Lo

ad P

U ? Ye

s

Col

d Lo

ad P

Utl>

?Ye

s

Col

d Lo

ad P

Utl>

> ?

Yes

Col

d Lo

ad P

Utle

> ?

Yes

Col

d Lo

ad P

Utle

>>

?Ye

s

Col

d Lo

ad P

Utl2

> ?

Ye

s

Col

d Lo

ad P

UtT

herm

?

Yes

Col

d Lo

ad P

ULe

vel

120 %

Col

d Lo

ad P

UtC

L 2

s

Col

d Lo

ad P

Utl>

>>

?Ye

s

Col

d Lo

ad P

Utle

>>

> ?

Yes

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

MiC

OM

P1

24

D

with

out au

tore

clos

e

Men

u co

nten

t

From

V4.A

sof

twar

e


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

IA =

124

5 A

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

CB

Supe

rvis

ion

TC S

uper

visi

on ?

Yes

t tr

ip c

ircu

itt S

UP

3 s

CB

Ope

n S

visi

onYe

s

CB

Clo

se S

vis

ion

Yes

CB

Clo

se T

ime

150

ms

CB

Ope

n N

B 150

0

∑A

mps

(n)

?Ye

s

∑A

mps

(n)

3 E6

n 2

CB

Ope

n Ti

me

150

ms

CB

Ope

n A

larm

?Ye

s

CB

Mon

itori

ng

CB

Ope

ning

Tim

e 8

3 m

s

CB

Clo

sing

Tim

e100

ms

CB

Ope

ratio

nsRS

T =

[C]

0

∑A

mps

(n)

IA5

E6

∑A

mps

(n)

RS

T =

[C]

Faul

t Re

cord

Dis

turb

Rec

ord

Pre-

Tim

e1.

3 s

Post

-Tim

e0.

2 s

Tim

e Pe

ak V

alue

Tim

e W

indo

w 5 m

n

Dis

turb

Rec

Tri

gO

N IN

ST.

tOpe

n Pu

lse

300

ms

REC

ORD

S

∑A

mps

(n)

IC5

E6

∑A

mps

(n)

IB5

E6

Reco

rd N

umbe

r 4

Faul

t Ti

me

12:0

5:2

3:42

Faul

t D

ate 06

/08/

01

Faul

ted

Phas

ePh

ase

A

Thre

shol

dI>

>

IA M

agni

tude

12

00 A

IB M

agni

tude 50

0 A

IC M

agni

tude 48

0 A

IN M

agni

tude 1

03 A

Act

ive

Set

Gro

up2

Mag

nitu

de12

00 A

tClo

se P

ulse

500 m

s

MiC

OM

P1

24

D

With

out

auto

recl

ose

Men

u co

nten

t

From

V4.A

sof

twar

e


BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide P124/EN T05/C44 MiCOM P124

CHAPTER 5 Technical Data & Curves

Characteristics

Technical Guide P124/EN T05/C44 Technical data and CHAPTER 5 curves characteristics MiCOM P124 Page 1/32

CONTENT

1. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 3

1.1 Minimum Level of current 3

1.2 Phase overcurrent protection 3

1.3 Neutral/Ground/Earth Overcurrent Protection 4

1.4 Thermal overload protection 6

1.5 Undercurrent protection (P124 dual-powered only) 6

1.6 Negative sequence overcurrent protection (P124 dual-powered only) 6

2. AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS (DUAL-POWERED ONLY) 7

2.1 Cold load pickup 7

2.2 Auxiliary timers 7

2.3 Multishot autorecloser 7

2.4 Broken conductor detection 7

2.5 Circuit breaker failure 7

2.6 Trip circuit supervision 7

2.7 Circuit breaker control and monitoring 7

2.8 Logic selectivity 7

3. RECORDING FUNCTIONS : SELF-POWERED RELAY 8

4. RECORDING FUNCTIONS : DUAL-POWERED RELAY 8

4.1 Fault recorder 8

4.2 Event recorder 8

4.3 Disturbance recorder 8

5. COMMUNICATION 9

5.1 Front communication 9

5.2 Rear communication (dual-powered only) 9

6. INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 9

6.1 AC Inputs 9


6.3 Logic Output 9

6.3.1 Special trip output : Relay RL1 9

6.3.2 Other logic outputs (dual-powered version only) RL2 to RL6 10

6.4 Logic Input (dual-powered version only) 10

6.5 Power supply (dual-powered version only) 10

P124/EN T05/C44 Technical Guide CHAPTER 5 Technical data & curves characteristics Page 2/32 MiCOM P124

7. ACCURACY 11

8. CT DATA 11

9. HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND 11

10. ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT 11

11. ENVIRONMENT 11

12. CURVES 12

12.1 IDMT Curves 12

12.1.1 Mathematical formula 12

12.1.1.1 IDMT thresholds 12

12.1.1.2 Reset timer 13

12.1.2 IEC CURVES. 16

12.1.3 RI curves. 22

12.1.4 IEEE/ANSI Curves. 23

12.1.5 Rectifier protection curve 29

12.1.6 LABORELEC CURVE 30

12.2 Thermal overload curves 31

12.2.1 Mathematical formula 31

12.2.2 Tripping curve 32


1. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

1.1 Minimum Level of current

Starting current sensitivity to self-power the MiCOM P124 relay on at least one phase: 0.2 In

1.2 Phase overcurrent protection

− Current Fundamental only

− Phase Current Range 0.1 to 40 x rated current, step of 0.01 In Thresholds 3 independent (I>, I>>, I>>>) I> 0.1 to 4 In (see note)

I>> 0.5 to 40 In I>>> 0.5 to 40 In

NOTE : When I> is associated to an IDMT curve the maximum setting recommanded should be 2 In.

− Hysteresis 95 %

− Instantaneous time

− From zero current < 60 ms

− From a 0.2 In current < 30 ms

− Drop out time 30 ms

− Phase time delays (tI>, tI>>, tI>>>)

DMT 0 ms to 180 s, step of 10 ms

IDMT curves IEC: Short time inverse (Schneider Electric),

Standard Inverse (IEC), Very inverse (IEC),

Extremely inverse (IEC),

Long time inverse (Schneider Electric).

RI : (Electromechanical type).

IEEE/ANSI : Short time inverse (CO2),

Moderately inverse (ANSI),

Inverse (CO8),

Very inverse (ANSI), Extremely inverse (ANSI).

RC : Rectifier curve

Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) 0.025 to 1.5, step of 0.025


− Reset time

MiCOM P124 self-powered

− For DMT phase time delay: Fixed: 0 ms

− For IDMT Phase time delay : Fixed: 50 ms

MiCOM P124 dual-powered

− For DMT phase time delay : Fixed : 0 ms

− For IEEE/ANSI phase time delay : Short time inverse (CO2),

Moderately Inverse (ANSI),

Inverse (CO8),

Very inverse (ANSI),

Extremely Inverse (ANSI).

Reset Time Multiplier Setting (RTMS) 0.025 to 3.2, step of 0.025

or DMT 0.04 to 100s, step of 0.01 s

For IEC and RI characteristics: 0.04 to 100s, step of 0.01 s

1.3 Neutral/Ground/Earth Overcurrent Protection


− Earth current Ranges 0.002 to 1 x rated current, step of 0.005 Ien

0.01 to 8 x rated current, step of 0.005 Ien

0.1 to 40 x rated current, step of 0.005 Ien

Thresholds 3 independent (Ie>, Ie>>, Ie>>>)

Range 0.002 to 1 x Ien

Ie> 0.002 to 1 Ien (see note)

Ie>> 0.002 to 1 Ien

Ie>>> 0.002 to 1 Ien



Ie>> 0.01 to 8 Ien

Ie>>> 0.01 to 8 Ien



Ie>> 0.5 to 40 Ien

Ie>>> 0.5 to 40 Ien

NOTE : When Ie> is associated to an IDMT curve the maximum setting recommanded should be : For the range 0.002 to 1 Ien : 0.05 Ien For the range 0.01 to 8 Ien : 0.4 Ien For the range 0.1 to 40 Ien : 2 Ien

− Hysteresis 95 %


− Instantaneous time

− From zero current < 60 ms

− From a 0,2 In current < 30 ms

− Drop out time 30 ms

− Earth time delays (tIe>, tIe>>, tIe>>>)


IDMT Curves IEC : Short time inverse (Schneider Electric),

Standard Inverse (CEI), Very Inverse (CEI),

Extremely Inverse (CEI),





Inverse (CO8),

Very Inverse (ANSI),


RC : Rectifier curve.

Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) 0.025 to 1.5, step of 0.025.

LABORELEC curve 3 types : 1, 2 or 3 used with 0.01 to 8 Ien range only.

− Reset time

MiCOM P124 self-powered


− For IDMT Phase time delay : Fixed: 50 ms

MiCOM P124 dual-powered


− For IEEE/ANSI Earth time delay Short time inverse (CO2),


Inverse (CO8),

Very inverse (ANSI),



or DMT: 0.04 to 100s, step of 0.01s


P124/EN T05/C44 Technical Guide CHAPTER 5 Technical data & curves characteristics Page 6/32 MiCOM P124 1.4 Thermal overload protection

Current RMS

Current threshold I θ > 0.2 to 3.2 x rated current, step of 0.01

Thermal state (alarm and trip) 50 to 200 % x 2 , step of 1 %

Constant Time Te 1 to 200 min, step of 1 min

k factor 1 to 1.5, step of 0.01

1.5 Undercurrent protection (P124 dual-powered only)

Current Fundamental only

Phase Current Range I< 2 to 100% x rated current, step of 1%

Time delay t<I 0 to 180 s, step of 0.01 s

Hysteresis 105 %

1.6 Negative sequence overcurrent protection (P124 dual-powered only)


− Phase Current Range I2> 0.1 to 40 x rated current

NOTE : when I2> is associated to an IDMT curve the maximum setting recommended should be 2 In.

− Hysteresis 95 %

− I2> Time delay


IDMT curves IEC : Short time inverse (Schneider Electric),

Standard Inverse (CEI), Very Inverse (CEI),

Extremely Inverse (CEI),





Inverse (CO8),



Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) 0.025 to 1.5, step of 0.025

− Hysteresis 95 %

− Reset time

− For TD phase time delay: Fixed: 0 ms

− For IEEE/ANSI I2> Time delay : Short time inverse (CO2),


Inverse (CO8),




or DMT 0.04 to 100s, step of 0.01s



2. AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS (DUAL-POWERED ONLY)

2.1 Cold load pickup

Range 20 to 500 % x nominal settings, step of 1%

Time delay tCL 0,1s to 3600s, step of 100 ms

2.2 Auxiliary timers

2 independent associated to the logic inputs Aux1 and Aux2

tAux1 & tAux2 Range 0 ms to 200 s, step of 10 ms

2.3 Multishot autorecloser

Main shots 4 independent shots phase and/or earth

Dead times Cycles 1 & 2 0.01 to 300s ; step of 10ms

Cycles 3 & 4 0.01 to 600s ; step of 10ms

Reclaim time 20ms to 600s; step of 10ms

Inhibition time 20ms to 600s; step of 10ms

2.4 Broken conductor detection

Principle used I2/I1

Broken conductor threshold 20 to 100 % ; step of 1%

Time delay tBC 1 to 14400s ; step of 1s

2.5 Circuit breaker failure

CB failure time tBF 30ms to 10s ; step of 10ms

Phase current range I< 2 % to 100 % x rated current, step of 1 %

Accuracy from 0.02 In to 0.1 In : 0.006 In from 0.1 In to 1 In : 2 % x nominal setting

Hysteresis maximum 0.008 In or 0.95 x nominal setting

2.6 Trip circuit supervision

Trip circuit supervision time t SUP 100ms to 10s, step of 50ms

2.7 Circuit breaker control and monitoring

− Circuit breaker opening time (t Open Pulse) 50ms to 1s ; step of 10ms

− Circuit breaker closing time (t Close Pulse) 50ms to 1s ; step of 10ms

− Circuit breaker opening alarm threshold 0 to 50000 operations

− Amps or square amps alarm threshold 0 to 4.10 9 ; step of 10 6

− Circuit breaker tripping time alarm threshold 100ms to 5s ; step of 100ms

− Circuit breaker closing time alarm threshold 100ms to 5s ; step of 100ms

2.8 Logic selectivity

2 Independant timers : tAux 1 & tAux 2

− Range 0ms to 150s ; step of 10ms


3. RECORDING FUNCTIONS : SELF-POWERED RELAY

Fault recorder

Capacity 5 faults

Triggers Any selected protection alarm and threshold

Data Protection thresholds AC inputs measurements (RMS) Fault magnitudes

4. RECORDING FUNCTIONS : DUAL-POWERED RELAY

4.1 Fault recorder

Capacity 5 faults

Time-tag to 1 millisecond

Triggers Any selected protection alarm and threshold

Data Fault date Protection thresholds Setting Group AC inputs measurements (RMS) Fault magnitudes

4.2 Event recorder

Capacity 75 events

Time-tag to 1 millisecond

Triggers Any selected protection alarm and threshold Logic input change of state Setting changes

4.3 Disturbance recorder

Capacity 5 records of 3 s each

Sampling rate 32 samples per frequency cycle

Settings Pre-time 100 ms to 3 s, step of 100 ms Post-time 100 ms to 3 s, step of 100 ms

Triggers Any selected protection alarm and threshold Logic input Remote command

Data 4 AC input channels Digital input and output states Frequency value.


5. COMMUNICATION

5.1 Front communication

RS 232 port front port, screened twisted wire pair Protocols MODBUSTM

RTU Connectors Sub-D 9 pin female connector

5.2 Rear communication (dual-powered only)

RS 485 port rear port, screened twisted wire pair Connectors screws or snap-on Protocols MODBUSTM

RTU Courier

IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3 Data rate 300 to 38 400 bauds (programmable)

6. INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

6.1 AC Inputs

Phase and earth current inputs 1 and 5 Amps (choice on ordering code) Frequency Range 45 to 65 Hz Nominal 50/60 Hz Current inputs burden In=1A or In=5A Phase : < 2.5 VA Earth : < 2.5 VA Thermal withstand 1s @ 100 x rated current 2s @ 40 x rated current continuous @ 3 x rated current

6.2 Striker output

For an initial minimum voltage of 12V, the minimum energy delivered is 20mJ.

For a 100Ω resistive load, the residual voltage after 15ms is higher than 6V.

6.3 Logic Output

6.3.1 Special trip output : Relay RL1

Logic output type dry contact Ag Cdo Current Make 30 Amps and carry for 3 s Carry 8 Amps continuous Break dc: 100 W resistive, 50 W inductive (L/R 40 ms) with a maximum of 5A or 300V. ac: 1250 VA with a maximum of 5A or 300V (power factor = 0.5) Logic output operation time < 7 ms Logic output mechanical durability > 100 000 operations

P124/EN T05/C44 Technical Guide CHAPTER 5 Technical data & curves characteristics Page 10/32 MiCOM P124 6.3.2 Other logic outputs (dual-powered version only) RL2 to RL6

Logic output type dry contact Ag Cdo

Current Make 30 Amps and carry for 3 s

Carry 5 Amps continuous

Break 135 Vdc, 0.3 A (L/R = 30 ms)

250 Vdc : 50W resistive ou 25W inductive

(L/R = 40 ms)

220 Vac, 5 Amps (cos ϕ = 0.6)

Logic output operation time < 7 ms

Logic output mechanical durability > 100 000 operations

6.4 Logic Input (dual-powered version only)

Logic input type independent optical isolated

Logic input burden 10 mAmps per input

Logic input recognition time < 2 ms

Supply :

Logic input operation

Cortec Code

Relay auxiliary voltage range

Auxiliary voltage range for the logic inputs

Minimum polarisation

voltage level (Volt)

Minimum current level

A 24 – 60 Vdc 24 – 60 Vdc (*) 15 Vdc 3.35 mA

F 48 – 150 Vdc 48 – 150 Vdc (*) 25 Vdc 3.35 mA

M 130 – 250 Vdc 100 – 250 Vac

130 – 250 Vdc (*) 48 – 250 Vac (*)

38 Vdc 38 Vdc

2.20 mA 1.90 mA

H 125 - 250 Vdc 100 – 250 Vac

105 – 145 Vdc 96 Vdc 1.80 mA

V 48 – 150 Vdc 110 – 250 Vac

110 Vdc (-30%/+20%)

77 Vdc 7.4 mA at 110 Vdc

W 125 – 250 Vdc 110 – 250 Vac

220 Vdc (-30%/+20%)

154 Vdc 3.8 mA at 220 Vdc

(*) The tolerance on the auxiliary voltage variations for the logic inputs is +20% in dc voltage and –20%, +10% in ac voltage.

6.5 Power supply (dual-powered version only)

Auxiliary voltage Vaux, 3 ranges 24-60 Vdc 48-150 Vdc 130-250 Vdc / 100-250 Vac, 50/60 Hz

Power supply variations dc ± 20 % ac – 20 %, + 10 %

Ripple 12 %.

Power off withstand 50 ms

Burden dc 3 W standby + 0.25 W per energised relay

ac 6 VA standby + 0.4 VA per energised relay


7. ACCURACY

Protection thresholds ±2 %

Time delay ± 2 % with a minimum of 10 ms

Measurements typical ± 0.2 % at In

Measurements pass band 500 Hz

8. CT DATA

MiCOM P124 relay settings

Phase CT primary 1 to 9999, step of 1 Earth CT primary 1 to 9999, step of 1

Recommendations : 5 VA 5P10 or 5 VA 10P10

Connections: refer to external connection diagrams in Appendix 1

9. HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND

Dielectric withstand IEC 60 255-5 2 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode

Impulse voltage IEC 60 255-5 5 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode

Insulation resistance IEC 60 255-5 > 1000 MΩ.

10. ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT

High frequency disturbance IEC 1000-4-1 2.5 kV common mode, class 3 1 kV differential mode, class 3

Fast transient IEC 1000-4-4 4 kV auxiliary voltage, class 4 ANSI C37.90.1 2 kV others, class 4

Electrostatic discharge IEC 1000-4-2 8 kV, class 4

Radio frequency impulse ANSI C37.90.2 35 V/m IEC 1000-4-3 10 V/m

11. ENVIRONMENT

Temperature IEC 60255-6 Storage –25°C to +70°C Operation –25°C to + 55°C

Humidity IEC 60068-2-3 56 days at 93% RH and 40°C

Protection de l'enveloppe IEC 60529 IP52, IK07

Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1 Response and endurance, class 2

Shocks and bumps IEC 60255-21-11 Response and withstand, class 1

Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1.


12. CURVES

12.1 IDMT Curves

12.1.1 Mathematical formula

12.1.1.1 IDMT thresholds

The first phases (earth) overcurrent threshold can be selected with a dependent time characteristic. The time delay is calculated with a mathematical formula.

In all, there are 13 inverse time characteristics available (11 for self-powered relay).

The mathematical formula applicable to the first 11 (first 10 for self-powered relay) curves is :

( ) ⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛+

−×=

αL

1I/i

KTt

s

Where:

t = Tripping time

K = Coefficient (see table)

I = Value of measured current

IS = Value of the programmed threshold (Pick-up value)

α = Coefficient (see table)

L = ANSI/IEEE coefficient (zero for IEC curves)

T = Time multiplier between 0.025 and 1.5

Type of curve Standard K factor α factor L factor

Short Time Inverse Schneider Electric

0.05 0.04 0

Standard inverse IEC 0.14 0.02 0

Very inverse IEC 13.5 1 0

Extremely inverse IEC 80 2 0

Long time inverse Schneider Electric

120 1 0

Short Time Inverse C02 0.002394 0.02 0.01694

Moderately Inverse ANSI/IEEE 0.0515 0.02 0.114

Long Time Inverse C08 5.95 2 0.18

Very Inverse ANSI/IEEE 19.61 2 0.491

Extremely Inverse ANSI/IEEE 28.2 2 0.1215.

Rectifier curve* 45900 5.6 0

* P124 Dual-powered only


The RI curve (electromechanical) is given by the following formula:

( )⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛−

×=sI/I/236.0339.0

1Kt

With K adjustable from 0.10 to 10 in steps of 0.05

This equation is valid for 1.1<= (I/IS)<= 20

Although the curves tend towards infinite when the current approaches Is, the minimum guaranteed value of the operating current for all the curves with the inverse time characteristic is 1.1Is (with a tolerance of ± 0,05Is), except rectifier Protection curve for which the minimum value is 1.6 Is ±0.05 Is.

LABORELEC CURVES (P124 Dual-powered only):

The first and second earth threshold can be selected with dedicated Laborelec curves.

There are 3 curves available with the following formula :

bat += I

where : t = tripping time a and b = coefficient (see table) I = Primary residual current (between 1 and 40A)

Type of curve a b

LABORELEC 1 – 0.0897 4.0897

LABORELEC 2 – 0.0897 4.5897

LABORELEC 3 – 0.0897 5.0897

In order to be compliant with the Laborelec specifications the relay must be used with :

− An earth current range 0.01 Ion to 8 Ion

− A rated current wiring 1A

− A core balanced CT with a ratio 20/1.

For a complete operating of the curve, the relay MiCOM P124 must be set to 0.05Ion (secondary residual current).

12.1.1.2 Reset timer

The first phase overcurrent threshold [I>/tI>] ([Ie>/tIe>] for the earth) has a reset time. The fixed period for this determines the minimum time during the current need to remain lower than 95% of the phase (earth) threshold before the time delay associated with the phase (earth) overcurrent threshold resets.

NOTE : There is an exception to this rule when the protection triggers. In fact, in this situation, the time delays tI>/tIe> are immediately reinitialised.


The value of the Reset Timer depends on the type of the timer associated to the pick-up first phase (Earth) threshold.

Type of timer associated to the first & second phase (earth) threshold

Reset Timer

DMT 0 ms LABORELEC *, Rectifier, IDMT IEC or RI Settable from 40 ms to 100s

IDMT IEEE or CO

Settable from 40 ms to 100s or

Inverse Time (Choice of 5 IEEE curves)

* earth threshold only

Reset timer settable:

The first phase and earth overcurrent stages in the P124 relays are provided with a timer hold facility "t Reset", which may be set to a definite time value or to an inverse time characteristic (IEEE/ANSI curves only). This may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays.

Another possible situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance times is where intermittent faults occur. An example of this may occur in a plastic insulated cable . In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts and reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent.

When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is minimum the relay will be repeatedly reset and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer Hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time.

The reset timer "t Reset" facility for the MiCOM P124 can be found in the following menu :

− If the first phase (earth) threshold is selected with an IDMT IEC, Rectifier, Laborelec or RI curve, the reset timer "t Reset" with DMT characteristic is settable in the menu :

− Protection /[50/51] Phase OC/t Reset for the phase

− Protection /[50N/51N] E/Gnd/t Reset for the earth.

− If the first phase (earth) threshold is selected with an IDMT IEEE or CO curve, the reset timer "t Reset" with a DMTor IDMT characteristic is settable in the menu :

− Protection /[50/51] Phase OC/Type Tempo Reset for the phase

− Protection /[50N/51N] E/Gnd/Type Tempo Reset for the earth.

Reset Time "t Reset" with an IDMT characteristic :

The mathematical formula applicable to the five curves is :

( ) ⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛

−×= α

sII1K

Tt


Where :

t = Reset time

K = Coefficient (see table)

I = Value of the measured current

IS = Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value)

α = Coefficient (see table)

T = Reset Time Multiplier (Rtms) between 0.025 and 3.2

Type of curves Standard K factor α factor Short time inverse C02 0.323 2 Moderately Inverse ANSI/IEEE 4.85 2 Long time Inverse C08 5.95 2 Very inverse ANSI/IEEE 21.6 2 Extremely inverse ANSI/IEEE 29.1 2

P124/EN T05/C44 Technical Guide CHAPTER 5 Technical data & curves characteristics Page 16/32 MiCOM P124 12.1.2 IEC CURVES.

IEC & Schneider Electric Curves

(TMS=0,025)

0,001

0,01

0,1

1

10

1 10 100

MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

Short time inverse (Schneider Electric)Standard Inverse

Very InverseExtremely Inverse

Long Time Inverse (Schneider Electric)

TIM

E IN

SE

CO

ND

S


Short Time Inverse (Schneider Electric)

0,001

0,01

0,1

1

10

1 10 100


TMS=0.025 TMS=0.2 TMS=0.5 TMS=1 TMS=1.25

B

B :

C

C :

D

D :

E

E :

A

A :

TIM

E IN

SE

CO

ND

S


STANDARD INVERSE (IEC)


TIM

EIN

SEC

ON

DS


VERY INVERSE (IEC)


TIM

EIN

SEC

ON

DS


EXTREMEMELY INVERSE (IEC)


TIM

EIN

SEC

ON

DS


0,1

1

100

1000

10000

1 10 100

E : TMS=0.025 D : TMS=0.2 C : TMS=0.5 B : TMS=1 A : TMS=1.25

LONG TIME INVERSE (Schneider Electric)

AB

C

D

E

TIM

E IN

SE

CO

ND

S


P124/EN T05/C44 Technical Guide CHAPTER 5 Technical data & curves characteristics Page 22/32 MiCOM P124 12.1.3 RI curves.

RI CURVES


TIM

EIN

SEC

ON

DS

Technical Guide P124/EN T05/C44 Technical data and CHAPTER 5 curves characteristics MiCOM P124 Page 23/32 12.1.4 IEEE/ANSI Curves.

ANSI/IEEE & CO curves(TMS/RTMS = 0.025)


Short Time Inverse (CO2)

Long Time Inverse (CO8)

Extremely Inverse

Moderately Inverse

Very Inverse

TIM

EIN

SEC

ON

DS


SHORT TIME INVERSE (CO2)


TIM

EIN

SEC

ON

DS


MODERATELY INVERSE (ANSI/IEEE)


TIM

EIN

SEC

ON

DS


LONG TIME INVERSE (CO8)


TIM

EIN

SEC

ON

DS


VERY INVERSE (ANSI/IEEE)


tim

ein

seco

nd

s


EXTREMELY INVERSE (ANSI/IEEE)


TIM

EIN

SEC

ON

DS

Technical Guide P124/EN T05/C44 Technical data and CHAPTER 5 curves characteristics MiCOM P124 Page 29/32 12.1.5 Rectifier protection curve

TRIPPING CURVE FUNCTION OF THE PREFAULT LOAD

(k=1.1 & T e=10mn)

MULTIPLES OF THERMAL THRESHOLD SETTING I >

A : no prefault load, thermal state = 0%

B : Thermal state = 30%

C : Thermal state = 50%

D : Thermal state = 70%

E : Thermal state = 90%

TIM

EIN

SEC

ON

DS

P124/EN T05/C44 Technical Guide CHAPTER 5 Technical data & curves characteristics Page 30/32 MiCOM P124 12.1.6 LABORELEC CURVE

Time (sec)

Prim

ary

zero

seq

uenc

e cu

rren

t (A

)

5

1.5

1.0

0.5

1

123

12345

1020

3040

50

Technical Guide P124/EN T05/C44 Technical data and CHAPTER 5 curves characteristics MiCOM P124 Page 31/32 12.2 Thermal overload curves

12.2.1 Mathematical formula

The thermal time characteristic is given by:

exp(-t/τ) = (I2 - (k.IFLC)2 ) / (I2 - IP2)

Where: t = Time to trip, following application of the overload current, I;

τ = Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant;

I = Largest phase current (RMS value);

IFLC = Full load current rating (relay setting 'Thermal Trip');

k = 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 IFLC.

IP = Steady state pre-loading before application of the overload.

The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from "hot" or "cold".

Mathematical formula applicable to the MiCOM Relays :

The calculation of the Time to Trip is given by :

⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛

θ−θ−

=²trip²K

²²KIn TeTtrip

With :

Ttrip = Time to trip (in seconds)

Te = Thermal time constant of the protected element (in seconds)

K = Thermal overload equal to Ieq/k Iθ>

Ieq = Equivalent current corresponding to the RMS value of the largest phase current.

Iθ> = Full load current rating given by the national standard or by the supplier.

k = Factor associated to the thermal state formula.

θ2 = Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then θ2

= 0.3

θtrip2 = Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then θ trip2

= 1

The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula :

θι+1 =(Ieq/ k Iθ>)2 [1- exp(-t/Te)] + θι exp(-t/Te)

θ being calculated every 100ms.

Typical alarm setting : 70 % of t he thermal capacity of the protected element.

P124/EN T05/C44 Technical Guide CHAPTER 5 Technical data & curves characteristics Page 32/32 MiCOM P124 12.2.2 Tripping curve


CHAPTER 6 Applications Guide

Technical Guide P124/EN T06/B44 Applications Guide CHAPTER 6 MiCOM P124 Page 1/22

CONTENT

1. INTRODUCTION 3

2. RECAP OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMER CHARACTERISTICS 4

2.1 Characterisation of a current transformer 4

2.2 Equivalent diagram of a current transformer 5

2.2.1 How to calculate the rated output burden in VA of a CT from its characteristic magnitudes (Vk , Rct ) 6

2.2.2 Definition equivalence for common CT 6

2.2.3 How to calculate the knee-point voltage Vk of a CT defined in class P 6

3. REQUIREMENTS FOR CTS TO OPERATE WITH A MiCOM P124 7

3.1 Consumption of MiCOM P124 relays 7

3.1.1 MiCOM P124, rated current 1A 8

3.1.2 MiCOM P124, rated current 5A 9

3.2 Is the MiCOM P124 adapted to a given current transformer? 10

3.2.1 P124 connected to a type AEG IED 24 with a ratio of 1/197 10

3.2.2 P124 CT connected to a type AEG IED 24 with a ratio of 1/150 11

3.3 Recommendations for selecting the CT 11

4. POSSIBLE CONNECTIONS OF THE CTS AT THE P124 INPUT 12

4.1 Connection to 3 phase CTs + core balanced CT 12

4.1.1 Core balanced CT connected to the self-powered earth current input (terminals 55-56) 12

4.1.2 Core balanced CT connected to the measurement earth current input (terminals 47- 48) 12

4.2 The earth current input is connected to the summation of the 3 phase CTs 12

4.3 Connection to 2 phases CTs + core balanced CT 12

5. DESCRIPTION AND SETTING GUIDE OF THE AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION (P124 DUAL-POWERED) 13

5.1 Introduction 13

5.2 Description of the function 15

5.2.1 Autorecloser activation 15

5.2.2 Autoreclose menu 15

5.2.3 Logic Functions 16

5.2.3.1 Logic Inputs 16 5.2.3.2 External CB fail 16

P124/EN T06/B44 Technical Guide CHAPTER 6 Applications Guide Page 2/22 MiCOM P124

5.2.3.3 External starting orders 16 5.2.3.4 External blocking order 16 5.2.3.5 Autoreclose Logic Outputs 17 5.2.3.6 Autoreclose in progress 17 5.2.3.7 Final trip 17 5.2.4 Autoreclose logic operating sequence 17

5.2.5 Autoreclose Inhibit Following Manual Close 18

5.2.6 Recloser lockout 18

5.2.7 Setting group change lockout 18

5.3 Setting Guidelines 18

5.3.1 Number Of Shots 18

5.3.2 Dead Timer Setting 19

5.3.2.1 Load 19 5.3.2.2 Circuit Breaker 19 5.3.2.3 Fault De-ionising Time 20 5.3.2.4 Protection Reset 20 5.3.3 Reclaim Timer Setting 20


1. INTRODUCTION

The P124 Self and Dual-Powered overcurrent relays in the MICOM range have been designed to test, protect and monitor both industrial installations and public power distribution networks and substations, without having to resort to an external auxiliary power supply. They can also be used as backup for HV protections of power transmission networks.

These two non-directional overcurrent protection models offer functions of protection and automation that are common with the MiCOM P122 and P123 models. For instance, for applications of MiCOM relays concerning these functions, the user should refer to document P124/EN T05/A44.

The protection relays self-powered by the fault current offer the specific feature of non-conventional current inputs. Accordingly, special attention will be given to the choice of the current transformers supplying these relays.

The following chapters describe our recommendations for choosing the current transformers associated to the MiCOM P124 relays.

The MiCOM P124 protection relays combined with the wiring represent a load for the current transformers. Consequently, the dimensions of the current transformers must be correctly calculated in order to comply with:

• the electrical installation diagram,

• the electrical data such as the nominal current, short-circuit current, ,


2. RECAP OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMER CHARACTERISTICS

2.1 Characterisation of a current transformer

A CT for protection relays is characterised on the basis of:

• Its rated output burden expressed in VA, its relevant accuracy class (5P or 10P) and the accuracy limit current (5In, 10In, 15In, 20In). The accuracy limit factor (K) being the ratio between the precision limit current and the nominal current rating.

• Naturally, the transformation ratio of the CT is to be added to this. This ratio is the ratio of the primary current to the secondary current I1/I2. The secondary current rating is generally 1 A or 5 A.

• Other characteristics such as the insulating voltage or the thermal behaviour are also taken into account.

Standard BS 3938 proposes a specification identical to that of IEC 185 for the class P transformers. The CT is characterised in accordance with a second class known as the X class (Cx) which, in addition to the calculation ratio, requires a knee-point voltage Vk and an internal resistance Rct .

The following magnitudes are associated to the magnetization curve of a CT:

• The knee-point voltage Vk, which is determined by the point of the curve V=f (Im ) beyond which an increase of 10% in the voltage V results in an increase of 50% in the magnetizing current.

• The voltage related to the precision limit of the CT.

⇒ For a 5PK CT (accuracy class 5P, accuracy limit factor K):

At the saturation voltage Vs1 we will have an accuracy of 5% on the current

K * In.

⇒ For a 10PK TC (accuracy class 10P, accuracy limit factor K):

At the saturation voltage Vs2 we will have an accuracy of 10% on the current K*In

Knee pointvoltage

FIGURE 1: DEFINITION OF KNEE-POINT OF MAGNETIZATION CURVE.


With the materials generally used to manufacture current transformers, we have:

Vk corresponds to 1.4 tesla

Vs1 corresponds to 1.6 tesla

Vs2 correspond à 1.9 tesla

2.2 Equivalent diagram of a current transformer

The equivalent diagram of a CT is indicated below:

• CT ratio: n2/n1

• Lm : magnetization self-induction coil of CT

• Im : magnetizing current

• I1 : primary current

• I2 : secondary current = I1 * n2 /n1

• Is : secondary current passing through the load Rp. :

• Rct : secondary winding resistance of CT (ohms)

FIGURE 2: EQUIVALENT DIAGRAM OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER

The magnetizing current I m of the transformer depends on the voltage generated at the secondary windings of the transformer.

It is this current that introduces an error signal into the measurement. If the CT was perfect, the magnetizing current would be zero.

→ → → Is= I2 Im


2.2.1 How to calculate the rated output burden in VA of a CT from its characteristic magnitudes (Vk , Rct )

The saturation voltage is derived by the following formula: Vs = (Rct + Rp ) Is

The nominal load rating of the CT being Rp = Pn /I n2

We have Vs = (Rct + Pn /In2 ) Is

whence Pn = (Vs /Is - Rct )In2

• For transformer with in a 5P accuracy class: Vs1 / Vk = 1.6/1.4

Thus: Vs1 = 1.6/1.4 * Vk, at Is1 equals K * In

whence Pn = [(1.6/1.4 * Vk )/K* In - Rct ] *In2

• For transformer with a 10P accuracy class: Vs2 / Vk = 1.9/1.4

thus Vs2 = 1.9/1.4 * Vk, at Is2 equals K * In

whence Pn = [(1.9/1.4 * Vk )/K* In - Rct ] *In2

2.2.2 Definition equivalence for common CT

Knowing that the only constants of a CT are its magnetization curve, its resistance Rct and its transformation ratio , it is possible change from a transformer with a power Pn1 in VA of the 5PK1 type to a transformer with a power of Pn2 in VA of the 5PK2 type.

Given known values of Vs1 and Rct:

Vs1 = (Rct +Pn1 /In2 )*K1 * In = (Rct + Pn2 /In2 )*K2 *In

Pi = Rct * In2 (ohmic loss of CT)

(Pi +Pn1) * K1 = (Pi + Pn2 ) * K2

whence K2 = [(Rct * In2 + Pn1 )/ (Rct * In2 + Pn2 )] * K1

2.2.3 How to calculate the knee-point voltage Vk of a CT defined in class P

• For a transformer with accuracy class of 5P : Vs1 / Vk = 1.6/1.4

Pn = [(1.6/1.4 * Vk )/K* In - Rct ] *In2

whence Vk = 1.4/1.6 (Pn / In 2 + Rct) K * In

• For a transformer with a precision class 10P : V s2 / V k = 1.9/1.4

Pn = [(1.9/1.4 * Vk )/K* In - Rct ] *In2

whence Vk = 1.4/1.9 (Pn / In 2 + Rct) K * In.


3. REQUIREMENTS FOR CTS TO OPERATE WITH A MiCOM P124

For the conventional case of a resistive load, the voltage at the secondary winding of the transformer is proportional to the primary current, so the error remains constant.

In the case of a MiCOM P124 type self-powered protection relay, this no longer applies, since the voltage at the input of the protection circuit is in a non-proportional ratio to the input current.

The best solution to check whether the MiCOM P124 relay is adapted to a given CT is to have available the magnetization curve and the internal resistance of the CT in question.

To guarantee good precision at low currents, the magnetizing current of the CT must be low. In other words, the input voltage of the relay must be sufficiently low compared with the knee-point voltage Vk of the CT.

The following paragraphs show the ac burden of the P124 MiCOM relay and, knowing the magnetisation curve of a CT, one can then determine the precision of the system as a whole, for the entire current range: PROTECTION P124 + associated CT.

3.1 Consumption of MiCOM P124 relays

The MiCOM P124 self and dual-powered models (with identical ac burden at their current inputs) have a minimum self-supply starting current of 0.2 In. This minimum level of current is needed on at least one phase to enable the MiCOM relay to be correctly self-powered to ensure the full capability of its protection functions:

CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING ARE THE THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS

• 3 In continuous rating

• 40 In during 100 s

• 100 In during 1 s


3.1.1 MiCOM P124, rated current 1A

The figure below indicates the voltage (average value of signal for 10 ms) on each phase or on earth current input (across terminals 55 and 56), depending on the current injected.

P124

ver

sion

In=

1A

05

1015

0.00

10.0

020

.00

30.0

040

.00

50.0

060

.00

Cur

rent

In (A

)In

Average voltage (V)

FIGURE 3: CURRENT INPUT BURDEN, RATED CURRENT 1A


3.1.2 MiCOM P124, rated current 5A

The figure below indicates the voltage (average value of signal for 10 ms) on each phase or on earth current input (across terminals 55 and 56), depending on the current injected.

P124

ver

sion

In=

5A

012 0.00

10.0

020

.00

30.0

040

.00

50.0

060

.00

Cur

rent

In (A

)In

Average voltage (V)

FIGURE 4: CURRENT INPUT BURDEN, RATED CURRENT 5A


3.2 Is the MiCOM P124 adapted to a given current transformer?

The purpose of this chapter is to show the adequacy of the MiCOM P124 relay to a given CT.

We propose to take as an example the AEG IED 24 reference multi-secondary windings CT.

3.2.1 P124 connected to a type AEG IED 24 with a ratio of 1/197

The characteristics indicated by the maker of the CT are as follows:

Rated current In = 1A, Class X (Cx), Vk>38.0 V, Rct <0.443 ohms

Given the burden of a phase input for a given current (see paragraphs 3.1.1 and 3.1.2). The charts of the maker of the CT indicate the magnetizing current in terms of the voltage and we can then calculate the error caused by the magnetizing current for the following three currents:

MiCOM P124, rated current In = 1A

Current 0.2 In (starting current) In 40 In

Voltage 4.3 V 2.66 V 11.8 V

Magnetizing current

0,006 A 0.006 A 0.01 A

Error 3 % 0.6 % 0.025 %

The errors calculated reveal a maximum error of 3 % at minimum current, with this error inversely proportional to the current.

Referring to chapter 2.2.1, we can derive the corresponding rated output burden in the P class of this transformer expressed in terms of Vk and R ct. as follows:

• The corresponding rated output burden of this CT in class 5 is:

Pn = [(1.6/1.4 * Vk )/10* In - Rct ] *In2

with In = 1 A and an accuracy limit factor of 10

Pn = 3.89 VA 5P10


Pn = [(1.9/1.4 * Vk )/10* In - Rct ] *In2

with In = 1 A and an accuracy limit factor of 10.

Pn = 4.71 VA 10P10

Test were conducted on the MiCOM P124 with this CT and confirmed the satisfactory operation of the combination CT + P124.

NOTE: in this example, the relay was connected along side the CT; in this way, the influence of the wiring was negligible.


3.2.2 P124 CT connected to a type AEG IED 24 with a ratio of 1/150

The characteristics indicated by the maker of the CT are:

Rated current In = 1A, Class X (Cx), Vk>28.6 V, Rct <0.393 ohms

Given the burden of a phase input for a given current (see paragraphs 3.1.1 and 3.1.2). Since the charts of the maker of the CT indicate a magnetizing current against voltage, we can calculate the error caused by the magnetizing current for the following three currents :

MiCOM P124, rated current In = 1A

Current 0.2 In (starting current)

In 40 In

Voltage 4.3 V 2.66 V 11.8 V

Magnetising current 0.01 A 0.01 A 0.017 A

Error 5 % 1 % 0.042 %

The errors calculated reveal a maximum error of 5 % at minimum current, with this error inversely proportional to the current.

Referring to chapter 2.2.1, we can derive a corresponding rated output burden in class P of this transformer expressed in terms of Vk and R ct as folles :


Pn = [(1.6/1.4 * Vk )/10* In - Rct ] *In2

with In = 1 A and an accuracy limit factor of 10

Pn = 2.87 VA 5P10


Pn = [(1.9/1.4 * Vk )/10* In - Rct ] *In2

with In = 1 A and an accuracy limit factor of 10.

Pn = 3.48 VA 10P10

Tests were conducted on the MiCOM P124 with this CT and confirmed the satisfactory operation of the combination CT + P124.

NOTE: in this example, the relay was connected alongside the CT, so the influence of the wiring was negligible.

3.3 Recommendations for selecting the CT

Assuming that the CT does not supply any circuits other than the MiCOM P124, in practice, we can recommend CTs of the following types:

5VA 5P10 or 5VA 10P10

secondary 1A or 5A.


4. POSSIBLE CONNECTIONS OF THE CTS AT THE P124 INPUT

For the diagrams, consult those indicated in appendix 1 of the technical guide.

4.1 Connection to 3 phase CTs + core balanced CT

4.1.1 Core balanced CT connected to the self-powered earth current input (terminals 55-56)

Advantage:

This connection is advantageous when the transformation ratio of the core CT is less than that of the phase CTs (greater sensitivity demand on the earth range). This enables the fault at the earth current input of the protection to be perceived even if this fault is not of sufficient level (0.2 In) to supply the protection via the phase currents, in which case the fault could self-power the protection through the earth current input.

Disadvantage:

The core CT must be appropriately dimensioned, that is it must have few turns, to ensure good sensitivity whilst nonetheless being capable of providing the burden in VA needed for the protection.

4.1.2 Core balanced CT connected to the measurement earth current input (terminals 47- 48)

Advantage:

In this case, there is no need for the core CT to supply the MiCOM P124 through the earth current input, so the core has no need to be overdimensioned in terms of power.

Disadvantage:

No self-supply of the MiCOM P124 by the earth current input and hence the need for a minimum current at the phases (0.2 In).

4.2 The earth current input is connected to the summation of the 3 phase CTs

Advantage:

In this case, the earth current is detected by summing the 3 phase CTs, so there is no need to use a core CT. The summing operation is conducted at terminals 47-48 of the earth current input, so there is no need for the CTs to supply the relay via the earth current input.

Disadvantage:

Less accuracy than core CT connection.

4.3 Connection to 2 phases CTs + core balanced CT

Advantage:

Only 2 CTs are used, resulting in saving one phase CT. The third phase is reformed by the wiring.

Disadvantage:

The phase and earth CTs must be suitably overdimensioned. The core CT must be connected to the supply input of the earth current input (terminals 55-56).

We assume that the system is balanced.


5. DESCRIPTION AND SETTING GUIDE OF THE AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION (P124 DUAL-POWERED ONLY)

5.1 Introduction

An analysis of faults on any overhead line network has shown that 80-90% are transient in nature.

A transient fault, such as an insulator flash-over, is a self clearing non-damage fault. This type of fault can be cleared by the immediate tripping of one or more circuit breakers to isolate the fault, and does not recur when the line is re-energised. Lightning is the most common cause of transient faults, other possible causes being clashing conductors and wind blown debris. The remaining 10 - 20% of faults are either non-permanent (arcing fault) or permanent.

A non-permanent fault could be caused by a small tree branch falling on the line. Here the cause of the fault would not be removed by the immediate tripping of the circuit, but could be burnt away during a time delayed trip.

Permanent faults could be broken conductors, transformer faults, cable faults or machine faults which must be located and repaired before the supply can be restored.

In the majority of fault incidents, if the faulty line is immediately tripped out, and time is allowed for the fault arc to de-ionise, reclosure of the circuit breakers will result in the line being successfully re-energised. Autoreclose schemes are employed to automatically reclose a switching device a set time after it has been opened due to operation of protection where transient and non-permanent faults are prevalent.

On HV/MV distribution networks, auto-reclosing is applied mainly to radial feeders where system stability problems do not generally arise. The main advantages to be derived from using autoreclose can be summarised as follows:

• Minimises interruptions in supply to the consumer.

• Reduces operating costs - less man hours in repairing fault damage and the possibility of running substations unattended. With autoreclose instantaneous protection can be used which means shorter fault durations which gives rise to less fault damage and fewer permanent faults.

As 80% of overhead line faults are transient, elimination of loss of supply from such faults, by the introduction of autoreclosing gives obvious benefits. Furthermore, autoreclosing may allow a particular substation to operate unattended. In the case of unattended substations, the number of visits by personnel to reclose a circuit breaker manually after a fault can be substantially reduced, an important consideration for substations in remote areas.

Autoreclosing gives an important benefit on circuits using time graded protection, in that it allows the use of instantaneous protection to give a high speed first trip. With fast tripping, the duration of the power arc resulting from an overhead line fault is reduced to a minimum, thus lessening the chance of damage to the line, which might otherwise cause a transient fault to develop into a permanent fault.

Using short time delay protection also prevents blowing of fuses and reduces circuit breaker maintenance by eliminating pre-arc heating when clearing transient faults.


Figure 5 shows an example of 4 autoreclose cycles to the final trip :

td1, td2, td3, td4 = dead time 1, 2, 3 and 4 timers

tr = Reclaim type

O = CB open

C = CB closed.

FIGURE 5: TYPICAL AUTORECLOSE CYCLES

It should be noted that when short time delay protection is used with autoreclosing, the scheme is normally arranged to block the instantaneous protection after the first trip. Therefore, if the fault persists after reclosure, the time graded protection will give discriminative tripping with fuses or other protection devices, resulting in the isolation of the faulted section. However, for certain applications, where the majority of the faults are likely to be transient, it is not uncommon to allow more than one instantaneous trip before the instantaneous protection is blocked.

Some schemes allow a number of reclosures and time graded trips after the first instantaneous trip, which may result in the burning out and clearance of non-permanent faults. Such a scheme may also be used to allow fuses to operate in teed feeders where the fault current is low.

When considering feeders which are partly overhead line and partly underground cable, any decision to install autoreclosing would be influenced by any data known on the frequency of transient faults. When a significant proportion of the faults are permanent, the advantages of autoreclosing are small, particularly since reclosing on to a faulty cable is likely to aggravate the damage.


5.2 Description of the function

5.2.1 Autorecloser activation

The autoreclose function of the MiCOM P124 Dual-powered is available only if the following conditions are verified :

• The auxiliary contact of the CB status 52a must be connected to the relay See AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu

• The trip output relay RL1 must not be latched to the earth and/or phase protection function See AUTOMAT. CTRL/Latch functions menu

CAUTION : IF THE AUXILIARY SUPPLY IS LOST DURING AN AUTORECLOSE CYCLE, THE AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION IS TOTALLY DISABLED.

5.2.2 Autoreclose menu

The following table shows the relay settings for the autoreclose function, including the available setting ranges. The same settings are available in the PROTECTION 2 Menu.

MENU TEXT SETTING RANGE STEP SIZE PROTECTION G1 MIN MAX Autoreclose ? NO YES Ext CB Fail ? NO YES Ext CB Fail Time 10 ms 600 s 10 ms Ext Block ? NO YES Dead Time tD1 10 ms 300 000 ms 10 ms Dead Time tD2 10 ms 300 000 ms 10 ms Dead Time tD3 10 ms 600 000 ms 10 ms Dead Time tD4 10 ms 600 000 ms 10 ms Reclaim Time tR 20 ms 600 000 ms 10 ms Inhib Time tI 20 ms 600 000 ms 10 ms Phase Cycles 0 4 1 E/Gnd Cycles 0 4 1 CYCLES tI>

4321 1201

CYCLES tI>>

4321 1211

CYCLES tI>>>

4321 1110

CYCLES tIe>

4321 0111

CYCLES tIe>>

4321 1121

CYCLES tIe>>>

4321 1111

CYCLES tAux1

4321 1112

CYCLES tAux2

4321 0101


Example of setting :

CYCLES tI>

4321 1201

4321 are the cycles 1 to 4 associated to the trip on tI> pick up 1201 are the actions following the tI> time out : 0 = no action on autorecloser : definitive trip 1 = trip on tI> pick up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tI> pick up : and this whatever the setting in AUTOMAT. CRTL/Trip commands/Trip tI> menu.

In addition to these settings, function links in the PROTECTION G1/Phase OC or PROTECTION/E/Gnd menus are also required to fully integrate the autoreclose logic in the MiCOM P124 relay. Refer to the User Guide of the Technical Guide.

5.2.3 Logic Functions

5.2.3.1 Logic Inputs

The autoreclose function has four inputs affecting the logic, which are configured to any of the opto-isolated inputs on the relay via the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu. External inputs may be used to influence the autorecloser scheme. The function of these inputs are described below.

5.2.3.2 External CB fail

The majority of circuit breakers are only capable of providing one trip-close-trip cycle. Following this, it is necessary to establish if there is sufficient energy to reclose the CB. The input assigned to CB FLT function is used to ensure that there is sufficient energy available to close and trip the CB before initiating a CB close command. If on completion of the dead time, sufficient energy is not available by checking the CB FLT input for a time given by the tCFE, a lockout occur and the CB remains open.

This function is disabled by not allocating the function in the PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose menu (function Ext CB Fail to NO).

5.2.3.3 External starting orders

Two separate and programmable inputs (AUTOMAT.CTRL/INPUTS/Aux1(2) menu) may be used to initiate the autorecloser function from an external device (such as an existing overcurrent relay). These logic inputs may be used independently and also in parallel with the MiCOM P124 Overcurrent settings.

These external orders can be disabled independently by not allocating the functions in the PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose/CYCLES tAux1 menu and PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose/CYCLES tAux2 menu.

5.2.3.4 External blocking order

The input assigned to the Block-79 function (programmable in the AUTOMAT.CTRL/INPUTS menu) may block the autoreclose function and cause a lock-out if the autorecloser function is in progress. This input can be used when protection operation without autorecloser function is required.

A typical example is on a transformer feeder, where autoreclosing may be initiated from the feeder protection but need to be blocked from the transformer protection side.


These external order can be disabled by not allocating the function in the PROTECTION/Autoreclose/Ext Block menu.

5.2.3.5 Autoreclose Logic Outputs

The following output signals can be assigned to relay contact or to LEDs to provide information about the status of the auto Reclose cycle. These are described below, identified by their namings.

5.2.3.6 Autoreclose in progress

The "Autoreclose in progress" signal is present during the complete reclose cycles from protection initiation to the end of the reclaim time or lockout.

The "Autoreclose in progress" information is allocated to a LED in the CONFIGURATION/Led/Recloser Run menu.

The "Autoreclose in progress" information is allocated to the output relays in the AUTOMAT.CTRL/Output Relays/79 Run menu.

5.2.3.7 Final trip

The "Final trip" signal indicates that an autoreclose cycle has been completed. A autoreclose signal is given after the CB has tripped from the protection and reclosed whereupon the fault has not been cleared. The "Final trip" signal is reset at the next CB manual closing order after the inhibit time (tI).

The inhibit time (tI) is settable in the PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose/Inhib Time menu.

The "Final trip" signal is allocated to the output relays in the AUTOMAT.Ctrl/Output Relays/79 Trip menu.

The "Final trip" signal is allocated to a LED in the CONFIGURATION/Led/Recloser Blocked menu.

5.2.4 Autoreclose logic operating sequence

The autoreclose function provides multi-shot three phase autoreclose control. It can be adjusted to perform a single shot, two shot, three shot or four shot cycle, selectable via Phase Cycles numbers and E/Gnd Cycles numbers. Dead times for all shots (reclose attempts) are independently adjustable.

The number of shots is directly related to the type of faults likely to occur on the system and the voltage level of the system. Generally, on medium voltage networks where the percentage of transient and non-permanent faults is likely to be high, a multi-shot autoreclose device will increase the possibility of the distribution line being successfully re-energised following reclosure of the circuit breaker.

An autoreclose cycle can be internally initiated by operation of a protection element (phase or earth), provided the circuit breaker is closed until the instant of protection operation. The dead time (Dead Time tD1, Dead Time tD2, Dead Time tD3, Dead Time tD4) starts when the CB has tripped (when the 52a input disappears).

At the end of the relevant dead time, a CB close signal is given, provided system conditions are suitable. The system conditions to be met for closing are that the circuit breaker closing spring, or other energy source, is fully charged indicated from the CB FLT input. The CB close signal is cut-off when the circuit breaker closes.

When the CB has closed the reclaim time (Reclaim Time tR) starts.

If the circuit breaker does not trip again, the autoreclose function resets at the end of the reclaim time.


If the protection operates during the reclaim time the relay either advances to the next shot in the programmed autoreclose cycle, or, if all programmed reclose attempts have been made, goes to lockout.

The total number of reclosures and for each cycle is shown in the MEASUREMENT menu. This value can be reset to zero with command "C" (Clear) in the MEASUREMENTS/Reclose Stats menu.

5.2.5 Autoreclose Inhibit Following Manual Close

The Inhib Time tI setting can be used to prevent autoreclose being initiated when the CB is manually closed onto a fault. Autoreclose is disabled for the Inhib Time tI following manual CB Closure.

5.2.6 Recloser lockout

If protection operates during the reclaim time, following the final reclose attempt, the relay will lockout and the autoreclose function is disabled until the lockout condition resets.

The lockout condition is reset by a manual closing after the "Inhib Time tI".

Autoreclose lockout can also be caused by a CB FLT input. This CB FLT information can be issued from the CB springs are not charged/Low gas pressure.

Note, lockout can also be caused by :

• CB no open after tBf delay (CB Fail)

• CB Operating Time over the threshold set.

5.2.7 Setting group change lockout

Change of setting groups is only assumed by the MiCOM P124 relays if no protection functions (except thermal overload function) or automation functions is running. During the whole autorecloser cycles, if any setting group change order is received, this order is stored in memory, and will be executed after the last timer of the autorecloser cycle.

5.3 Setting Guidelines

5.3.1 Number Of Shots

There are no clear-cut rules for defining the number of shots for a particular application. Generally medium voltage systems utilise only two or three shot autoreclose schemes. However, in certain countries, for specific applications, four shots is not uncommon. Four shots have the advantage that the final dead time can be set sufficiently long to allow any thunderstorms to pass before reclosing for the final time, this arrangement will prevent unnecessary lockout for consecutive transient faults.

Typically, the first trip, and sometimes the second, will result from short time protection since 80% of faults are transient, the subsequent trips will be time delayed, all with increasing dead times to clear non-permanent faults.

In order to determine the required number of shots the following factors must be taken into account.


An important consideration is the ability of the circuit breaker to perform several trip-close operations in quick succession and the effect of these operations on the maintenance period.

If statistical information on a particular system shows a moderate percentage of non-permanent faults which could be burned out, two or more shots are justified. In addition to this, if fused tees are used and the fault level is low, the fusing time may not discriminate with the main IDMT relay and it would then be useful to have several shots. This would warm up the fuse to such an extent that it would eventually blow before the main protection operated.

5.3.2 Dead Timer Setting

The factors which influence the choice of dead timer setting are as follows.

5.3.2.1 Load

Due to the great diversity of load which may exist on a system it may prove very difficult to arrive at an optimum dead time. However, it is possible to address each type of load individually and thereby arrive at a typical dead time. The most common types of load are addressed below.

Synchronous motors are only capable of tolerating extremely short interruptions of supply without loss of synchronism. In practice it is desirable to disconnect the motor from the supply in the event of a fault; the dead time should be sufficient to allow the motor no-volt device to operate. Typically, a minimum dead time of 0.2-0.3 seconds has been suggested to allow this device to operate. Induction motors, on the other hand, can withstand supply interruptions, up to a maximum of 0.5 seconds and re-accelerate successfully. In general dead times of 3-10 seconds are normally satisfactory, but there may be special cases for which additional time is required to permit the resetting of manual controls and safety devices.

Loss of supply to lighting circuits, such as street lighting may be important for safety reasons as intervals of 10 seconds or more may be dangerous for traffic. The main considerations for domestic customers are those of inconvenience.

An important measurement criteria for many power utilities is the number of minutes lost per year to customers which will be reduced on feeders using autoreclose and will also be affected by the dead time settings used.

5.3.2.2 Circuit Breaker

For high speed autoreclose the minimum dead time of the power system will depend on the minimum time delays imposed by the circuit breaker during a tripping and reclosing operation.

Since a circuit breaker is a mechanical device, it will have an inherent contact separation time. This operating time for a modern circuit breaker is usually within the range of 50-100ms, but could be longer with older designs.

After tripping, time must be allowed for the mechanism to reset before applying a closing pulse. This resetting time will vary depending on the circuit breaker, but is typically 0.1 seconds.

Once the circuit breaker has reset, the breaker can begin to close. The time interval between the energisation of the closing mechanism and the making of the contacts is termed the closing time. Owing to the time constant of a solenoid closing mechanism and the inertia of the plunger, a solenoid closing mechanism may take 0.3s. A spring operated breaker, on the other hand, can close in less than 0.2 seconds.


Where high speed reclosing is required, for the majority of medium voltage applications, the circuit breaker mechanism itself dictates the minimum dead time. However, the fault de-ionising time may also have to be considered.

High speed autoreclose may be required to maintain stability on a network with two or more power sources. For high speed autoreclose the system disturbance time should be minimised by using fast protection, <50 ms, such as distance or feeder differential protection and fast circuit breakers < 100 ms. Fast fault clearance can reduce the required fault arc de-ionising time.

For stability between two sources a dead time of <300 ms may typically be required. The minimum system dead time only considering the CB is the mechanism reset time plus the CB closing time. Thus, a solenoid mechanism will not be suitable for high speed autoreclose as the closing time is generally too long.

5.3.2.3 Fault De-ionising Time

For high speed autoreclose the fault de-ionising time may be the most important factor when considering the dead time. This is the time required for ionised air to disperse around the fault position so that the insulation level of the air is restored. This can be approximated from:

De-ionising time = (10.5 + ((system voltage in kV)/34.5)) / frequency

For 66 kV = 0.25 s (50Hz)

For 132 kV = 0.29 s (50 Hz)

5.3.2.4 Protection Reset

It is essential that the protection fully resets during the dead time, so that correct time discrimination will be maintained after reclosure on to a fault. For high speed autoreclose instantaneous reset of protection is required.

Typical 11/33kV dead time settings in the UK are as follows;

1st dead time = 5 - 10 seconds

2nd dead time = 30 seconds

3rd dead time = 60 - 100 seconds

4th dead time (uncommon in the UK, however used in South Africa) = 60 - 100 seconds

5.3.3 Reclaim Timer Setting

A number of factors influence the choice of the reclaim timer, such as;

• Supply continuity - Large reclaim times can result in unnecessary lockout for transient faults.

• Fault incidence/Past experience - Small reclaim times may be required where there is a high incidence of lightning strikes to prevent unnecessary lockout for transient faults.

• Spring charging time - For high speed autoreclose the reclaim time may be set longer than the spring charging time to ensure there is sufficient energy in the circuit breaker to perform a trip-close-trip cycle. For delayed autoreclose there is no need as the dead time can be extended by an extra CB healthy check window time if there is insufficient energy in the CB. If there is insufficient energy after the check window time the relay will lockout.


• Switchgear Maintenance - Excessive operation resulting from short reclaim times can mean shorter maintenance periods. A minimum reclaim time of >5s may be needed to allow the CB time to recover after a trip and close before it can perform another trip-close-trip cycle. This time will depend on the duty (rating) of the CB.

The reclaim time must be long enough to allow any time delayed protection initiating autoreclose to operate. Failure to do so would result in premature resetting of the autoreclose scheme and re-enabling of instantaneous protection.

If this condition arose, a permanent fault would effectively look like a number of transient faults, resulting in continuous autoreclosing unless additional measures were taken to overcome this such as excessive fault frequency lockout protection.

It is possible to have short reclaim times by blocking the reclaim time from the protection start signals. If short reclaim times are to be used then the switchgear rating may dictate the minimum reclaim time. The advantage of a short reclaim time is that there are less lockouts of the CB, however, there will be more CB operations and so maintenance periods would be reduced.

Sensitive earth fault protection is applied to detect high resistance earth faults and usually has a long time delay, typically 10-15s. This longer time may have to be taken into consideration, if autoreclosing from SEF protection, when deciding on a reclaim time, if the reclaim time is not blocked by an SEF protection start signal. Sensitive earth faults, for example, a broken overhead conductor in contact with dry ground or a wood fence, is rarely transient and may be a danger to the public.

It is therefore common practice to block autoreclose by operation of sensitive earth fault protection and lockout the circuit breaker.

Where motor-wound spring closed circuit breakers are used, the reclaim time must be at least as long as the spring winding time for high speed autoreclose to ensure that the breaker can perform a trip-close-trip cycle.

A typical 11/33kV reclaim time is 3-10 seconds, this prevents unnecessary lockout during thunderstorms. However, times up to 60-180 seconds may be used.


BLANK PAGE

Technical guide P124/EN T07/B44 MiCOM P124

CHAPTER 7 Commissioning and Maintenance Guide

Technical Guide P124/EN T07/B44 Commissioning and Maintenance CHAPTER 7 MiCOM P124 Page 1/22

CONTENT

1. REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING 3

2. COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT 4

2.1 Important notes 4

2.1.1 Injection test sets 4

2.1.2 Additional commissioning test equipment 4

2.1.3 Communication 4

2.2 Commissioning test sheets 5

3. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS 6

3.1 Allocation of terminals 6

3.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 6

3.3 Visual inspection 6

3.4 Earthing 6

3.5 Current transformers (CT's) 6

3.5.1 Use of a Core CT for earth faults. 6

3.5.1.1 Cable shields and core CT 7

3.5.1.2 Induced current flow through electric cables 7

3.5.1.3 Core CT polarity 8

3.6 Auxiliary supply (Dual-powered model only) 8

3.7 Logic inputs (Dual-powered model only) 9

3.8 Logic outputs (Dual-powered model only) 9

3.9 Logic outputs (Self-powered version ) 10

3.10 RS 485 rear communication (Dual-powered model only) 10

4. COMMISSIONING 11

4.1 Settings 11

4.2 Measurements 11

4.2.1 MiCOM P124 Self-powered 11

4.2.2 MiCOM P124 Dual-powered 11

4.3 Phase overcurrent (I> and I>>) 12

4.3.1 Test wiring diagram 12

4.3.2 MiCOM settings 13

4.3.3 I> threshold with DMT tI> 13

4.3.4 I> threshold with IDMT tI> 14

4.3.5 I>> threshold 16

4.4 Final checks 17

P124/EN T07/B44 Technical Guide CHAPTER 7 Commissioning and Maintenance Page 2/22 MiCOM P124

5. MAINTENANCE 18

5.1 Equipment failure 18

5.1.1 Minor fault (Version Dual-powered only) 18

5.1.2 Major fault 19

5.2 Method of repair 20

5.2.1 Replacing the active part 20

5.2.2 Replacing the complete relay 20

5.2.3 Changing the battery (MiCOM P124 Dual-powered only) 21

5.3 Problem solving 21

5.3.1 Password lost or not accepted 21

5.3.2 Communication (version Dual-powered only) 21

5.3.2.1 Values measured locally and remotely 21

5.3.2.2 MiCOM relay no longer responds 22

5.3.2.3 A remote command is not taken in account 22


1. REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING

The MiCOM P124 relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The MiCOM relays employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test do not need to be as extensive as with non- numerical relays (static or electromechanical).

To commission MiCOM relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning correctly and the application-specific software setting have been applied to the MiCOM relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings have been verified by one of the following method :

− Extracting the settings applied to the relay using the setting software MiCOM S1 (preferred method)

− Via the front panel user interface.

Reminder : It is not possible to download a new setting software as long as the programming mode is active.

NOTA : Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the APPENDIX 2 of the Technical Guide for completion as required.

WARNING : BEFORE COMMISSIONING THE RELAY, THE SAFETY SECTION OF THE MANUAL MUST BE READ.


2. COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT

2.1 Important notes

All the commissioning tests of the MiCOM P124 relay are carried out by injecting currents to the secondary of the earth and/or phases CTs using appropriate injection test sets provided for this purpose.

2.1.1 Injection test sets

For reasons of convenience (weight, spatial requirement, transportation), a single- phased injection test set is more suitable for commissioning and is able to perform all commissioning tests regarding MiCOM P124 relay.

Thus, the following descriptions indicate how to conduct the commissioning tests with a single-phase injection test set.

Single-phase injection test set

1 current (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).

The output power necessary to power the relay is: 2.5 VA

2.1.2 Additional commissioning test equipment

• 1 multimeter (precision 1%),

• 1 connecting terminal to measure the currents exceeding 10 A (precision 2%),

• Test plugs and wires to carry out injections to the CT's secondary (dimension according to the currents injected).

• Battery box MiCOM E1 for the self-powered model (see note) if the injected current is lower than the minimum current specified to power the relay.

• Type K1.3 or equivalent striker.

NOTE : the battery box can also be used for the dual-powered model, when it is not powered by an external auxiliary voltage.

2.1.3 Communication

For all commissioning tests, the records can be made by using the RS 485 communication on the rear connector of the MiCOM P124 (dual-powered only) relays or using the RS232 front port (both self and dual-powered models).

According to each RS 485 communication protocol (MODBUS, Courier, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3), use the dedicated Schneider Electric software MiCOM S1.


2.2 Commissioning test sheets

Commissioning test sheets are available in the APPENDIX 2 of the Technical Guide.

The presentation of the Commissioning test sheets follows the description of the tests of this chapter.

The contents of these Commissioning test sheets enable you to log :

• The name of the relay, station and circuit

• The characteristics of the MiCOM P124 relay

• The various settings

• The results of the protection and automation checks

• The result of the test records after commissioning.


3. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS

3.1 Allocation of terminals

It is necessary to consult the appropriate wiring diagram provided in the APPENDIX 1 of the Technical Guide whilst observing the various polarities and ground/earth connection.

3.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Before any handling of the module (active part of the relay), please refer to the recommendations in User guide of this Technical Guide.

3.3 Visual inspection

Carefully examine the relay to see if there has been any possible deterioration following installation.

Check if the external wiring corresponds to the appropriate relay diagram or the assembly diagram. The reference number of the relay diagram is indicated on a label situated under the upper flap of the front panel.

When the relay is withdraw from its case, use a continuity tester to check if the current short-circuits (phases and earth CT's) between the terminals indicated on the wiring diagram are closed.

3.4 Earthing

Check if the earth connection of the case situated above the rear terminal block is used to connect the relay to a local earth bar. With several relays present, make sure that the copper earth bar is properly installed for solidly connecting the earthing terminals of each case.

3.5 Current transformers (CT's)

NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.

3.5.1 Use of a Core CT for earth faults.

If a core CT is used to detect earth faults, prior to any test, the user must check the following points :

1. MV or HV cable screens and core CT,

2. No current flow through the MV or HV cables,

3. Orientation of the core CT (P1-S1, P2-S2).

!


3.5.1.1 Cable shields and core CT

When mounting a core CT around electric cables, check the connection to the earth of the cable shields. It is vital that the earth cable of the shield moves in the opposite direction through the core CT. This cancel the currents carried by the cable shields through the core CT.

S1

S2

P1

P2

Electrical cables directedto the busbar Screen shields

Other endsof electrical cables

FIGURE 1: SCREEN SHIELDS AND CT CORE

3.5.1.2 Induced current flow through electric cables

When an electric line is earthed at its two ends for logging purposes, induced current may circulate if a second line is in parallel. This current can be read on the MiCOM P124 and produce false readings.

P124with CT core

Busbar 2Busbar 1

Earthing 1 Earthing 2

Circuit Breaker 1 Circuit breaker 2Electrical line

FIGURE 2: LOGGING OF AN ELECTRICAL LINE.


3.5.1.3 Core CT polarity

It is necessary to check the polarity of the core CT by following the figure below :

Momentarily connect the battery + to P1 and to P2. The centre zero ammeter connected with + to S1 and to S2 will deflect in the positive direction if the wiring is correct.

CT phase may be tested using the same method.

+P1

P2

S1

S2

+mA

_

_

FIGURE 3: CORE CT ORIENTATION TEST

NOTA : De-magnetise the CT after polarity test. Inject an ac current starting from zero and increase to slowly exceed the CT nominal value and then decrease slowly to zero.

3.6 Auxiliary supply (Dual-powered model only)

Check the value of the auxiliary supply voltage (terminals 33 and 34). The value measured shall be between 0.8 and 1.2 time the nominal auxiliary supply voltage indicated on the MiCOM P124.

Uaux range (Volts)

Uaux nominal zone (Volts)

Maximum peak value (Volts)

24 60 Vdc 19 72 Vcc 80

48 150 Vdc 38 180 Vcc 201

130 250 Vdc/ 100-250Vca 104 300 Vdc/ 80-300 Vca 336.


3.7 Logic inputs (Dual-powered model only)

This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The MiCOM P124 dual-powered relays have 5 opto-isolated inputs.

Energise the opto inputs one by one, and check in the OP. PARAMETERS menu and Input status sub-menu the status of each input. « 1 » indicates that the input is energised, « 0 » indicates that the input is not energised.

Input OP. PARAMETERS/Inputs Status. cell value 54321

Opto input 1 9-11 Terminals 00001

Opto input 2 13-15 Terminals

00010


Opto input 4 21-23 Terminals

01000


3.8 Logic outputs (Dual-powered model only)

This test checks that all outputs operate correctly.

The MiCOM P124 dual-powered relays have 7 outputs :

One watchdog relay (RL0) which output is a change-over contact (35-36 normally closed, 36-37 normally open).

The other relays, RL1 to RL6, are programmable, change-over, types.

Each contact is a dry contact and can therefore be powered by an independent source.

Energise the output relays in turn and check in the OP PARAMETERS menu and Relay status sub-menu the status of the output relays. « 1 » indicates that the relay is energised, « 0 » indicates that the relay is not energised.

Output OP. PARAMETERS/Relay Status. cell value : 654321

RL 1 000001

RL 2 000010

RL 3 000100

RL 4 001000

RL 5 010000

RL 6 100000

WARNING: THE TRIP OUTPUT RELAY CAN BE PROGRAMMED FOR FAIL-SAFE OPERATION


3.9 Logic outputs (Self-powered version )

This test checks that all outputs operate correctly.

The MiCOM P124 self-powered relays have 2 outputs :

One watchdog relay (RL0) which output is a change-over contact (35-36 normally closed, 36-37 normally open).

Another relay (RL1) is used to trip the circuit breaker coil. Its output contact is a change-over type.

Each contact is a dry contact and can therefore be powered by an independent source.

Energise the RL1 trip relay and check its status in the OP. PARAMETERS menu and Relay status sub-menu. « 1 » indicates that the relay is energised, « 0 » indicates that the relay is not energised.

Output OP. PARAMETERS/Relay status. cell value : 1

RL 1 0

3.10 RS 485 rear communication (Dual-powered model only)

This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location and will vary depending on the communication protocol being adopted (refer to label under the upper flap).

It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the remote location, just the relay's rear communication port and any protocol converter necessary.

Connect a laptop PC to the RS485 rear port (via a KITZ for Courier communication) and check the communication with the appropriate command.

If you encounter any problems, please refer to the « Maintenance » chapter.


4. COMMISSIONING

The various operations for commissioning the MiCOM relays described in this chapter are not extensive : it is only necessary to verify that the application-specific software settings applied to the relay are correct.

Using a PC support software MiCOM S1 connected to the RS 485 rear port (dual-powered model only) or to the RS 232 front port is not compulsory. The various indications associated to each commissioning module are described for the operator interface on the P124 front panels.

The commissioning is following the points below :

1. Logging of the settings

2. Validation of the measurements

3. Validation of the thresholds and associated timers.

4.1 Settings

Carry forward the settings on the commissioning test sheets.

4.2 Measurements

The MiCOM P124 relays measure phase and earth currents as a True RMS value up to the 10th

harmonics. The value(s) indicated take account of the phase and/or earth CT ratio.

WARNING : THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS HAVE 1 OR 5 AMP CURRENT INPUTS.CHECK THAT THE INJECTED CURRENT IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE SELECTED RANGE.

To measure the earth channel, the current will be injected via a phase channel in order to power the relay through that phase channel. This way, by injecting the earth current through terminals 48 and 47, the earth self-power transformer of the relay is avoided and the burden on the test equipment lowered.

4.2.1 MiCOM P124 Self-powered

⇒ Note the select phase and earth CTs ratio.

⇒ Inject on each current input (according to the external connection diagram given in Appendix 1) a current higher than the minimum specified current level (0,2 In) and check on the LCD display the corresponding current value.

⇒ Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied values and relay values displayed).

4.2.2 MiCOM P124 Dual-powered

⇒ Note the select phase and earth CTs ratio.

⇒ Energise the MiCOM P124 relay.

⇒ Inject on each current input (according to the external connection diagram given in Appendix 1) a current higher than the minimum specified current level (0,2 In) and check on the LCD display the corresponding current value.

⇒ Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied values and relay values displayed).


4.3 Phase overcurrent (I> and I>>)

Assign the various thresholds to the trip contact and therefore to the striker output (see User Guide, AUTOMAT.CTRL/Trip command menu)

4.3.1 Test wiring diagram

This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the I> and I>> thresholds.

The diagram describes current injection onto the phase current inputs (terminals 49- 50, 51-52, 53-54).

MiCOMP124

33

34

Case earth29

-

RS 485 communication port31

32

+

-

30*

Watchdog

246

RL1 Trip output

INJECTIONTEST SET

CURRENT

N

A

AUXILIARYSUPPLY

+Uaux-Uaux

TIMER Stop

49

5051

5253

541 ou 5 A

1 ou 5 A

1 ou 5A

Dual-poweredModel only

363537

+

_3941

Striker

Striker output

FIGURE 4: I> AND I>> TESTS WIRING


4.3.2 MiCOM settings

Protection Menu

Ie> YES

Ie> 1 In

tIe> DMT or IDMT or RI

tIe> (if DMT) 20 s

Type of curve (if IDMT) IEC VI or IEEE VI

TMS value (if IDMT) 1

K value (if RI) 1

Ie>> YES

Ie>> 12 In

tIe>> 10 s

AUTOMAT.CTRL/Trip command Menu

TRIP tIe> YES

TRIP tIe>> YES

4.3.3 I> threshold with DMT tI>

Values to be recorded :

1. I> threshold for each phase

2. Time delay tI> for each phase.

I> threshold check :

1. If the time delay tI> is short, gradually increase the injection current up to the value of the I> threshold.

2. If the time delay tI> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no tripping. Then inject 1,1 x I threshold and check the trip.

3. Gradually decreases the injected current and record the value of the drop outI > threshold.


Checks :

1. Alarm message on the LCD display.

2. Alarm LED flashes (Dual-powered model only)

3. Trip LED on (Dual-powered model only)

4. The magnetic "Trip" flag's state changes.

5. I> threshold LED on (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only).

6. The state of the magnetic flag assigned to that I> threshold changes (if it has been set and only for the dual-powered).

7. I> threshold output closes (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only).

8. The trip contact (RL1) operates on expiry of the time delay.

9. The striker output operates on expiry of the time delay.

tI> time delay check :

1. Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by pre- setting the current above the I> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).

2. Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by pre- setting the current above the I> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).

4.3.4 I> threshold with IDMT tI>


1. I> threshold for each phase

2. I>time delay for each phase.

I> threshold check :

Inject a current equal to 2 x I threshold onto one of the phase current inputs. Repeat the operation for various current values (n x I threshold with n ranging from 4 to 10, for example). Check that the values measured correspond to those indicated in the table below (for TMS = 1).

IEC curves

Type of curve Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1

IEC 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold

Nominal Min - Max Nominal Min - Max

STI 1,78 1,62 1,98 0,5 0,45 0,55

SI 10,1 9,1 11,1 3 2,7 3,3

VI 13,5 12,2 14,9 1,5 1,35 1,65

EI 26,7 24 29,5 0,8 0,72 0,88

LTI 120 108 132 13,3 12 14,6.


IEEE/ANSI curves


IEEE/ANSI 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold


STI 0,25 0,22 0,28 0,08 0,07 0,09

MI 3,8 3,4 4,2 1,2 1,08 1,32

I 2,2 1,9 2,4 0,3 0,27 0,33

VI 7,2 6,5 8 0,7 0,63 0,77

EI 9,5 8,5 10,5 0,4 0,36 0,44

RI electromechanical curve

Type of curve Tripping time (in seconds) for K =1

Electromechanical 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold


RI 4,5 4 5 3,2 2,8 3,6

Rectifier curve


Rectifier 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold


RC 966 917 - 1014 0.402 0.382 - 0.422

Laborelec curve

Type of curve Tripping time (in seconds)

Primary zero sequence 1A

Primary zero sequence 40A


Laborelec 1 4 3.80 - 4.20 0.5 0.48 - 0.52

Laborelec 2 4.5 4.22 - 4.73 1 0.96 - 1.04

Laborelec 3 5 4.75 - 5.25 1.5 1.44 - 1.56

For other injected current values, compare the values found with the theoretical values calculated according to the formulae of the curves. Equations of IEC, IEEE/ANSI, RI, RC and Laborelec curves are given in Chapter "Technical data and curves characteristics" of the present Technical Guide.


Checks :

1. Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD.

2. Alarm LED flashes (version dual-powered only).

3. Trip LED on (version dual-powered only).

4. The magnetic iaTriplc flags state changes.

5. I> threshold LED on (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only).

6. The state of the magnetic flag assigned to that I> threshold changes (if it has been set and only for the dual-powered).

7. I> threshold output closes (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only).



4.3.5 I>> threshold


1. l>> threshold for each phase

2. tl>> time delay for each phase

I>> threshold check :

1. If tI>> time delay is short, gradually raise the injection current up to the value of I>> threshold.

2. If tI>> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check there is no trip. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip output is close.

3. Gradually lower the injected current and note the value of the drop out I>> threshold.

Checks :

1. Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD.

2. Alarm LED flashes (version dual-powered only).

3. Trip LED on (version dual-powered only).

4. The magnetic "Trip" flag's state changes.

5. I>> threshold LED on (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only).

6. The state of the magnetic flag assigned to that I>> threshold changes (if it has been set and only for the dual-powered).

7. I>> threshold output closes (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only).




tI>> time delay check :

1. Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by pre-setting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).

2. Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by pre-setting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).

4.4 Final checks

The tests are complete, and before leaving the relay :

For both models, make sure that all alarms and magnetic flags have been reset.

For MiCOM P124 dual-powered models, verify :

• that all the counters in the RECORDS menu, CB Monitoring. Sub-menu are reset.

• that the counters in the MEASUREMENTS menu are reset. .


5. MAINTENANCE

5.1 Equipment failure

MiCOM P124 relays are full digital and permanent self-diagnosing. Any failure of software or hardware elements is instantly detected. As soon as an internal fault is detected, depending on its type (minor or major), an alarm message is displayed as a priority on the front panel LCD before the fault LED is illuminated (fixed or flashing) and the watchdog relay is closed (if the fault is a major one).

An equipment failure (major or minor) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel (using the dedicated tactile button keypad). Only the disappearance of the cause will acknowledge the fault and hence reset the fault LED.

NOTE : any failure detected by the P124 self-powered relay is always a major failure.

5.1.1 Minor fault (Version Dual-powered only)

In case of minor fault the P124 is fully operational. The RL0 watchdog relay is energised (35-36 contact open, 36-37 contact closed).

For the MiCOM P124 dual-powered relays a minor fault is :

1. A communication failure. If the communication is in fault, protection and automation modules are not affected :

Message :

« COMM.ERROR » : Communication fault

Cause :

Hardware or software failure of the communication module

Action :

Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair.

Alternative : If communication is not used, disable communication in the COMMUNICATION menu (Communication ? = No).

2. Failure of the battery-backed memory or of the battery itself :

Message :

« RAM ERROR » (failure of the battery-backed memory)

Cause :

Hardware or software failure

Action :

Check that the battery is correctly positioned and restart the protection software by disconnecting the power supply, if the software fault still remain after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair.

Message :

« BATTERY FAIL » (battery in fault)


Cause :

Hardware failure

Action :

Check that the battery is correctly positioned and restart the protection software by disconnecting the power supply. If the message fault still remains after restart, change the battery. If the fault still remains after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair.

NOTE : it is possible to mask the message "Battery fail" in the Configuration/Alarms/Alarm Battery menu

3. Clock for event stamping in fault

Message :

« CLOCK ERROR »

Cause :


Action :

Restart the software by disconnecting the power supply, if the fault still remains after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair.

5.1.2 Major fault

Major fault for MiCOM P124 relays are dedicated software and hardware failures. As soon as this type of failure is detected, the watchdog (WD) is de-energised (35-36 contact closed, 36-37 contact open) and all operations are stopped (protection, automation, communication for Dual-powered model).

1. Hardware and software faults of the memory components

Messages :

« EEPROM ERROR DATA » or « EEPROM ERROR CALIBR. » (Data zone or Calibration zone in fault)

« CT ERROR » (Analogue channel in fault)

Cause :


Action :

Restart the protection software by disconnecting the power supply, if the software fault still remains after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair.

2. Loss of auxiliary supply (P124 Dual-powered only)

If the trip output relay RL1 is programmed in fail-safe operation and the auxiliary power supply lost, the MiCOM P124 relay is not able to perform the trip of the CB via RL1.

In this case only the HMI is operational if the current load is over the minimum required (0.2 In on at least one phase).

All the protection and automation functions are inhibited.


Messages :

« AUX SUPPLY LOST »

Cause :

RL1 configured with fail-safe operation and the auxiliary power supply is lost.

Action :

Supply the P124 with an auxiliary power supply or configure the trip output relay RL1 in the Configuration/RL1 output relay/Fail-safe relay menu on NO.

5.2 Method of repair

5.2.1 Replacing the active part

The case and the rear terminals blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the MiCOM P124 relay should replacement or repair become necessary without disconnect the scheme wiring.

NOTE : The MiCOM P124 of relays have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close when the active part is removed from the case.

Remove the upper and lower flap without exerting excessive force. Remove the external screws.

Under the upper flap, turn the extractor with a 3 mm screwdriver and extract the active part of the relay by pulling from the upper and lower notches on the front panel of the MiCOM relay.

The reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instruction in reverse, ensuring that no modification has been done on the scheme wiring.

5.2.2 Replacing the complete relay

Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all current supplies to the MiCOM relay and ensure that the relay is no more powered.

To remove the complete relay (active part and case) the entire wiring must be removed from the rear connector.

NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.

Lift the top and bottom flaps and remove the screws which attach the active part to the casing.

Live the top flap of the MiCOM relay, and flip the extractor using a 3mm screwdriver.

Pull the active part.

Remove the screws linking the casing to its environment.

Re-installation of the MiCOM relay and of its case will be done using the reverse procedure.

!


5.2.3 Changing the battery (MiCOM P124 Dual-powered only)

Each MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay has a battery to maintain recording data and the correct time when the auxiliary voltage fails. The data maintained include event, fault and disturbance records and the thermal state at the time failure.

The battery is designed for a life of 10 years in standard atmospheric conditions.

To replace the battery follow the following instructions :

• Open the lower flap on the front of the relay

• Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small screwdriver.

• Ensure that metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease and dust.

• The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the battery holder.

WARNING : ONLY USE A TYPE 1/2AA LITHIUM BATTERY WITH A NOMINAL VOLTAGE OF 3.6 V.

• Ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree with those adjacent to the socket.

5.3 Problem solving

5.3.1 Password lost or not accepted

Problem :

Password lost or not accepted

Cause :

MiCOM P124 relays are supplied with the password set to AAAA.

This password can be changed by the user ( refer OP PARAMETERS menu).

Action :

There is an additional unique recovery password associated to the relay which can be supplied by the factory or service agent, if given details of its serial number (under the upper flap of the front panel). With this serial number, contact your Schneider Electric local dealer or Schneider Electric After Sales Dept.

5.3.2 Communication (version Dual-powered only)

5.3.2.1 Values measured locally and remotely

Problem :

The measurements noted remotely and locally (via RS485 communication) differ.

Cause :

The values accessible on the front face via the Measurement menu are refreshed every second. Those fed back via the communication and accessible by the Schneider Electric Setting software generally have skeletal refreshing frequencies. If the refreshing frequency of the supervision software differs from that of MiCOM P124 relays (1s), there may be a difference between indicated values.


Action :

Adjust the frequency for refreshing the measurements of the supervision software or of the setting software to 1 second.

5.3.2.2 MiCOM relay no longer responds

Problem :

No response from MiCOM P124 relays when asked by the supervision software without any communication fault message.

Cause :

Mainly, this type of problem is linked to an error in the MiCOM P124 communication parameters.

Action :

Check MiCOM P124 communication parameters (data rate, parity, etc.) are in accordance with the supervision settings.

Check MiCOM P124 network address.

Check that this address is not used by another device connected on the same LAN.

Check that the other devices on the same LAN answer to supervision requests.

5.3.2.3 A remote command is not taken in account

Problem :

The communication between the relay and the PC is correct, but the relay does not accept any remote command or file downloading.

Cause :

Generally this is due to the fact that the relay is in programming situation. This means that the password is active.

Action :

Check that the password is not active in the relay since the last 5 minutes.


CHAPTER 8 Communication Database P124 Dual-Powered Relay

Technical Guide P124/EN T08/B44 Communication Database CHAPTER 8 MiCOM P124 Page 1/98

CONTENT

1. INTRODUCTION 5

1.1 Purpose of this document 5

1.2 Glossary 5

2. MODBUS PROTOCOL 6

2.1 Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection 6

2.1.1 Parameters of the MODBUS connection 6

2.1.2 Synchronisation of exchanges messages 7

2.1.3 Message validity check 7

2.1.4 Address of the MiCOM relays 7

2.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays 7

2.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol 8

2.3.1 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM relay 8

2.3.2 Messages validity check 9

2.4 MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay database organisation 10

2.4.1 Description of the application mapping 10

2.4.2 Page 0h : Product information, remote signalling, measurements 12

2.4.3 Page 1h, MiCOM P124 : general remote parameters 15

2.4.4 Page 2h : setting Group 1 19

2.4.5 Page 3h : setting Group 2 22

2.4.6 Page 4h : remote controls 25

2.4.7 Pages 5h/6h 25

2.4.8 Page 7h 25

2.4.9 Page 8h : time synchronisation 25

2.4.10 Mapping access characteristics 26

2.4.11 Pages 9h to 21h : disturbance record data (25 pages). 27

2.4.12 Page 22h : disturbance record index frame 29

2.4.13 Page 35h (addresses 3500h to 354Ah) : event record data (9 words) 30

2.4.14 Page 36h 32

2.4.15 Page 37h : fault record value data 32

2.4.16 Page 3Eh : most older Fault record value data 34

2.4.17 Pages 38h to 3Ch 35

2.4.18 Pages 3Dh : number of disturbance records available 36

2.4.19 Description of the mapping format, MiCOM P124 Dual-powered 38

2.4.20 Disturbance record additional information 46

P124/EN T08/B44 Technical Guide CHAPTER 8 Communication Database Page 2/98 MiCOM P124

2.4.21 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event 47

2.4.22 Request to retrieve a dedicated event 48

2.4.23 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records 48

3. K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE 49

3.1 K-BUS 49

3.1.1 K-Bus transmission layer 49

3.1.2 K-Bus connection 49

3.1.3 Auxiliary equipment 50

3.2 Relay courier database 50

3.2.1 Cell reference 51

3.2.2 List of events created by the relay 77

3.3 Setting changes 79

3.4 Systems integration data 79

3.4.1 Address of the relay 79

3.4.2 Measured values 79

3.4.3 Status word 80

3.4.4 Unit status word 80

3.4.5 Control status word 80

3.4.6 Measurement control 80

3.4.7 Change of remote measurements 81

3.5 Event extraction 81

3.5.1 Automatic event extraction 81

3.5.2 Event types 81

3.5.3 Event format 82

3.5.4 Manual record extraction 82

3.6 Disturbance record extraction 82

4. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE 83

4.1 Physical connection and link layer 83

4.2 Initialisation 83

4.3 Time synchronisation 84

4.4 Spontaneous events 84

4.5 General interrogation 84

4.6 Cyclic measurements 84

4.7 Commands 84

4.8 Disturbance records 84

4.9 Blocking of monitor direction 85

4.10 List of events produced by the relay 85


5. DNP 3.0 CONFIGURATION/INTEROPERABILITY GUIDE 87

5.1 Introduction 87

5.2 DNP V3.00 device profile 87

5.3 Implementation table 90

5.4 Point List 93

5.4.1 Binary Input Points 93

5.4.2 Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks 96

5.4.3 Counters 97

5.4.4 Analog Inputs 98


BLANK PAGE


1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 Purpose of this document

This document describes the characteristics of the different communication protocol of MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay.

The available communication protocols of MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay are as follows:

• MODBUS.

• K-BUS/Courier.

• IEC 60870-5-103.

• DNP3

1.2 Glossary

Ir, Is, It : currents measured on the concerned phases (r, s, t)

IE : residual current measured by earth input (= 3.I zero sequence)

pf : soft weight of a word of 16 bits

PF : heavy weight of a word of 16 bits.


2. MODBUS PROTOCOL

MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay can communicate by a RS 485 link behind the unit following the MODBUS RTU protocol.

2.1 Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection

2.1.1 Parameters of the MODBUS connection

The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows :

• Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz),

• MODBUS line protocol in RTU mode

• Communication speed can be configured by an operator dialog in the front panel of the relay :

Baud rate

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

38400

− Transmission mode of the configured characters by operator dialog

Mode

1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop : total 10 bits

1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits

1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits




1 start / 7 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 10 bits

1 start / 7 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 10 bits


1 start / 7 bits / 2 stop : total 10 bits.


2.1.2 Synchronisation of exchanges messages

All character received after a silence on the line with more or equal to a transmission time of 3 characters is considered as a firm start.

2.1.3 Message validity check

The frame validity is working with a cyclical redundancy code CRC with 16 bits. The generator polynomial is:

1 + x² + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h

2.1.4 Address of the MiCOM relays

The address of the MiCOM relay on a same MODBUS network is situated between 1 and 255. The address 0 is reserved for the broadcast messages

2.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays

The MODBUS functions implemented on the MiCOM relays are :

Function 1 or 2 : Reading of n bits

Function 3 or 4 : Reading of n words

Function 5 : Writing of 1 bit

Function 6 : Writing of 1 word

Function 7 : Fast reading of 8 bits

Function 8 : Reading of the diagnostics counter

Function 11 : Reading of the Event counter

Function 15: Writing of n bits

Function 16 : Writing of n words


2.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol

Master slave protocol, all exchange understands a master query and a slave response

Frame size received from MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay

Frame transmitted by the master ( query) :

Slave number

Function code

Information CRC1 6

1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes

0 à FFh 1 à 10h

Slave number:

The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.

A frame transmitted with a slave number 0 is globally addressed to all pieces of equipment (broadcast frame )

Function code:

Requested MODBUS function (1 to 16)

Information:

Contains the parameters of the selected function.

CRC16:

Value of the CRC16 calculated by the master.

Note: the MiCOM relay does not respond to globally broadcast frames sent out by the master.

2.3.1 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM relay

Frame sent by the MiCOM relay ( response)

Slave number

Function code

Data CRC16

1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes

1 à FFh 1 à 10h

Slave number :


Function code :

Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16) .

Data :

Contains reply data to master query .

CRC 16:

Value of the CRC 16 calculated by the slave.


2.3.2 Messages validity check

When MiCOM P124 relay receive a master query, it validates the frame :

• If the CRC is false, the frame is invalid. MiCOM P124 relay do not reply to the query. The master must retransmit its query. Excepting a broadcast message, this is the only case of non-reply by MiCOM P124 relay to a master query.

• If the CRC is good but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sends an exception response.

Warning frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response)

Slave number Function code Warning code CRC16

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes

1 to FFh 81h or 83h or 8Ah or 8Bh pf ... PF

Slave number :


Function code :

The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the warning frame is the code in which the most significant bit (b7) is forced to 1.

Warning code :

On the 8 warning codes of the MODBUS protocol, the MiCOM relay manages two of them :

• code 01 : function code unauthorised or unknown.

• code 03 : a value in the data field is unauthorised ( incorrect data ).

Control of pages being read

Control of pages being written

Control of addresses in pages

Length of request messages

CRC16:

Value of the CRC16 calculated by the slave.


2.4 MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay database organisation

2.4.1 Description of the application mapping

2.4.1.1 Settings

MiCOM P123 application mapping has 9 pages of parameters.

Page 0h: Product information, remote signalling, measurements

Page 1h: General remote parameters

Page 2h: Setting group 1 remote parameters

Page 3h: Setting group 2 remote parameters

Page 4h: Remote controls

Pages 5h/6h: Reserved pages

Pages 7h: Quick reading byte

Pages 8h: Time synchronisation

2.4.1.2 Disturbance records

Before uploading any disturbance record, a service request must be send to select the record number to be uploaded.

The answer following this request contain the following information:

1. Numbers of samples (pre and post time)

2. Phase CT ratio

3. Earth CT ratio

4. Internal phase and earth ratios

5. Number of the last disturbance mapping page

6. Number of samples in this last disturbance mapping page

The mapping pages used for this service request are from 38h to 3Ch.

Pages 9h to 21h : Contain the disturbance data (25 pages)

A disturbance mapping page contains 250 words:

0900 à 09FAh : 250 disturbance data words 0A00 à 0AFAh : 250 disturbance data words 0B00 à 0BFAh : 250 disturbance data words

...... 2100 à 21FAh : 250 disturbance data words

The disturbance data pages contain the sample of a single channel from a record.

Page 22h : contains the index of the disturbance

Page 38h à 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and channel

Page 3Dh : A dedicated request allows to know the number of disturbance records stored in SRAM.


2.4.1.3 Event records

To upload the event records two requests are allowed:

Page 35h: Request to upload an event record without acknowledge of this event.

Used addresses:

3500h : EVENT 1

..... 354Ah : EVENT 75

Page 36h: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored event record.

Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or manual acknowledgement

The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of telecommand word (address 400 h).

If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is automatic.

In automatic mode, the reading of the event acknowledges the event.

In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the oldest event

(set the bit 13 of control word 400 h )

2.4.1.4 Fault records

Page 37h: Page dedicated to upload fault record

Used addresses:

3700h : FAULT 1 3701h : FAULT 2

..... 3704h : FAULT 5

Page 3Eh: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored fault record.

Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or manual acknowledgement

The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of telecommand word (address 400 h).

If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is automatic.

In automatic mode, the reading of the fault acknowledges automatically the event.

In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the oldest fault.

(set the bit 14 of control word 400 h )

2.4.1.5 Characteristics

Page 0h can only be read through communication.

Pages 1h, 2h, 3h and 4h can be read and write.

Page 7h can be access in quick reading only.

Page 8h can be write.

They are describe more precisely in the following chapters.


2.4.2 Page 0h : Product information, remote signalling, measurements

Read access only

Address Group Description Values range

Step Unit Format Fault Value

0000 Product Information

Relay description characters 1 and 2

32-127 1 - F10

0001 Relay description characters 3 and 4

32-127 1 - F10 P1

0002 Relay description characters 5 and 6

32-127 1 - F10 24

0003 Unit reference characters 1 and 2

32-127 1 - F10 AL

0004 Unit reference characters 3 and 4

32-127 1 - F10 ST

0005 Software version 10-xx 1 - F21

0006 Front communication 0-1 1 - F41

0007 Internal phase ratio - F1

0008 Internal earth ratio - F1

0009 to 000B

Reserved

000C Active Group 1-2 1 - F1

000D Electromechani-cal

Flag status 0 to FF 2n - F52

000E Password active - F24

000F Relay status - F45

0010 Remote signalling

Logical inputs 0 to 31 1 - F12

0011 Logical data 0 to FFFF 2n - F20

0012 Internal Logic 0 to FFFF 2n - F22

0013 Output contacts 0 to 511 1 - F13

0014 Output information: I> 0 to FFFF 1 - F17

0015 Output information: I>> 0 to FFFF 1 - F17

0016 Output information: I>>>

0 to FFFF 1 - F17

0017 Output information: IE> 0 to FFFF 1 - F16

0018 Output information: IE>> 0 to FFFF 1 - F16

0019 Output information: IE>>>

0 to FFFF 1 - F16

001A I> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 - F17

001B I>> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 - F17

001C I>>> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 - F17

001D tI> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 - F17

001E tI>> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 - F17


Address Group Description Values range Step Unit Format Fault

Value

001F tI>>> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 - F17

0020 Thermal state information 0 to 3 1 - F37

0021 Output information: I< 0 to FFFF 1 - F17

0022 Output information: I2> 0 to FFFF 1 - F16

0023 Output information: broken conductor / CB failure / CB alarm

0 to FFFF 1 - F38

0024 tI< memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 - F17

0025 Memorised flag for non acknowledge alarms

- F36

0026 Number of disturbance records available

0 to 5 1 - F31

0027 Tripping output (RL1) status 0 to 1 1 - F1

0028 CB supervision flag - F43

0029 Non acknowledge alarm memorised flag 2

- F44

002A to 002F

Reserved

0030 Remote measurements

Phase A current RMS value 0 to 600 000

1 A/100 F18

0032 Phase B current RMS value 0 to 600 000

1 A/100 F18

0034 Phase C current RMS value

0 to 600 000

1 A/100 F18

0036 Earth current RMS value 0 to 120 000

1 A/100 F18

0038-0039 Reserved

003A Thermal state % F1

003B Frequency 4500 to 6500

1 1/100 Hz

F1

003C Phase A current peak RMS value

0 to 600 000

1 A/100 F18

003E Phase B current peak RMS value

0 to 600 000

1 A/100 F18

0040 Phase C current peak RMS value

0 to 600 000

1 A/100 F18

0042 Phase A current rolling RMS value

0 to 600 000

1 A/100 F18

0044 Phase B current rolling RMS value

0 to 600 000

1 A/100 F18.

0046 Phase C current rolling RMS value

0 to 600 000

1 A/100 F18



Value

0048 Io harmonique 0 to 600 000

1 A/100 F18

004A I2 1 A/100 F18

004C Positive phase sequence current value (fundamental)

1 A/100 F18

004E Ratio I2/I1 1 % F1

004F Trip number 0 to 65535 1 - F1

0050 Fourier Module Module IA - F1

0051 Module IB - F1

0052 Module IC - F1

0053 Module IE - F1

0054 Fourier Argument

Argument IA - F1

0055 Argument IB - F1

0056 Argument IC - F1

0057 Argument IE - F1

0058 Module I2 - F1

0059 Module I1 - F1

005A Recloser statistics

Cycle total number - F1

005B Cycle 1 number - F1

005C Cycle 2 number - F1

005D Cycle 3 number - F1

005E Cycle 4 number - F1

005F Definitive tripping number

- F1

0060 Closing order number - F1

0061 to 006F

Reserved.


2.4.3 Page 1h, MiCOM P124 : general remote parameters

Read and write access



0100 Remote parameters

Address 1 to 255 1 - F1 1

0101 Reserved

0102 Password characters 1 and 2

32 -127 1 - F10 AA

0103 Password characters 3 and 4

32 -127 1 - F10 AA

0104 Frequency 50-60 10 Hz F1 50

0105 Phase A label L1-A-R VTA - F25 A

0106 Phase B label L2-B-S VTA - F25 B

0107 Phase C label L3-C-T VTA - F25 C

0108 Earth label N-G-E VTA - F25 N

0109 Fault display 1-4 1 - F26 1

010A User reference (characters 1 and 2)

32-127 1 F10 AL

010B User reference (characters 3 and 4)

32-127 1 F10 ST

010C Fault number to display 1-5 1 F31 5

010D Inputs operation 0-31 1 - F12 0

010E to 010F

Reserved

0110 CB monitoring measurements

Operation number 1 - F1

0111 CB Operating time 1/100 s F1

0112 Switched square Amps phase A sum

An F18

0114 Switched square Amps phase B sum

An F18

0116 Switched square Amps phase C sum

An F18

0118 CB Closing time 1/100 s F1

0119 to 011E

Reserved

011F Latch relay 0-31 1 - F14 0

0120 Ratio Primary phase CT value 1 to 9999*

1 - F1 1000

0121 Reserved

0122 Primary earth CT value 1 to 9999

1 - F1 1000



Value

0123 to 012F

Reserved.

0130 Communication Speed 0 to 7 1 - F4 6 = 19200 bds

0131 Parity 0 to 2 1 - F5 0 = without

0132 Data bits 0 to 1 1 - F28 1 = 8 bits

0133 Stop bit 0 to 1 1 - F29 0 = 1 stop bit

0134 COM available 0 to 1 1 - F30 1=COM available

0135 Format datation 0-1 1 - F54 0=private

0136 to 013F

Reserved

0140 Configuration Setting group 1 to 2 1 - F1 1

0141 Alarm self-reset enable

0142 Active group change 0-1 1 - F55 1

0143 Battery alarm and RAM alarm displayed

0-1 1 - F1 0

0144 RL1 fail-safe operation 0-1 1 - F1 0

0145 to 014F

Reserved

0150 LEDs allocation Led 5 1 - F19 4

0151 Led 6 1 - F19 16

0152 Led 7 1 - F19 32

0153 Led 8 1 F19 64

0154 Led PF 5 1 F19' 0

0155 Led PF 6 1 F19' 0

0156 Led PF 7 1 F19' 0

0157 Led PF 8 1 F19' 0

0158 to 015A

Reserved

015B Logic input allocation

Logic input 1 next VTA - - F15'

015C Logic input 2 next VTA - - F15'

015E Logic input 3 next VTA - - F15'

015F Logic input 4 next VTA - - F15'

0160 Logic input allocation

Logic input 1 VTA - F15 0

0161 Logic input 2 VTA - F15 0






Value

0165 Output relay allocation

Broken conductor detection

0-31 1 - F14 0

0166 CB failure 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

0167 I< 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

0168 I2> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

0169 Thermal overload alarm 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

016A Thermal overload trip 0-31 1 - F14 0

016B CB close 0-31 1 - F14 0

016C tAUX1 0-31 1 - F14 0

016D tAUX2 0-31 1 - F14 0

016E CB alarms 0-31 1 - F14 0

016F Trip circuit 0-31 1 - F14 0

0170 Active group 0-31 1 - F14 0

0171 Trip 0 - 31 1 - F14 1

0172 tI> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

0173 tI>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

0174 tI>>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

0175 tIE > 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

0176 tIE >> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

0177 tIE >>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

0178 I> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

0179 I>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

017A I>>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

017B IE > 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

017C IE >> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

017D IE >>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

017E Recloser running 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

017F Recloser final trip 0 - 31 1 - F14 0

0180 Automation Trip 0 to 63 1 - F6 1

0181 Relay latching 0 to 63 1 - F8 0

0182 Blocking logic 1 0 to 63 1 - F8' 0

0183 Blocking logic 2 0 to 63 1 - F8' 0

0184 Broken conductor detection

0 - 1 1 - F24 0

0185 tBC 0 to 14400 1 - F1 0

0186 Cold load start 0 - 1 1 - F24 0

0187 Cold load start thresholds 0 to 255 1 - F33 0

0188 Cold load start % 20 to 500 1 % F1 50

0189 Cold load start delay 1 to 36000 1 1/10 s F1 10



Value

018A CB failure 0 - 1 1 F24 0

018B tBF 0 to 1000 1 1/100 s F1 10

018C Selective scheme logic 1 0 to 15 1 F40 0

018D tSEL1 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 0

018E Selective scheme logic 2 0 to 15 1 - F40 0

018F tSEL2 0 to 15000

1 1/100 s F1 0

0190 Disturbance Pre-time 1 to 30 1 - F1 1

0191 Post-time 1 to 30 1 - F1 1

0192 Disturbance starting condition

0 - 1 1 - F32 0

0193 CB monitoring Operating time 0 - 1 1 - F24 0

0194 Operating time threshold

5 to 100 5 1/100 s F1 5

0195 Operation number 0 - 1 1 - F24 0

0196 Operation number threshold

0 - 50000 1 - F1 0

0197 CB switched Amps sum 0 - 1 1 - F24 0

0198 CB switched Amps sum threshold

0 to 4000

10 E 6 A n F3

0199 Amps or square Amps 1 - 2 1 F1' 1

019A Closing time threshold 5 to 100 5 1/100 s F8' 0

019B Auxiliary timer 1 0 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 0

019C Auxiliary timer 2 0 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 0

019D Peak value 5 to 60 VTA mn F42 5

019E I2/I1 threshold 20 to 100 1 % F1 20

019F Tripping time 10 to 500 5 1/100 s F1 10

01A0 Closing time 10 to 500 5 1/100 s F1 10

01A1 Closing time threshold validation

0 - 1 1 F24 0

01A2 Trip circuit supervision validation

0 - 1 1 F24 0

01A3 t SUP* 10 to 1000

5 1/100 s F1 10

01A4 I<thershold for CB fail function

2 to 100 1 1/100 F1 2

01A5 Instantaneous I>blocking if CB fail

0 - 1 1 - F24 0

01A6 Instantaneous le>blocking if CB fail

0 - 1 1 - F24 0

01A7 to 1AF

Reserved.


2.4.4 Page 2h : setting Group 1

Access in reading and in writing



0200 Setting group 1 I> 0-1 1 - F24 0

0201 I> threshold 10 to 400 1 In/100 F1 10

0202 I> time delay type 0 to 2 1 - F27 0

0203 I> IDMT Curve Type 0 to 10 1 - F3 1

0204 I> TMS value 25 to 1500

25 1/1000 F1 25

0205 I> K value (RI curve) 100 to 10000

5 1/1000 F1 100

0206 tI> value 0 to 18000

1 1/100 s F1 4

0207 I> Reset type 0 1 1 F27 0

0208 I> RTMS value 25 to 3200 25 1/1000 F1 25

0209 I> tRESET value 4 to 10000

1 1/100 s F1 4

020A to 020F

Reserved 0

0210 I>> 0-1 1 - F24 0

0211 I>> value 50 to 4000

5 In/100 F1 50

0212 tI>> value 0 to 18000

1 1/100 s F1 1

0213 to 021F

Reserved 0

0220 I>>> 0-1 1 - F24 0

0221 I>>> value 50 to 4000

5 In/100 F1 50

0222 tI>>> value 0 to 18000

1 1/100 s F1 1

0223 to 022F

Reserved 0

0230 IE> 0-1 1 - F24 0

IE > value sensitive version 10 to 1000 5 1/1000 I0n F1 10

IE > value normal version 10 to 400 1 1/100 I0n F1 10

0231

IE > value very sensitive version

2 to 1000 1 1/1000 I0n F1 2

0232 IE > time delay type 0 to 3 1 - F27 0

0233 IE > IDMT curve type 0 to 10 1 - F3 1

0234 IE > TMS value 25 to 1500

25 1/1000 F1 25




0235 IE > K value (RI curve) 100 to 10000

5 1/1000 F1 100

0236 TiE > value 0 to 18000

1 1/100 s F1 4

0237 IE > reset type 0 1 1 F27 0

0238 IE > RTMS value 25 to 3200

25 1/1000 F1 25

0239 IE > Treset value 4 to 10000

1 1/100 s F1 4

023A Laborelec curve 0 to 2 1 F3 0

023B to 023F

Reserved 0

0240 IE >> 0-1 1 - F24 0

0241 IE >> value 10 to 8000

5 1/1000 I0n

F1 10

0242 t IE >> value 0 to 18000

1 1/100 s F1 1

0243 to 024F

Reserved 0

0250 IE >>> 0-1 1 - F24 0

0251 IE >>> value 10 to 8000

5 1/1000 I0n

F1 10

0252 tIE >>>value 0 to 18000

1 1/100 s F1 1

0253 Ith> 0 1 1 F24 0

0254 Ith> value 10 to 320 5 1/100 F1 8

0255 Ith> k value 100 to 150

1 1/100 F1 105

0256 Ith> trip threshold 50 to 200 1 % F1 100

0257 Ith> alarm 0 1 1 F24 0

0258 Ith> alarm threshold 50 to 200 1 % F1 90

0259 Thermal overload time constant

1 to 200 1 mn F1 1

025A I< 0-1 1 - F24 0

025B I< threshold 0 to 100 1 % In F1 20

025C I2> 0-1 1 - F24 0

025D I2> threshold 10 to 4000

1 In/100 F1 10

025E I2> time delay type 0 to 2 1 - F27 0

025F I2> IDMT type 0 to 9 1 - F3 1

0260 2> TMS value 25 to 1500

25 1/1000 F1 25




0261 I2> K value (RI) 100 to 10000

5 1/1000 F1 100

0262 tI2> value 0 to 15000

1 1/100 s F1 4

0263 I2> Reset type 0 - 1 1 F27 0

0264 I2> RTMS value 25 to 3200

25 1/1000 F1 25

0265 I2> tRESET value 4 to 10000

1 1/100 s F1 4

0266 to 026E

Reserved

026F tI< value 0 to 18000 1 1/100 s F1 0

0270 Recloser valid 0 - 1 1 F24 0

0271 CB position active 0 - 1 1 F1 0

0272-0273 Supervision window 1 to 60000

1 1/100 s F18 1

0274 External blocking input 0 - 1 1 F24 0

0275-0276 Reserved

0277 Dead time 1 0 to 30000

1 1/100 s F1 1

0278 Dead time 2 0 to 30000

1 1/100 s F1 1

0279-027A Dead time 3 0 to 60000

1 1/100 s F18 1

027B-027C

Dead time 4 0 to 60000

1 1/100 s F18 1

027D-027 Reclaim time 2 to 60000

1 1/100 s F18 2

027F-0280 Inhibit time 2 to 60000

1 1/100 s F18 2

0281 Recloser cycles for phase faults

0 to 4 1 F1 0

0282 Recloser cycles for earth faults

0 to 4 1 F1 0

0283 t I> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111

0284 t I>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111

0285 t I>>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111

0286 t Ie> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111

0287 t Ie>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111

0288 t Ie>>> cycles configuration

0 to 2222 1 F49 1111

0289 t Aux1 cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111

028A t Aux2 cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111


2.4.5 Page 3h : setting Group 2

Access in reading and in writing



0300 Setting group 2 I> 0-1 1 - F24 0

0301 I> threshold 10 to 2500

1 In/100 F1 10

0302 I> time delay type 0 to 2 1 - F27 0

0303 I> IDMT Curve Type 0 to 10 1 - F3 1

0304 I> TMS value 25 to 1500

25 1/1000 F1 25

0305 I> K value (RI curve) 100 to 10000

5 1/1000 F1 100

0306 Ti> value 0 to 15000

1 1/100 s F1 4

0307 I> Reset type 0 1 1 F27 0

0308 I> RTMS value 0 to 15000

25 1/1000 F1 25

0309 I> Treset value 4 to 10000

1 1/1000 F1 4

030A to 030F

Reserved 0

0310 I>> 0-1 1 - F24 0

0311 I>> value 50 to 4000

5 In/100 F1 50

0312 Ti>> value 0 to 15000

1 1/100 s F1 1

0313 to 031F

Reserved 0

0320 I>>> 0-1 1 - F24 0

0321 I>>> value 50 to 4000

5 In/100 F1 50

0322 Ti>>> value 0 to 15000

1 1/100 s F1 1

0323 to 032F

Reserved 0

0330 IE > 0-1 1 - F24 0

IE > value sensitive version 10 to 1000 5 1/1000 I0n F1 10

IE > value normal version 10 to 400 1 1/100 I0n F1 10

0331

IE > value very sensitive version

2 to 1000 1 1/1000 I0n F1 2

0332 IE > time delay type 0 to 3 1 - F27 0

0333 IE > IDMT curve type 0 to 10 1 - F3 1

0334 IE > TMS value 25 to 1500

25 1/1000 F1 25



Value

0335 IE> K value (RI) 100 to 10000

5 1/1000 F1 100

0336 TiE > value 0 to 18000

1 1/100 s F1 4

0337 IE > reset type 0 1 1 F27 0

0338 IE > RTMS value 25 to 3200

25 1/1000 F1 25 25

0339 IE > Treset value 4 to 10000

1 1/100 s F1 4

033A Laborelec curve 0 to 2 1 F3 0

033B to 033F

Reserved 0

0340 IE >> 0-1 1 - F24 0

0341 IE >> value 10 to 8000

5 1/1000 I0n

F1 10

0342 tIE >> value 0 to 18000

1 1/100 s F1 1

0343 to 034F

Reserved 0

0350 IE >>> 0-1 1 - F24 0

0351 IE >>> value 10 to 8000

5 1/1000 I0n

F1 10

0352 t E >>>value 0 to 18000

1 1/100 s F1 1

0353 Ith> 0 - 1 1 F24 0

0354 Ith> value 10 to 320 5 1/100 F1 8

0355 Ith> k value 100 to 150

1 1/100 F1 105

0356 Ith> trip threshold 50 to 200 1 % F1 100

0357 Ith> alarm 0 1 1 F24 0

0358 Ith> alarm threshold 50 to 200 1 % F1 90

0359 Thermal overload time constant

1 to 200 1 mn F1 1

035A I< 0-1 1 - F24 0

035B I< threshold 0 to 100 1 % In F1 20

035C I2> 0-1 1 - F24 0

035D I2> threshold 10 to 4000

1 In/100 F1 20

035E I2> time delay type 0 to 2 1 - F27 0

035F I2> IDMT type 0 to 9 1 - F3 1

0360 I2> TMS value 25 to 1500

25 1/1000 F1 25



Value

0361 I2> K value (RI) 100 to 10000

5 1/1000 F1 100

0362 tI2> value 0 to 15000

1 1/100 s F1 4

0363 I2> Reset type 0 1 1 F27 0

0364 I2> RTMS value 25 to 3200

25 1/1000 F1 25

0365 I2> tRESET value 4 to 10000

1 1/100 s F1 4

0366 to 036E

Reserved

036F tI< value 0 to 18000 1 1/100 s F1 0

0370 Recloser valid 0 - 1 1 F24 0

0371 CB position active 0 - 1 1 F1 0

0372-0373 Supervision window 1 to 60000

1 1/100 s F18 0

0374 External blocking input 0 - 1 1 F24 0

0375-0376 Reserved

0377 Dead time 1 0 to 30000

1 1/100 s F1 1

0378 Dead time 2 0 to 3000

1 1/100 s F1 1

0379-037A Dead time 3 0 to 60000

1 1/100 s F18 1

037B-037C

Dead time 4 0 to 60000

1 1/100 s F18 1

037D-037E Reclaim time 2 to 60000

1 1/100 s F18 2

037F-0380 Inhibit time 2 to 60000

1 1/100 s F18 2

0381 Recloser cycles for phase faults

0 to 4 1 F1 0

0382 Recloser cycles for earth faults

0 to 4 1 F1 0

0383 t I> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111

0384 t I>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111

0385 t I>>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111

0386 t Ie> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111

0387 t Ie>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111

0388 t Ie>>> cycles configuration

0 to 2222 1 F49 1111

0389 t Aux1 cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111

038A t Aux2 cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111


2.4.6 Page 4h : remote controls

Access in writing



0400 Remote control Remote control word 1 0 to 31 1 - F9 0

0401 Reserved

0402 Remote control word 2 (single output command)

0 to 127 1 - F39 0

0403 Remote control word 3 0 to 1 1 - F46 0

2.4.7 Pages 5h/6h

These pages are reserved

2.4.8 Page 7h

Access in quick reading only (MODBUS 07 function)



0700 Quick reading byte

Relay status description 1 - F23 0

2.4.9 Page 8h : time synchronisation

Access in writing for n words (function 16). The time synchronisation format is based on 8 bits (4 words).

Timer @page Nb bits Values range Unit

Year pF+pf 8 2 year

Month 8 1 1 - 12 month

Day 8 1 1 31 day

Hour 8 1 0 - 23 hour

Minute 8 1 0 59 minute

Millisecond pF+pf 8 2 0 59999 ms


2.4.10 Mapping access characteristics

• Description of accessible addresses in reading of words (function 03 and 04).

PAGE 00h PAGE 01h PAGE 02h 0000h to 0060h 0100h to 01AFh 0200h to 027F

PAGE 03h PAGE 05h 0300h to 037Fh 0500h to 052Ah

• Definition of accessible addresses in writing of 1 word (function 06).

PAGE 01h PAGE 02h PAGE 03h 0100h to 01AFh 0200h to 027Fh 0300h to 037Fh

PAGE 04h PAGE 05h 0400h to 0402h 0500h to 052Ah

• Definition of accessible addresses in writing of n words (function 16).

PAGE 01h PAGE 02h PAGE 03h 0100h to 01AFh 0200h to 027Fh 0300h to 037Fh

PAGE 05h PAGE 08h 0500h to 052Ah 0800h to 0803h

• Definition of accessible addresses in reading of bits (function 01 and 02).

Warning:

The bits number must not be higher than 16. Addresses are given in bit addresses.

PAGE 00h PAGE 01h 0100h to 0250h 1500h to 1830h

• Definition of accessible addresses in writing of 1 bit (function 05).

Warning:

The bits number must not be higher than 16.

PAGE 04h 4000h to 400Bh

• Definition of accessible addresses in writing of n bits (function 15).

Warning :

The bits number must not be higher than 16.

PAGE 01h PAGE 04h 1500h to 1830h 4000h to 400Bh.


2.4.11 Pages 9h to 21h : disturbance record data (25 pages).

Access in words writing (function 03)

Each disturbance mapping page contain 250 words.

Address Contents

0900h to 09FAh 250 disturbance data words

0A00h to 0AFAh 250 disturbance data words

0B00h to 0BFAh 250 disturbance data words

0C00h to 0CFAh 250 disturbance data words

0D00h to 0DFAh 250 disturbance data words

0E00h to 0DFAh 250 disturbance data words

0F00h to 0FFAh 250 disturbance data words











1A00h to 1AFAh 250 disturbance data words

1B00h to 1BFAh 250 disturbance data words

1C00h to 1CFAh 250 disturbance data words

1D00h to 1DFAh 250 disturbance data words

1E00h to 1EFAh 250 disturbance data words

1F00h to 1FFAh 250 disturbance data words



NB: The disturbance data pages contain values of one channel from one given disturbance record.


2.4.11.1 Meaning of each value channel

• IA, IB, IC and IE channels:

The value is an signed 16 bits word equivalent to the ADC value

Calculation formula for phase current values

Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. word 10, 11, 12 or 13) * phase primary CT ratio/phase internal CT ratio (mapping address 0007) *√2

Calculation formula for earth current values

The formula depends of nominal earth current :

0.1 to 40 Ion range Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008=800) *√2



• Frequency channel:

Time between two samples in microseconds

• Logic channels:

Logic channel Contents

Bit 0 Trip relay (RL1)

Bit 1 Output relay 2 (RL2)



Bit 4 Watchdog relay (RL0)



Bit 7 to bit 9 Reserved

Bit 10 Logic input 1 (EL1)





Bit 15 Reserved.


2.4.12 Page 22h : disturbance record index frame

Access in word reading (function 03)

Address Contents

2200h Disturbance data index frame

Disturbance record index frame

Word Contents

n° 1 Disturbance record number

n° 2 Disturbance record finish date (second)

n° 3 Disturbance record finish date (second)

n° 4 Disturbance record finish date (millisecond)

n° 5 Disturbance record finish date (millisecond)

n° 6 Disturbance record starting condition :

1 : tripping (RL1)

2 : instantaneous

3 : remote command

4 : logic input

n° 7 Frequency at the post-time beginning


2.4.13 Page 35h (addresses 3500h to 354Ah) : event record data (9 words)

Word n° 1: Event meaning

Word n° 2: MODBUS associated value

Word n° 3: MODBUS address

Word n° 4: Reserved

Words n° 5 & 6: Event date (second) number of seconds since 01/01/94

Words n° 7 & 8: Event date (millisecond)

Word n° 9: Acknowledge 0=event non acknowledged 1= event acknowledged)

Code Meaning of the event Type MODBUS address

00 No event -

01 Remote closing F9 013h

02 Remote tripping F9 013h

03 Disturbance recording start F9

04 Trip output delatch F9 013h

05 Setting change Address

06 Remote thermal reset F9

07 Maintenance Mode F9 ↑↓ 0400h

08 Control relay in maintenance mode F39 ↑↓ 013h

09 I> F17 ↑↓ 014h

10 I>> F17 ↑↓ 015h

11 I>>> F17 ↑↓ 016h

12 IE > F16 ↑↓ 017h

13 IE >> F16 ↑↓ 018h

14 IE >>> F16 ↑↓ 019h

15 Thermal overload alarm F37 ↑↓ 020h

16 Thermal overload threshold F37 ↑↓ 020h

17 tI> F17 ↑↓ 014h

18 tI>> F17 ↑↓ 015h

19 tI>>> F17 ↑↓ 016h

20 TIE > F16 ↑↓ 017h

21 TIE >> F16 ↑↓ 018h

22 tIE >>> F16 ↑↓ 019h

23 tI< F16 ↑↓ 021h

24 Broken conductor F38 ↑↓ 023h

25 t Aux 1 F38 ↑↓ 023h

26 t Aux 2 F38 ↑↓ 023h



27 CB failure F20 ↑↓ 023h

28 Selective scheme logic 1 F20 ↑↓ 011h

29 Selective scheme logic 2 F20 ↑↓ 011h

30 Blocking logic 1 F20 ↑↓ 011h

31 Blocking logic 2 F20 ↑↓ 011h

32 Setting group change F20 011h

33 52a F20 ↑↓ 011h

34 52b F20 ↑↓ 011h

35 Acknowledgement of the output relay latched, by logic input

F20 ↑↓ 011h

36 External CB failure F20 ↑↓ 011h

37 Cold load start F20 ↑↓ 011h

38 Change of input logic state F12 ↑↓ 010h

39 Thermal overload trip F37 013h

40 tI> trip F13 013h

41 tI>> trip F13 013h

42 tI>>> trip F13 013h

43 tIE > trip F13 013h

44 tIE >> trip F13 013h

45 tIE >>> trip F13 013h

46 tI< trip F13 013h

47 Broken conductor trip F13 013h

48 tAUX 1 trip F13 013h

49 tAUX 2 trip F13 013h

50 Output relays command F39 ↑↓ 013h

51 Front panel single alarm acknowledge -

52 Front panel all alarms acknowledge -

53 Remote single alarm acknowledge -

54 Remote all alarms acknowledge -

55 Major material alarm F45 ↑↓ 00Fh

56 Minor material alarm F45 ↑↓ 00Fh

57 I2> F16 ↑↓ 022h

58 tI2> F16 ↑↓ 022h

59 Working time F43 ↑↓ 028h

60 Operation numbers F43 ↑↓ 028h

61 Sum of switched square amps F43 ↑↓ 028h

62 Trip circuit supervision F43 ↑↓ 028h

63 Closing time F43 ↑↓ 028h



64 Reclose successful F43 ↑↓ 028h

65 Recloser locked F43 ↑↓ 028h

66 Recloser settings error F43 ↑↓ 028h

67 I2> trip F13 ↑↓ 013h

NOTA: The double arrow ↑↓ means the event is generated on event occurrence (↑) and on event disappearance (↓).

On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to « 1 ».

On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to « 0 ».

2.4.14 Page 36h

Most older event data


Address Contents

3600h Most older event data

2.4.15 Page 37h : fault record value data


Address Contents

3700h Fault value record n°1






Word n° 1 : Fault number

Words n° 2 & 3 : Fault date (second) number of seconds since 01/01/94

Words n° 4 & 5 : Fault date (millisecond)

Word n° 6 : Fault date (season) 0= winter 1= summer 2= undefined

Word n° 7 : Active setting group during the fault (1 or 2)

Word n° 8 : Fault origin 0= none 1= phase A 2= phase B 3= phase C 4= phases A-B 5= phases A-C 6= phases B-C 7= phases A-B-C 8= earth

Word n° 9: Fault recording starting origin

Fault nature code meaning

Code Fault origin

00 Null event

01 Remote trip

02 Thermal overload trip

03 tI> trip

04 tI>> trip

05 tI>>> trip

06 tlE> trip

07 tlE> trip

08 tlE>> trip

09 tI< trip

10 Broken conductor trip

11 t Aux 1 trip

12 T Aux 2 trip

13 tI2> trip


Word n° 10: Fault value current (nominal value)

Word n° 11: Phase A current value (nominal value)

Word n° 12: Phase B current value (nominal value)

Word n° 13: Phase C current value (nominal value)

Word n° 14: Earth current value (nominal value)

Word n° 15: Acknowledge of fault 0 : fault non-acknowledged 1 : fault acknowledged

2.4.15.1 Calculation formula for phase current values

Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. word 10, 11, 12 or 13) * phase primary CT ratio/ phase internal CT ratio (mapping address 0007)

2.4.15.2 Calculation formula for earth current values

The formula depends of nominal earth current :

0.1 to 40 Ion range Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008=800)



2.4.16 Page 3Eh : most older Fault record value data


Address Contents

3E00h Most older Fault record


2.4.17 Pages 38h to 3Ch

Selection of the disturbance record and channel (11 words are uploaded for each address reading)


Address Disturbance record number Format

3800h 1 IA

3801h 1 IB

3802h 1 IC

3803h 1 IE

3804h 1 Frequency

3805h 1 Logic input and outputs

3900h 2 IA

3901h 2 IB

3902h 2 IC

3903h 2 IE

3904h 2 Frequency

3905h 2 Logic input and outputs

3A00h 3 IA

3A01h 3 IB

3A02h 3 IC

3A03h 3 IE

3A04h 3 Frequency

3A05h 3 Logic input and outputs

3B00h 4 IA

3B01h 4 IB

3B02h 4 IC

3B03h 4 IE

3B04h 4 Frequency

3B05h 4 Logic input and outputs

3C00h 1 IA

3C01h 1 IB

3C02h 1 IC

3C03h 1 IE

3C04h 1 Frequency

3C05h 1 Logic input and outputs


Word n° 1 : Number of samples included in the mapping

Word n° 2 : Sample number in pre-time

Word n° 3 : Sample number in post-time

Word n° 4 : Phase primary CT ratio

Word n° 5 : Phase secondary CT ratio

Word n° 6 : Earth primary CT ratio

Word n° 7 : Earth secondary CT ratio

Word n° 8 : Phase internal CT ratio

Word n° 9 : Earth internal CT ratio

Word n° 10 : Mapping last page number

Word n° 11 : Number of words in the mapping last page

2.4.17.1 Calculation formula for phase current values

Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. adress 3800h, 3801h or 3802h) * phase primary CT ratio * (1 / internal phase ratio) * √2

2.4.17.2 Calculation formula for earth current values

Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. adress 3803h) * earth primary CT ratio * (1 / internal earth ratio) * √2

2.4.18 Pages 3Dh : number of disturbance records available


Address Contents

3D00h Number of disturbance records available

Word n° 1 : Number of disturbance records available

Word n° 2: Oldest disturbance record number (n)

Words n° 3 & 4 : Oldest disturbance record date (second)

Words n° 5 & 6 : Oldest disturbance record date (millisecond)

Word n° 7 : Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input

Word n° 8 : Acknowledge

Word n° 9 : Disturbance record previous number (n+1)

Words n° 10 & 11: Previous disturbance record date (second)

Words n° 12 & 13: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)


2.4.19 Description of the mapping format, MiCOM P124 Dual-powered

CODE DESCRIPTION

F1 Unsigned integer numerical data : 1 - 65535

F2 Signed integer numerical data : -32768 - 32767

F3 Unsigned integer curves type 0 : STI (IEC) 1 : SI (IEC) 2 : VI (IEC) 3 : EI (IEC) 4 : LTI (IEC) 5: STI (C02) 6: MI (ANSI) 7 : LTI (CO8) 8 : VI (ANSI) 9 : EI (ANSI) 10 : RC Rectifier curve

F3' Unsigned integer Laborelec curve type 0 : curve 1 1 : curve 2 2 : curve 3

F4 Unsigned integer : MODBUS speed 0 : 300 1 : 600 2 : 1200 3 : 2400 4 : 4800 5 : 9600 6 : 19200 7 : 38400

F5 Unsigned integer : parity 0 : without 1 : even 2 : odd

F6 Unsigned integer : Tripping configuration bit 0 : tI> bit 1 : tI>> bit 2 : tI>>> bit 3 : tlE> bit 4 : tlE >> bit 5 : tlE >>> bit 6 : I< bit 7 : tIth> bit 8 : Broken conductor detection bit 9 : t Aux 1 bit 10 : t Aux 2 bit 11 : tI2> bits 12 to 15 : reserved

F7 Reserved


CODE DESCRIPTION

F8 Unsigned integer : Latching configuration bit 0 : I> latching bit 1 : I>> bit 2 : I>>> bit 3 : lE> bit 4 : lE>> bit 5 : lE>>> bit 6 : I< bit 7 : tIth> bit 8 : Broken conductor detection bit 9 : t Aux 1 bit 10 : t Aux 2 bit 11 : tI2> bits 12 to 15 : reserved

F8' Unsigned integer : Blocking logic configuration bit 0 : I> blocking bit 1 : I>> bit 2 : I>>> bit 3 : lE> bit 4 : lE>> bit 5 : lE>>> bit 6 : reserved bit 7 : tIth> bit 8 : Broken conductor detection bit 9 : t Aux 1 bit 10 : t Aux 2 bit 11 : tI2> bits 12 to 15 : reserved

F9 Unsigned integer : Remote control 1 bit 0 : Tripping contact delatched bit 1 : 1st

alarm acknowledge bit 2 : All alarms acknowledge bit 3 : Remote tripping bit 4 : Remote closing bit 5 : Setting group change bit 6 : Thermal state reset bit 7 : Peak and rolling value reset bit 8 : Disturbance record remote start bit 9 : Maintenance mode bit 10 : Recloser counter reset bit 11 : Recloser reset bit 12 : Local maintenance acknowledge bit 13 : Oldest event acknowledge bit 14 : Oldest fault acknowledge bit 15 : Hardware Sram alarm acknowledge

F10 2 characters ASCII 32 127 = ASCII character1 32 127 = ASCII character 2

F11 Unsigned integer : triggered output type 0 : stricker output 1 : trip output relay, RL1 2 : stricker + trip output relay RL1 outputs


CODE DESCRIPTION

F12 Unsigned integer : Logic input status it 0 : logic input number 1 bit 1 : logic input number 2 bit 2 : logic input number 3 bit 3 : logic input number 4 bit 4 : logic input number 5 bits 5 to 15 : reserved

F13 Unsigned integer : logic outputs status bit 0 : watchdog RL0 bit 1 : logic output RL1 (tripping) bit 2 : stricker output bit 3 : V1 flag command bit 4 : V1 flag reset bits 5 to 15 : reserved

F14 Unsigned integer : logic outputs configuration bit 0 : selection logic output number RL2 bit 1 : selection logic output number RL3 bit 2 : selection logic output number RL4 bit 3 : selection logic output number RL5 bit 4 : selection logic output number RL6 bits 5 to 15 : reserved

F15 Unsigned integer : logical input allocation bit 0 : delatch allocation bit 1 : allocation 52 a bit 2 : allocation 52 b bit 3 : allocation external CB failure bit 4 : allocation external input 1 bit 5 : allocation external input 2 bit 6 : allocation logic blocking 1 bit 7 : allocation logic blocking 2 bit 8 : allocation disturbance start bit 9 : allocation cold load start bit 10 : allocation selective scheme logic 1 bit 11 allocation selective scheme logic 2 bit 12 : allocation change of setting group bit 13 : allocation recloser locked bit 14 : allocation thermal state reset bit 15 : allocation trip circuit supervision

F15' Unsigned integer : logical input allocation (next)

bit 0 : start CB fail timer

F16 Unsigned integer : threshold earth information status bit 0 : reserved bit 1 : reserved bit 2 : reserved bit 3 : reserved bit 4 : reserved bit 5 : Instantaneous information IE> or IE>> or IE>>> bit 6 : Tripping information tIE> or tIE>> or tIE>>> bits 7 to 15 : reserved


CODE DESCRIPTION

F17 Unsigned integer : threshold phase information status bit 0 : reserved bit 1 : Instantaneous IA bit 2 : Instantaneous IB bit 3 : Instantaneous IC bit 4 : reserved bit 5 : Instantaneous information I> or I>> or I>>> bit 6 : Tripping information tI> or tI>> or tI>>> bits 7 to 15 : reserved

F18 Long integer

F19 Unsigned integer : LEDs allocation bit 0 : I> bit 1 : tI> bit 2 : I>> bit 3 : tI>> bit 4 : I>>> bit 5 : tI>>> bit 6 : IE> bit 7 : tIE> bit 8 : IE>> bit 9 : tIE>> bit 10 : IE>>> bit 11 : tIE>>> bit 12 : Thermal overload trip bit 13 : tI2> bit 14 : Broken conductor trip bit 15 : CB failure bit 16 : Logic input 1 bit 17 : Logic input 2 bit 18 : Logic input 3 bit 19 : Logic input 4 bit 20 : Logic input 5 bit 21 : Recloser running bit 22 : Recloser locked bit 23 : t Aux1 bit 24 : t Aux2


CODE DESCRIPTION

F20 Unsigned integer : logic input data status bit 0 : Selective scheme logic 1 bit 1 : Selective scheme logic 2 bit 2 : Relay delatch bit 3 : CB position (52 a) bit 4 : CB position (52 b) bit 5 : External CB failure bit 6 : External 1 bit 7 : External 2 bit 8 : Blocking logic 1 bit 9 : Blocking logic 2 bit 10 : Disturbance record start bit 11 : Cold load start bit 12 : Setting group change bit 13 : Recloser locked bit 14 : Thermal state reset bit 15 : Trip circuit supervision

F21 Unsigned integer : software version 10 : Version 1.A 11 : Version 1.B 20 : Version 2.A

F22 Unsigned integer : internal logic data bit 0 : Blocking bit 1 : reserved

F23 Unsigned integer : relay status bit 0 : Relay status (major alarm) bit 1 : Minor material alarm bit 2 : Presence of non-acknowledged event bit 3 : Synchronisation state bit 4 : Presence of non-acknowledged disturbance record bit 5 : Presence of non-acknowledged fault record bit 6 : reserved bit 7 : reserved

F24 0 : Out of service 1 : Healthy

F25 2 ASCII characters

F26 1 : IA measurement display (True RMS) 2 : IB measurement display (True RMS) 3 : IC measurement display (True RMS) 4 : IN measurement display (True RMS)

F27 0 : DMT time delay 1 : IDMT time delay 2 : RI time delay

F27' 0 : DMT time delay 1 : IDMT time delay 2 : RI time delay 3 : Laborelec curve

F28 0 : 7 data bits 1 : 8 data bits


CODE DESCRIPTION

F29 0 : 1 stop bit 1 : 2 stop bits.

F30 0 : Communication non-available 1 : Communication available

F31 Unsigned integer : Number of available event records 0 : None 1 : 1 event record available 2 : 2 event records available 3 : 3 event records available 4 : 4 event records available 5 : 5 event records available

F32 Unsigned integer : 0 : Disturbance record start condition on INSTANTANEOUS 1 : Disturbance record start condition on TRIPPING

F33 Cold load start thresholds bit 0 : tI> bit 1 : tI>> bit 2 : tI>>> bit 3 : tIE> bit 4 : tIE>> bit 5 : tIE>>> bit 6 : Thermal overload trip bit 7 : tI2> bit 8 to 15 : reserved

F34 Reserved

F35 0 : No disturbance record uploaded 1 : Disturbance record upload running

F36 Memorised flags of non acknowledged alarms : bit 0 : IE> bit 1 : tIE> bit 2 : IE>> bit 3 : tIE>> bit 4 : IE>>> bit 5 : tIE>>> bit 6 : Thermal overload alarm bit 7 : Thermal overload trip bit 8 : Broken conductor bit 9 : CB failure bit 10 : reserved bit 11 : I2> bit 12 : tI2> bit 13 : t Aux 1 bit 14 : t Aux 2 bit 15 : reserved

F37 Unsigned integer : Thermal overload information bit 0 : Thermal overload alarm bit 1 : Thermal overload trip


CODE DESCRIPTION

F38 Unsigned integer : bit 0 : reserved bit 1 : CB failure bit 2 : Pole A opening bit 3 : Pole B opening bit 4 : Pole C opening bit 5 : Broken conductor bit 6 : t Aux 1 bit 7 : t Aux 2 bit 8 : Broken conductor time delay bit 9 : CB failure time delay bit 10 : Cold load pick up time delay bit 11 : CB alarms or bits 0,1,2,4 of F43

F39 Unsigned integer : output relay remote word in maintenance mode bit 0 : RL1 (trip) bit 1 : RL2 bit 2 : RL3 bit 3 : RL0 (watchdog) bit 4 : RL4 bit 5 : RL5 bit 6 : RL6

F40 Unsigned integer : selective scheme logic configuration bit 0 : tI>> bit 1 : tI>>> bit 2 : tlE>> bit 3 : tlE>>

F41 0 : Front and rear MODBUS communication 1 : Front MODBUS and rear Courier communication

F42 5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes

F43 bit 0 : CB operating time overreach bit 1 : CB operation number overreach bit 2 : Square Amps sum overreach bit 3 : Trip circuit self-test bit 4 : CB closing time overreach bits 5 to 10 : Reserved

F44 bit 0 : CB, operating time overreach, memorised alarm bit 1 : CB operation number overreach, memorised alarm bit 2 : Square Amps sum overreach, memorised alarm bit 3 : Trip circuit self-test, memorised alarm bit 4 : CB closing time overreach, memorised alarm bits 5 to 7 : reserved

F45 Unsigned integer : relay status bit 0 : Watchdog bit 1 : Communicatio n failure bit 2 : EEPROM data failure bit 3 : Analogue failure bit 4 : Datation failure bit 5 : EEPROM calibration failure bit 6 : SRAM failure bit 7 : reserved


CODE DESCRIPTION

F46 bit 0 : Io harmonic calculation bit 1 : trip number reset

F49 bit 0 : cycle 1 configuration (trip followed by reclosing cycle) bit 1 : cycle 1 configuration (no trip in cycle 1) bit 2 to bit 3 : reserved bit 4 : cycle 2 configuration (trip followed by reclosing cycle) bit 5 : cycle 2 configuration (no trip in cycle 2) bit 6 to bit 7 : reserved bit 8 : cycle 3 configuration (trip followed by reclosing cycle) bit 9 : cycle 3 configuration (no trip in cycle 3) bit 10 to bit 11 : reserved bit 12 : cycle 4 configuration (trip followed by reclosing cycle) bit 13 : cycle 4 configuration (no trip in cycle 4)

F50 Unsigned integer : CTs and model configuration "A" : model standard, CT 1A "B" : model standard, CT 5A "C" : model sensitive, CT 1A "D" : model sensitive, CT 5A

F51 Unsigned integer : option configuration 0 : 1 electromagnetic flag 1 : 5 electromagnetic flags 2 : 5 flags + autorecloser

F52 Unsigned integer : electromechanical flags status (P124D)

bit 0 : V2 flag bit 1 : V2 flag reset bit 2 : V3 flag bit 3 : V3 flag reset bit 4 : V4 flag bit 5 : V4 flag reset bit 6 : V5 flag bit 7 : V5 flag reset

F53 Unsigned integer : internal data 2

bit 0 : CB fail by external input

F54 Unsigned integer : datation format

0 : private format 1 : IEC format

F55 0 : setting group change either on edge of digital input, or on remote command, or of the relay front 1 : setting group change on level of digital input


2.4.20 Disturbance record additional information

2.4.20.1 MODBUS request definition used for disturbance record

To upload a disturbance record, the following requests must be done in the exact given order :

1. (optional) : Send a request to know the number of disturbance records available in SRAM.

2. (compulsory) : Send a request with the record number and the channel number.

3. (compulsory) : Send one or several requests to upload the disturbance record data. It depends of the number of samples.

4. (compulsory) : Send a request to upload the index frame.

2.4.20.2 Request to know the number of disturbance records in SRAM

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 3Dh 00 00 24h xx xx

This request may be answered an error message with the error code :

EVT_NOK(OF) : No record available

NOTA : If there is less than 5 records available, the answer will contains zero in the non-used words.

2.4.20.3 Service requests

This request must be send before uploading the disturbance record channel samples. It allows to know the record number and the channel number to upload. It allows also to know the number of samples in the channel.


xx 03h Refer to mapping

00 0Bh xx xx

This request may be answered an error message with two different error codes :

CODE_DEF_RAM(02) : SRAM failure

CODE_EVT_NOK(03) : no disturbance record available in SRAM


2.4.20.4 Disturbance record upload request



01 to 7Dh xx xx

This request may be answered an error message with two different error codes :

CODE_DEP_DATA(04) : the required disturbance data number is greater than the memorised number.

CODE_SERV_NOK(05) : the service request for disturbance record and channel number has not been send.

2.4.20.5 Index frame upload request


xx 03h 22h 00 00 07h xx xx

This request may be answered an error message with an error code :

CODE_SERV_NOK(05) : the service request for disturbance record and channel number has not been send.

Two ways can be followed to retrieve an event record :

− Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event.

− Send a request to retrieve a dedicated event.

2.4.21 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event


xx 03h 36h 00 00 09h xx xx

This event request may be answered an error message with the error code :

EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : An event is being written into the saved RAM.

NOTA : On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the event record acknowledgement : a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval. b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval.

a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval :

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0. On event retrieval, this event record is acknowledged.

b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval :

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is not acknowledged. To acknowledge this event, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 13 of this frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.


2.4.22 Request to retrieve a dedicated event



00 09h xx xx

This event request may be answered an error message with the error code :

EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : An event is being written into the saved RAM.

NOTA : This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event.

2.4.23 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records

Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record :

− Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record.

− Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record.

2.4.23.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record


xx 03h 3Eh 00 00 0Fh xx xx

NOTA : On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the fault record acknowledgement: a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval. b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval.

a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval :

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0. On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged.

b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval :

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged. To acknowledge this fault, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 14 of this frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.

2.4.23.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record



00 0Fh xx xx

NOTA : This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record.


3. K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE

The serial communications are transmitted on K-Bus, a multi-drop network proposin an instantaneous interface with IEC 870 - 5 - FT1.2 standards. The language and th communication protocol used are Courier. This concept permits especially to the generic programmes of the principal units to access to a high number of different relay types without need to change permanently the principal unit program for each relay type. The relays forms a distributed database in which the principal workstation proceeds to a selective call of the slave relays in order to know all necessary information.

Courier has a concept for the functions with a selective call system which allows not a slave periphery to communicate directly with the central unit when one shall informs another about a particular event. The slave workstation has to wait that the principal workstation asks for the information. With Courier each information is given into a box with a code of the length and the database type. In knowing the database format the reception periphery can read them.

3.1 K-BUS

K-Bus is a communication system developed for connecting the slave peripheries in remoting on the central unit, permitting them to execute all remote monitoring and remote control functions using the appropriated communication language. K-Bus is not able to permit a direct communication between the slave peripheries. Only a communication between the central unit and the slave peripheries can be established. The principal characteristics of the K-Bus are his profitability, his high security level, his installation facility and his user friendliness.

3.1.1 K-Bus transmission layer

The communication port is supported on the reception levels and the voltage transmission RS485 with galvanic isolation assured by a transformer. A selective call protocol is used. No relay unit is allowed to transmit before having received a validation message without any error detection. The transmission is synchronous on a pair of isolated waves. The data are coded FM0 with a clock signal for eliminate all CC-component, allows the signal to cross the transformers.

With the exception of the central units, each network node is passive. No defective unit from the system can interfere with the communications established with the other units. The message format is HDLC. The data transmission speed is 64 kbits/s.

3.1.2 K-Bus connection

The connection on the K-Bus port is realised by screwed terminals of 4 mm of MIDOS standards or by FASTON-connectors. A cabled pair is sufficient to realise the connection, knowing that the polarity is not important. It is recommended to use an external screen earth linked at the end of the principal workstation only. The screen has to be fixed with a M4 screw following the wiring scheme (cf. Appendice 1 of the Technical Guide). The functioning of the K-BUS network is guaranteed for 32 units connected on 1000 meters of cables. Thanks to the data code method, the polarity of the Bus cable connection is not important.

NOTE : The K-Bus network has to finish with a 150 ohms resistance on each end of the Bus. The principal workstation can be placed anywhere on the network. This command point has to be unique


3.1.3 Auxiliary equipment

For communication with the relay it is necessary to have at least one converter case K-Bus/IEC870-5 of the type KITZ and a computer suitable software, an interconnection cable RS232 for connecting the KITZ to the computer and a software conform to the specification of the Courier protocol.

3.2 Relay courier database

The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in the database being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can take a range from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal values, eg 0A02 is column 0A (10 decimal) row 02. Associated settings/data will be part of the same column, row zero of the column contains a text string to identify the contents of the column.

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P1

24/E

N T

08/B

44

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e

CH

APT

ER 8

M

iCO

M P

124

Pa

ge 5

1/98

3.2.

1 C

ell r

efer

ence

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

00

00

SYST

EM D

ATA

01

La

ngua

ge

Ver>

: In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3

Lang

1 (F

renc

h)

Lang

2 (E

nglis

h) *

La

ng3

(Ger

man

) La

ng4

(Spa

nish

)

Se

tting

0/

3/1

02

Pa

ssw

ord

ASC

II Pa

ssw

ord(

4 by

tes)

AA

AA

Setti

ng

32/1

27/1

03

Fn

links

: NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

04

D

escr

iptio

n A

SCII

Text

(6 b

ytes

)

P1

24-D

*

Se

tting

32

/127

/1

05

Pl

ant R

efer

ence

A

SCII

Text

(4 b

ytes

)

Pr

ef

Setti

ng

32/1

27/1

06

M

odel

Num

ber

ASC

II Te

xt (1

6 by

tes)

M

odel

Num

ber

Dat

a

07

Fi

rmw

are

Num

ber

ASC

II Te

xt (1

6 by

tes)

Fi

rmw

are

Num

ber

Dat

a

08

Se

rial N

umbe

r A

SCII

Text

(16

byte

s)

Seria

l Num

ber

Dat

a

09

Fr

eque

ncy

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

XX

XX H

z

Setti

ng

50/6

0/10

0A

C

omm

unic

atio

n Le

vel

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

1

D

ata

0B

A

ddre

ss

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

1*

Setti

ng

1/25

5/1

0C

Pl

ant S

tatu

s W

ord:

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

0D

C

ontr

ol S

tatu

s W

ord:

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

0E

Se

tting

Gro

up

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r

Dat

a

0F

Lo

ad s

hed

Stag

e: N

ON

IMPL

EMEN

TE

10

C

ircui

t Bre

aker

Con

trol

A

1+, A

2: N

ON

IMPL

EMEN

TE

11

So

ftwar

e Re

fere

nce

ASC

II Te

xt (1

6 ch

arac

ters

)

Dat

a

12

-1F

Unu

sed,

res

erve

d

20

Lo

gic

Inpu

t Sta

tus

Bina

ry fl

ag (5

bits

)

0: lo

g in

put 1

1:

log

inpu

t 2

2: lo

g in

put 3

3:

log

inpu

t 4

4: lo

g in

put 5

D

ata

P124

/EN

T08

/B44

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

CH

APT

ER 8

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e Pa

ge 5

2/98

MiC

OM

P12

4

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

21

Re

lay

Out

put S

tatu

s Bi

nary

flag

(7 b

its)

0:

rel

ay 1

(trip

)

1: w

atch

dog

rela

y

2: r

elay

2

3: r

elay

3

4: r

elay

4

5 :

rela

y 5

6 :

rela

y 6

D

ata

22

Ala

rm

Bina

ry fl

ag (1

6 bi

ts)

0:

res

erve

d 1:

Com

m e

rr

2:

Eep

rom

err

dat

a 3:

Ct e

rror

4:

Eep

rom

err

cal

ib

5: C

lock

err

or

6: B

bram

err

or

7 to

15:

res

erve

d

D

ata

23

Pseu

do L

ogic

Inpu

t Sta

tus

grou

p 1

Bina

ry fl

ag (1

6 bi

ts)

0:

I>

1: I>

>

2: I>

>>

3:

I0>

4:

I0>

>

5: I0

>>

>

6: t

I>

7: t

I>>

8:

t I>

>>

9:

t I0

>

10:

t I0>

>

11:

t I0>

>>

12

: Th

erm

al A

larm

13

: Th

erm

. Ove

rload

14

: t I

<

15:

rese

rved

D

ata

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P1

24/E

N T

08/B

44

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e

CH

APT

ER 8

M

iCO

M P

124

Pa

ge 5

3/98

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

24

Pseu

do L

ogic

Inpu

t Sta

tus

grou

p 2

Bina

ry fl

ag (1

6 bi

ts)

0:

Bro

ken

Con

duct

or

1: t

Aux

1

2: t

Aux

2

3: B

reak

er F

ail.

4: Ii

nv >

5:

t Iin

v>

6: O

pen

oper

atin

g tim

e 7:

Trip

ope

ratio

n N

b 8:

SA

2 n

9:

SW

Trip

Circ

uit

10:

Clo

se o

pera

ting

time

11:

Succ

essf

ul

auto

recl

ose

12:

Lock

ed a

utor

eclo

ser

13:

Aut

orec

lose

r co

nf. f

ail

14:

rese

rved

15

: re

serv

ed

D

ata

01

00

USE

R C

ON

TRO

L

01

Re

mot

e co

ntro

l 1

Bina

ry fl

ag (1

5 bi

ts)

0:

Unl

ock

trip

con

t.*

1: A

ck fi

rst a

larm

2

: A

ck a

ll al

arm

s 3

: TR

IP

4 :

CLO

SE

5 :

Setti

ng C

hang

e 6

: Th

. Sta

te R

eset

7

: RM

S ov

er&

max

Res

et

8 :

Dis

t. Re

c. T

rig

9 :

Mai

nten

ance

Sta

rt

10 :

Rec

lose

r tim

er R

eset

11

: R

eclo

ser

Rese

t 12

: M

anua

l Ack

mod

e 13

: A

ck. o

lder

eve

nt

14 :

Ack

. old

er d

efau

lt 15

: S

RAM

def

. a

ck.

Se

tting

0/

6553

5/1

P124

/EN

T08

/B44

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

CH

APT

ER 8

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e Pa

ge 5

4/98

MiC

OM

P12

4

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

02

Re

mot

e co

ntro

l 2

Bina

ry fl

ag (1

0 bi

ts)

0

: Re

serv

ed

1 :

Rese

rved

2

: Re

serv

ed

3 :

Rela

y :

Spec

ial

Trip

ping

4

: W

atch

dog

Rela

y 5

: Re

lay

1 6

: Re

lay

2 7

: Re

lay

3 8

: Re

lay

4 9

: Re

lay

5

Se

tting

0/

1023

/1

03

Re

mot

e co

ntro

l 3

Bina

ry fl

ag (2

bits

)

0 :

Rese

t I0

Har

mon

ic

1 :

Unl

ock

TRIP

Rel

ay

Se

tting

0/

3/1

02

00

VIE

W R

ECO

RD

S

01

Re

cord

num

ber

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

5 Se

tting

1/

5/1

02

O

ccur

dat

e U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

03

A

ctiv

e se

t gro

up

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

04

Ph

ase

in fa

ult

ASC

II Te

xt

05

Fa

ult I

d A

SCII

Text

06

M

agni

tude

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

07

Ia

mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

08

Ib

mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

09

Ic

mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0A

In

mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P1

24/E

N T

08/B

44

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e

CH

APT

ER 8

M

iCO

M P

124

Pa

ge 5

5/98

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

03

00

MEA

SUREM

ENTS

01

IA

RM

S C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

02

IB

RM

S C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

03

IC

RM

S C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

04

I0

RM

S C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

05

Id

irect

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

06

IIN

V C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

07

Ra

tio Id

ir /

Iinv

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

Dat

a

08

TH

ERM

AL

STA

TE (

Rst

) U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

) (%

)

Dat

a

09

FR

EQU

ENC

Y C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

0A

Rst

MA

X &

MO

Y RM

S

0B

M

AX

RMS

IA

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

Dat

a

0C

M

AX

RMS

IB

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

Dat

a

0D

M

AX

RMS

IC

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

Dat

a

0E

IA

RM

S A

VERA

GE

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

Dat

a

0F

IB

RM

S A

VERA

GE

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

Dat

a

10

IC

RM

S A

VERA

GE

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

Dat

a

P124

/EN

T08

/B44

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

CH

APT

ER 8

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e Pa

ge 5

6/98

MiC

OM

P12

4

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

11

IN

fn

(I0

Har

mon

ic) (

Rst

) C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

12

Tr

ip N

umbe

r (R

st)

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

Dat

a

04

00

REC

LOSE

R S

TATI

STIC

S (R

st)

01

TO

TAL

CYC

LE N

UM

BER

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

D

ata

02

C

YCLE

1 N

UM

BER

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

D

ata

03

C

YCLE

2 N

UM

BER

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

D

ata

04

C

YCLE

3 N

UM

BER

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

D

ata

05

C

YCLE

4 N

UM

BER

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

D

ata

06

D

EFIN

ITIV

E TR

IP N

UM

BER

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

D

ata

07

RE

CLO

SE O

RDER

NU

MBE

R U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

Dat

a

05

00

PRO

CES

S: d

ans

vers

ions

>

06

00

SW M

ON

ITO

RIN

G

01

Rst

SA

n Ix

02

SA

2 IA

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

03

SA

2 IB

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

04

SA

2 IC

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

05

SW

ope

ratio

n nb

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

Dat

a

06

SW

ope

ratio

n tim

e C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

0 s

D

ata

07

SW

Clo

sing

tim

e C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P1

24/E

N T

08/B

44

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e

CH

APT

ER 8

M

iCO

M P

124

Pa

ge 5

7/98

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

08

00

TIM

E:

01

D

ate/

Tim

e IE

C87

0 Ti

me

& D

ate

D

ata

0E

00

CT

RA

TIO

S

01

Ph

ase

CT

Prim

ary

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

10

00 *

Setti

ng

1/99

99/1

03

N

eutr

al C

T Pr

imar

y U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

1000

*

Se

tting

1/

9999

/1

0F

00

SETT

ING

GRO

UPS

01

Se

lect

set

ting

grou

p U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

1*

Se

tting

1/

2

02

G

roup

1 v

isib

le

Inde

xed

Strin

g

0 :

YES

* 1

: N

O

Se

tting

0

(YES

) / 1

(NO

)

03

G

roup

2 v

isib

le

Inde

xed

Strin

g

0 :

YES

1 :

NO

*

Se

tting

0

(YES

) / 1

(NO

)

Prote

ctio

n G

rou

p n

° 1

20

00

PHA

SE O

VER

CU

RREN

T

01

St

age

1 O

verc

urre

nt

(Sub

Hea

ding

)

02

M

ax I>

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

03

Th

resh

old

I>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.1

In *

20

02=

1 Se

tting

0.

1/4.

0/0.

1

04

Te

mpo

risat

ion

Type

In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2

0: d

efin

ite ti

me

* 1

: in

vers

e tim

e 2:

RI c

urve

2002

=1

Setti

ng

0/2/

1

05

C

urve

type

In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

STI (

CEI

) *

SI (C

EI)

VI (C

EI)

EI (C

EI)

LTI (

CEI

) ST

I (C

O2)

M

I (A

NSI

) LT

I (C

O8)

VI

(AN

SI)

EI (A

NSI

)

2004

=1

Setti

ng

0/9/

1

06

TM

S C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

025

* 20

04=

1 Se

tting

0.

025/

1.5/

0.02

5

P124

/EN

T08

/B44

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

CH

APT

ER 8

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e Pa

ge 5

8/98

MiC

OM

P12

4

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

07

K

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.1

* 20

04=

2 Se

tting

0.

1/10

.0/0

.005

08

Te

mpo

I>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.01

s *

20

04=

0 Se

tting

0/

180.

0/0.

01

09

Te

mpo

res

et ty

pe

Inde

xed

Strin

g

0 :

defin

ite ti

me

1 :

inve

rse

time

2004

=1

and

2005

>=

5

and

2005

<

= 9

Setti

ng

0/1

0A

RT

MS

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.02

5 *

2009

= 1

Se

tting

0.

025/

1.5/

0.02

5

0B

T

RESE

T C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

04 *

20

09 =

0

Setti

ng

0.04

/100

/0.0

1

0C

-0F

Rese

rved

10

St

age

2 O

verc

urre

nt

(Sub

Hea

ding

)

11

M

ax I>

>

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

12

Th

resh

old

I>>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

50 In

*

2011

=1

Setti

ng

0.5/

40.0

/0.0

5

13

Te

mpo

I>>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 s

*

2011

=1

Setti

ng

0/18

0.0/

0.01

14

-1F

Rese

rved

20

St

age

3 O

verc

urre

nt

(Sub

Hea

ding

)

21

M

ax I>

>>

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

22

Th

resh

old

I>>

>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.50

In *

20

21=

1 Se

tting

0.

5/40

.0/0

.05

23

Te

mpo

I>>

>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.01

s *

20

21=

1 Se

tting

0/

180.

0/0.

01

21

00

EARTH

FA

ULT

01

St

age

1 O

verc

urre

nt

(Sub

Hea

ding

)

02

M

ax I0

>

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

03

Th

resh

old

I0>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 I0

n*

2102

=1

Setti

ng

0.01

/1.0

/0.0

05

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P1

24/E

N T

08/B

44

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e

CH

APT

ER 8

M

iCO

M P

124

Pa

ge 5

9/98

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

04

Te

mpo

Typ

e In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2

0: d

efin

ite ti

me

* 1:

inve

rse

time

2: R

I cur

ve

2102

=1

Setti

ng

0/2/

1

05

C

urve

Typ

e

Inde

xed

Strin

g 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

STI (

CEI

) *

SI (C

EI)

VI (C

EI)

EI (C

EI)

LTI (

CEI

) ST

I (C

O2)

M

I (A

NSI

) LT

I (C

O8)

VI

(AN

SI)

EI (A

NSI

)

2104

=1

Setti

ng

1/10

/1

06

TM

S C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

025

* 21

04=

1 Se

tting

0.

025/

1.5/

0.02

5

07

K

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.1

* 21

04=

2 Se

tting

0.

1/10

.0/0

.005

08

Te

mpo

I0>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 s

*

2104

=0

Setti

ng

0/18

0.0/

0.01

09

Te

mpo

res

et T

ype

Inde

xed

Strin

g

0 :

def

inite

tim

e 1

: in

vers

e tim

e 21

04=

1 an

d 21

05 >

= 5

an

d 21

05

<=

9

Setti

ng

0/1

0A

RT

MS

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.02

5 *

2109

= 1

Se

tting

0.

025/

3.2/

0.02

5

0B

T

RESE

T C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

04 *

21

09 =

0

Setti

ng

0.04

/100

/0.0

1

0C

-0F

Rese

rved

10

St

age

2 O

verc

urre

nt

(Sub

Hea

ding

)

11

M

ax I0

>>

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

12

Th

resh

old

I0>

>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.01

I0n*

21

11=

1 Se

tting

0.

01/8

.0/0

.005

P124

/EN

T08

/B44

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

CH

APT

ER 8

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e Pa

ge 6

0/98

MiC

OM

P12

4

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

13

Te

mpo

I0>

>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.01

s *

21

11=

1 Se

tting

0/

180.

0/0.

01

14

-1F

Rese

rved

20

St

age

3 O

verc

urre

nt

(Sub

Hea

ding

)

21

M

ax I0

>>

>

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

22

Th

resh

old

I0>

>>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 I0

n *

2121

=1

Setti

ng

0.01

/8.0

/0.0

05

23

Te

mpo

I0>

>>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 s

*

2121

=1

Setti

ng

0/18

0.0/

0.01

22

00

THER

MA

L O

VER

LOA

D

01

Ith

>

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

02

Th

resh

old

Ith>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

20 It

h*

2201

=1

Setti

ng

0.01

/3.2

/0.0

1

03

K

Ith>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

1.

05 *

22

01=

1 Se

tting

1.

0/1.

50/0

.01

In

04

θ

TRIP

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

100

% *

22

01=

1 Se

tting

50

/ 2

00/

1 %

05

θ

ALA

RM ?

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

2201

=1

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

06

θ

ALA

RM

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

90

% *

22

05 =

1 Se

tting

50

/ 2

00/

1 %

07

Th

erm

al c

onst

ant

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

1

* 22

01=

1 Se

tting

1/

200

/ 1

mn

23

00

MIN

I<

01

I<

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

02

Th

resh

old

I<

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

20

%In

*

2301

=1

Setti

ng

2 /

100

/ 1

%In

24

00

NEG

ATI

VE

CU

RREN

T

01

Iin

v>

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

02

Th

resh

old

Iinv>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

1 In

*

2401

= 1

Se

tting

0.

1/40

.0/0

.01

In

03

Te

mpo

risat

ion

Type

In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2

0: d

efin

ite ti

me

* 1:

inve

rse

time

2: R

I cur

ve

2401

= 1

Se

tting

0/

2/1

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P1

24/E

N T

08/B

44

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e

CH

APT

ER 8

M

iCO

M P

124

Pa

ge 6

1/98

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

04

C

urve

type

In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

STI (

CEI

) *

SI (C

EI)

VI (C

EI)

EI (C

EI)

LTI (

CEI

) ST

I (C

O2)

M

I (A

NSI

) LT

I (C

O8)

VI

(AN

SI)

EI (A

NSI

)

2401

= 1

Se

tting

0/

9/1

05

TM

S C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

025

* 24

03=

1 Se

tting

0.

025/

1.5/

0.02

5

06

K

(RI)

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.1

* 24

03=

2 Se

tting

0.

1/10

.0/0

.005

07

Te

mpo

Iinv

>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.01

s *

24

03=

0 Se

tting

0/

180.

0/0.

01

08

Re

set t

empo

type

In

dexe

d St

ring

0

: de

finite

tim

e 1

: in

vers

e tim

e 24

03=

1 an

d 24

04 >

= 5

an

d 24

04

<=

9

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

09

RT

MS

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.02

5 *

2408

= 1

Se

tting

0.

025/

3.2/

0.02

5

0A

T

RESE

T C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

04 *

24

08 =

0

Setti

ng

0.04

/100

/0.0

1

25

00

AU

TOREC

LOSE

R

01

A

utor

eclo

ser

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

02

St

ate

circ

uit b

reak

er

Bina

ry (1

bit)

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d 25

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

03

C

ontr

ol w

indo

w

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.01

s *

25

02 =

1

Setti

ng

0.01

/ 6

00.0

0 /

0.01

s

04

Ex

tern

al b

lock

ing

Bina

ry (1

bit)

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d 25

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

07

Te

mpo

risat

ion

cyc

le 1

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 s

*

2501

= 1

Se

tting

0.

01 /

300

.00

/ 0.

01 s

P124

/EN

T08

/B44

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

CH

APT

ER 8

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e Pa

ge 6

2/98

MiC

OM

P12

4

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

08

Te

mpo

risat

ion

cyc

le 2

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 s

*

2501

= 1

Se

tting

0.

01 /

300

.00

/ 0.

01 s

09

Te

mpo

risat

ion

cyc

le 3

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 s

*

2501

= 1

Se

tting

0.

01 /

600

.00

/ 0.

01 s

0A

Te

mpo

risat

ion

cyc

le 4

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 s

*

2501

= 1

Se

tting

0.

01 /

600

.00

/ 0.

01 s

0B

Re

clai

m T

IME

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.02

s *

25

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0.02

/ 6

00.0

0 /

0.01

s

0C

In

hibi

tion

time

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.02

s *

25

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0.02

/ 6

00.0

0 /

0.01

s

0D

N

umbe

r of

sho

rt c

ircui

t cyc

le

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0

* 25

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0 /

4 /

1

0E

N

umbe

r of

ear

th fa

ult c

ycle

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0 *

2501

= 1

Se

tting

0

/ 4

/ 1

0F

C

ycle

s tI>

con

figur

atio

n U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0x11

11 *

25

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0/2/

1 on

eac

h 4

bit

grou

p

10

C

ycle

s tI>

> c

onfig

urat

ion

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0x

1111

*

2501

= 1

Se

tting

0/

2/1

on e

ach

4 bi

t gr

oup

11

C

ycle

s tI>

>>

con

figur

atio

n U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0x11

11 *

25

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0/2/

1 on

eac

h 4

bit

grou

p

12

C

ycle

s tI0

> c

onfig

urat

ion

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0x

1111

*

2501

= 1

Se

tting

0/

2/1

on e

ach

4 bi

t gr

oup

13

C

ycle

s tI0

>>

con

figur

atio

n U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0x11

11 *

25

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0/2/

1 on

eac

h 4

bit

grou

p

14

C

ycle

s tI0

>>

> c

onfig

urat

ion

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0x

1111

*

2501

= 1

Se

tting

0/

2/1

on e

ach

4 bi

t gr

oup

15

C

ycle

s tA

ux1>

con

figur

atio

n U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0x11

11 *

25

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0/2/

1 on

eac

h 4

bit

grou

p

16

C

ycle

s tA

ux2>

con

figur

atio

n U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0x11

11 *

25

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0/2/

1 on

eac

h 4

bit

grou

p

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P1

24/E

N T

08/B

44

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e

CH

APT

ER 8

M

iCO

M P

124

Pa

ge 6

3/98

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

Prote

ctio

n G

rou

p n

° 2

40

00

PHA

SE O

VER

CU

RREN

T

01

St

age

1 O

verc

urre

nt

(Sub

Hea

ding

)

02

M

ax I>

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

03

Th

resh

old

I>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.1

In *

40

02=

1 Se

tting

0.

1/4.

0/0.

01

04

Te

mpo

Typ

e In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2

0: d

efin

ite ti

me

* 1:

inve

rse

time

2: R

I cur

ve

4002

=1

Setti

ng

0/2/

1

05

C

urve

Typ

e In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

STI (

CEI

) *

SI (C

EI)

VI (C

EI)

EI (C

EI)

LTI (

CEI

) ST

I (C

O2)

M

I (A

NSI

) LT

I (C

O8)

VI

(AN

SI)

EI (A

NSI

)

4004

=1

Setti

ng

0/9/

1

06

TM

S C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

025

* 40

04=

1 Se

tting

0.

025/

1.5/

0.02

5

07

K

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.1

* 40

04=

2 Se

tting

0.

1/10

.0/0

.005

08

Te

mpo

I>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.01

s *

40

04=

0 Se

tting

0/

180.

0/0.

01

09

Re

set t

empo

type

In

dexe

d St

ring

0

: de

finite

tim

e 1

: in

vers

e tim

e 40

04=

1 an

d 40

05 >

= 5

an

d 40

05

<=

9

Setti

ng

0/1

0A

RT

MS

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.02

5 *

4009

= 1

Se

tting

0.

025/

1.5/

0.02

5

0B

T

RESE

T C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

04 *

40

09 =

0

Setti

ng

0.04

/100

.0/0

.01

P124

/EN

T08

/B44

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

CH

APT

ER 8

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e Pa

ge 6

4/98

MiC

OM

P12

4

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

0C

-0F

Rese

rved

10

St

age

2 O

verc

urre

nt

(Sub

Hea

ding

)

11

M

ax I>

>

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

12

Th

resh

old

I>>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

50 In

*

4011

=1

Setti

ng

0.5/

40.0

/0.0

5

13

Te

mpo

I>>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 s

*

4011

=1

Setti

ng

0/18

0.0/

0.01

14

-1F

Rese

rved

20

St

age

3 O

verc

urre

nt

(Sub

Hea

ding

)

21

M

ax I>

>>

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

22

Th

resh

old

I>>

>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.50

In *

40

21=

1 Se

tting

0.

5/40

.0/0

.05

23

Te

mpo

I>>

>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.01

s *

40

21=

1 Se

tting

0/

180.

0/0.

01

41

00

EARTH

FA

ULT

01

St

age

1 O

verc

urre

nt

(Sub

Hea

ding

)

02

M

ax I0

>

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

03

Th

resh

old

I0>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 I0

n*

4102

=1

Setti

ng

0.01

/1.0

/0.0

05

04

Te

mpo

risat

ion

Type

In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2

0: d

efin

ite ti

me

* 1:

inve

rse

time

2: R

I cur

ve

4102

=1

Setti

ng

0/2/

1

05

C

urve

type

In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

STI (

CEI

) *

SI (C

EI)

VI (C

EI)

EI (C

EI)

LTI (

CEI

) ST

I (C

O2)

M

I (A

NSI

) LT

I (C

O8)

VI

(AN

SI)

EI (A

NSI

)

4104

=1

Setti

ng

0/9/

1

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P1

24/E

N T

08/B

44

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e

CH

APT

ER 8

M

iCO

M P

124

Pa

ge 6

5/98

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

06

TM

S C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

025

* 41

04=

1 Se

tting

0.

025/

1.5/

0.02

5

07

K

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.1

* 41

04=

2 Se

tting

0.

1/10

.0/0

.005

08

Te

mpo

I0>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 s

*

4104

=0

Setti

ng

0/18

0.0/

0.01

09

Te

mpo

res

et T

ype

Inde

xed

Strin

g

0 :

defin

ite ti

me

1 :

inve

rse

time

4104

=1

and

4105

>=

5

and

4105

<

= 9

Setti

ng

0/1

0A

RT

MS

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.02

5 *

4109

= 1

Se

tting

0.

025/

3.2/

0.02

5

0B

T

RESE

T C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

04 *

41

09 =

0

Setti

ng

0.04

/100

.0/0

.01

0C

-0F

Rese

rved

10

St

age

2 O

verc

urre

nt

(Sub

Hea

ding

)

11

M

ax I0

>>

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

12

Th

resh

old

I0>

>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.01

I0n*

41

11=

1 Se

tting

0.

01/8

.0/0

.005

13

Te

mpo

I0>

>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.01

s *

41

11=

1 Se

tting

0/

180.

0/0.

01

14

-1F

Rese

rved

20

St

age

3 O

verc

urre

nt

(Sub

Hea

ding

)

21

M

ax I0

>>

>

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

22

Th

resh

old

I0>

>>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 I0

n *

4121

=1

Setti

ng

0.01

/8.0

/0.0

05

23

Te

mpo

I0>

>>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 s

*

4121

=1

Setti

ng

0/18

0.0/

0.01

42

00

THER

MA

L O

VER

LOA

D

01

Ith

>

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

P124

/EN

T08

/B44

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

CH

APT

ER 8

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e Pa

ge 6

6/98

MiC

OM

P12

4

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

02

Th

resh

old

Ith>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

20 It

h*

4201

=1

Setti

ng

0.01

/3.2

/0.0

1

03

K

Ith>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

1.

05 *

42

01=

1 Se

tting

1.

0/1.

50/0

.01

In

04

θ

TRIP

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

100

% *

42

01=

1 Se

tting

50

/ 2

00/

1 %

05

θ

ALA

RM ?

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

4201

=1

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

06

θ

ALA

RM

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

90

% *

42

05 =

1 Se

tting

50

/ 2

00/

1 %

07

Th

erm

al c

onst

ant

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

1

* 42

01=

1 Se

tting

1/

200

/ 1

mn

43

00

MIN

I<

01

I<

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

02

Th

resh

old

I<

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

20

%In

*

4301

=1

Setti

ng

2 /

100

/ 1

%In

44

00

NEG

ATI

VE

CU

RREN

T

01

Iin

v>

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

02

Th

resh

old

Iinv>

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

1 In

*

4401

= 1

Se

tting

0.

1/40

.0/0

.1 In

03

Te

mpo

risat

ion

type

In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2

0: d

efin

ite ti

me

* 1:

inve

rse

time

2: R

I cur

ve

4401

= 1

Se

tting

0/

2/1

04

C

urve

Typ

e

Inde

xed

Strin

g 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

STI (

CEI

) *

SI (C

EI)

VI (C

EI)

EI (C

EI)

LTI (

CEI

) ST

I (C

O2)

M

I (A

NSI

) LT

I (C

O8)

VI

(AN

SI)

EI (A

NSI

)

4401

=1

Setti

ng

0/9/

1

05

TM

S C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

025

* 44

03=

1 Se

tting

0.

025/

1.5/

0.02

5

06

K

(RI)

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.1

* 44

03=

2 Se

tting

0.

1/10

.0/0

.005

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P1

24/E

N T

08/B

44

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e

CH

APT

ER 8

M

iCO

M P

124

Pa

ge 6

7/98

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

07

Te

mpo

Iinv

>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.01

s *

44

03=

0 Se

tting

0/

180.

0/0.

01

08

Te

mpo

risat

ion

rese

t typ

e C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0

: de

finite

tim

e 1

: in

vers

e tim

e 44

03=

1 an

d 44

04 >

= 5

an

d 44

04

<=

9

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

09

RT

MS

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.02

5 *

4408

=1

Setti

ng

0.02

5/3.

2/0.

025

0A

T

RESE

T C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

04 *

44

08=

0 Se

tting

0.

04/1

00.0

/0.0

1

45

00

AU

TOREC

LOSE

R

01

A

utor

eclo

ser

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

02

St

ate

circ

uit b

reak

er

Bina

ry (1

bit)

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d 45

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

03

C

ontr

ol w

indo

w

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.01

s *

45

02 =

1

Setti

ng

0.01

/ 6

00.0

0 /

0.01

s

04

Ex

tern

al b

lock

ing

Bina

ry (1

bit)

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d 45

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

07

Te

mpo

risat

ion

cyc

le 1

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 s

*

4501

= 1

Se

tting

0.

01 /

300

.00

/ 0.

01 s

08

Te

mpo

risat

ion

cyc

le 2

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 s

*

4501

= 1

Se

tting

0.

01 /

300

.00

/ 0.

01 s

09

Te

mpo

risat

ion

cyc

le 3

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 s

*

4501

= 1

Se

tting

0.

01 /

600

.00

/ 0.

01 s

0A

Te

mpo

risat

ion

cyc

le 4

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

01 s

*

4501

= 1

Se

tting

0.

01 /

600

.00

/ 0.

01 s

0B

Re

clai

m T

IME

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.02

s *

45

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0.02

/ 6

00.0

0 /

0.01

s

0C

In

hibi

tion

time

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.02

s *

45

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0.02

/ 6

00.0

0 /

0.01

s

0D

N

umbe

r of

sho

rt c

ircui

t cyc

le

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0

* 45

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0 /

4 /

1

0E

N

umbe

r of

ear

th fa

ult c

ycle

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0 *

4501

= 1

Se

tting

0

/ 4

/ 1

P124

/EN

T08

/B44

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

CH

APT

ER 8

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e Pa

ge 6

8/98

MiC

OM

P12

4

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

0F

C

ycle

s tI>

con

figur

atio

n U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0x11

11 *

45

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0/2/

1 on

eac

h 4

bit

grou

p

10

C

ycle

s tI>

> c

onfig

urat

ion

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0x

1111

*

4501

= 1

Se

tting

0/

2/1

on e

ach

4 bi

t gr

oup

11

C

ycle

s tI>

>>

con

figur

atio

n U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0x11

11 *

45

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0/2/

1 on

eac

h 4

bit

grou

p

12

C

ycle

s tI0

> c

onfig

urat

ion

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0x

1111

*

4501

= 1

Se

tting

0/

2/1

on e

ach

4 bi

t gr

oup

13

C

ycle

s tI0

>>

con

figur

atio

n U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0x11

11 *

45

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0/2/

1 on

eac

h 4

bit

grou

p

14

C

ycle

s tI0

>>

> c

onfig

urat

ion

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0x

1111

*

4501

= 1

Se

tting

0/

2/1

on e

ach

4 bi

t gr

oup

15

C

ycle

s tA

ux1>

con

figur

atio

n U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0x11

11 *

45

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0/2/

1 on

eac

h 4

bit

grou

p

16

C

ycle

s tA

ux2>

con

figur

atio

n U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0x11

11 *

45

01 =

1

Setti

ng

0/2/

1 on

eac

h 4

bit

grou

p

60

00

AU

TOM

ATI

SM

01

Tr

ip C

onfig

urat

ion

Bi

nary

(16

bits

)

1 *

Se

tting

0/

6553

5/1

02

La

tche

d C

onfig

urat

ion

Bi

nary

(16

bits

)

0 *

Se

tting

0/

6553

5/1

03

Bl

ocki

ng 1

Con

figur

atio

n

Bina

ry (1

6 bi

ts)

0

*

Setti

ng

0/65

535/

1

04

Bl

ocki

ng 2

Con

figur

atio

n

Bina

ry (1

6 bi

ts)

0

*

Setti

ng

0/65

535/

1

05

Br

oken

con

duct

or d

etec

tion

Bina

ry (1

bit)

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

06

Te

mpo

tBC

U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0 *

6005

= 1

Se

tting

0/

144.

0/0.

01 s

07

Th

resh

old

mod

iinv

/idi

rect

in %

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

20

% *

60

05 =

1

Setti

ng

20/1

00/1

%

08

C

old

load

sta

rt

Bina

ry (1

bit)

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

09

Th

resh

old

of c

old

load

sta

rt

Bina

ry (8

bits

)

0 *

6008

= 1

Se

tting

0/

255/

1

0A

%

of c

old

load

sta

rt

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

50

% *

60

08 =

1

Setti

ng

20/5

00/1

0B

C

old

load

sta

rt T

empo

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

1.

0 s

* 60

08 =

1

Setti

ng

0.1/

3600

.0/0

.1 s

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P1

24/E

N T

08/B

44

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e

CH

APT

ER 8

M

iCO

M P

124

Pa

ge 6

9/98

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

0C

Br

eake

r fa

ilure

Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

0D

I<

Thr

esho

ld fo

r Br

eake

r fa

ilure

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

20

% *

60

0C =

1

Setti

ng

2/10

0/1

%

0E

Te

mpo

tBF

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0.

1 s

* 60

0C =

1

Setti

ng

0/10

.0/0

.01

s

0F

Ph

ase

inst

ant b

lock

ing

Bina

ry (1

bit)

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d 60

0C =

1

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

10

Ea

rth

inst

ant b

lock

ing

Bina

ry (1

bit)

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d 60

0C =

1

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

11

lo

gic

sele

ctiv

ity 1

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

Se

tting

0/

15/1

12

Te

mpo

sél

ectiv

ity1

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

60

11 =

1

Setti

ng

0/15

0.0/

0.01

s

13

lo

gic

sele

ctiv

ity 2

Bi

nary

(4 b

its)

Se

tting

0/

15/1

14

Te

mpo

sél

ectiv

ity 2

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

6013

= 1

Se

tting

0/

150.

0/0.

01 s

61

00

AFF

ECTA

TIO

N D

ES T

S

01

Lo

gica

l inp

ut a

lloca

tion

1 In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

0: n

othi

ng *

1:

del

atch

2:

52

a 3:

52

b 4:

ext

erna

l CB

failu

re

5: E

xter

nal i

nput

1

6: E

xter

nal i

nput

2

7 :

Logi

c bl

ocki

ng 1

8

: Lo

gic

bloc

king

2

9 :

Dis

turb

ance

sta

rt

10 :

Col

d lo

ad s

tart

11

: L

og S

elec

tivity

1

12 :

Log

Sel

ectiv

ity 2

13

: C

hang

e of

gro

up

14 :

Rec

lose

r lo

cked

15

: T

herm

al r

eset

16

: T

rip c

ircui

t su

perv

isio

n

Se

tting

0/

16/1

02

Lo

gica

l inp

ut a

lloca

tion

2 In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2

0: n

othi

ng *

1:

del

atch

2:

52

a

Se

tting

0/

16/1

P124

/EN

T08

/B44

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

CH

APT

ER 8

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e Pa

ge 7

0/98

MiC

OM

P12

4

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

3: 5

2 b

4: e

xter

nal C

B fa

ilure

5:

Ext

erna

l inp

ut 1

6:

Ext

erna

l inp

ut 2

7

: Lo

gic

bloc

king

1

8 :

Logi

c bl

ocki

ng 2

9

: D

istu

rban

ce s

tart

10

: C

old

load

sta

rt

11 :

Log

Sel

ectiv

ity 1

12

: L

og S

elec

tivity

2

13 :

Cha

nge

of g

roup

14

: R

eclo

ser

lock

ed

15 :

The

rmal

res

et

16 :

Trip

circ

uit

supe

rvis

ion

03

Lo

gica

l inp

ut a

lloca

tion

3 In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

0: n

othi

ng *

1:

del

atch

2:

52

a 3:

52

b 4:

ext

erna

l CB

failu

re

5: E

xter

nal i

nput

1

6: E

xter

nal i

nput

2

7 :

Logi

c bl

ocki

ng 1

8

: Lo

gic

bloc

king

2

9 :

Dis

turb

ance

sta

rt

10 :

Col

d lo

ad s

tart

11

: L

og S

elec

tivity

1

12 :

Log

Sel

ectiv

ity 2

13

: C

hang

e of

gro

up

14 :

Rec

lose

r lo

cked

15

: T

herm

al r

eset

16

: T

rip c

ircui

t su

perv

isio

n

Se

tting

0/

16/1

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P1

24/E

N T

08/B

44

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e

CH

APT

ER 8

M

iCO

M P

124

Pa

ge 7

1/98

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

04

Lo

gica

l inp

ut a

lloca

tion

4 In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

0: n

othi

ng *

1:

del

atch

2:

52

a 3:

52

b 4:

ext

erna

l CB

failu

re

5: E

xter

nal i

nput

1

6: E

xter

nal i

nput

2

7 :

Logi

c bl

ocki

ng 1

8

: Lo

gic

bloc

king

2

9 :

Dis

turb

ance

sta

rt

10 :

Col

d lo

ad s

tart

11

: L

og S

elec

tivity

1

12 :

Log

Sel

ectiv

ity 2

13

: C

hang

e of

gro

up

14 :

Rec

lose

r lo

cked

15

: T

herm

al r

eset

16

: T

rip c

ircui

t su

perv

isio

n

Se

tting

0/

16/1

05

Lo

gica

l inp

ut a

lloca

tion

5 In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

0: n

othi

ng *

1:

del

atch

2:

52

a 3:

52

b 4:

ext

erna

l CB

failu

re

5: E

xter

nal i

nput

1

6: E

xter

nal i

nput

2

7 :

Logi

c bl

ocki

ng 1

8

: Lo

gic

bloc

king

2

9 :

Dis

turb

ance

sta

rt

10 :

Col

d lo

ad s

tart

11

: L

og S

elec

tivity

1

12 :

Log

Sel

ectiv

ity 2

13

: C

hang

e of

gro

up

14 :

Rec

lose

r lo

cked

15

: T

herm

al r

eset

16

: T

rip c

ircui

t su

perv

isio

n

Se

tting

0/

16/1

P124

/EN

T08

/B44

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

CH

APT

ER 8

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e Pa

ge 7

2/98

MiC

OM

P12

4

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

06

Ti

mer

aux

1

Setti

ng

0/20

0.0/

0.01

07

Ti

mer

aux

2

Setti

ng

0/20

0.0/

0.01

62

00

CT

ALL

OC

ATI

ON

01

G

ENER

AL

TRIP

Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

02

I>

Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

03

tI>

Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

04

I>

>

Bina

ry (5

bits

)

0000

0 *

Se

tting

0/

31/1

05

t I

>>

Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

06

I>

>>

Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

07

t I

>>

>

Bina

ry (5

bits

)

0000

0 *

Se

tting

0/

31/1

08

I0

>

Bina

ry (5

bits

)

0000

0 *

Se

tting

0/

31/1

09

t I

0>

Bina

ry (5

bits

)

0000

0 *

Se

tting

0/

31/1

0A

I0

>>

Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

0B

t I

0>>

Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

0C

I0

>>

>

Bina

ry (5

bits

)

0000

0 *

Se

tting

0/

31/1

0D

t I

0>>

>

Bina

ry (5

bits

)

0000

0 *

Se

tting

0/

31/1

0E

t

I<

Bina

ry (5

bits

)

0000

0 *

Se

tting

0/

31/1

0F

t I

inv>

Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

10

Th

erm

al a

larm

Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

11

Th

erm

al tr

ip

Bina

ry (5

bits

)

0000

0 *

Se

tting

0/

31/1

12

Br

eake

r al

arm

Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

13

Tr

ip c

ircui

t ala

rm

Bina

ry (5

bits

)

0000

0 *

Se

tting

0/

31/1

14

Br

oken

con

duct

or

Bina

ry (5

bits

)

0000

0 *

Se

tting

0/

31/1

15

Br

eake

r fa

ilure

Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

16

Re

clos

ing

Bina

ry (5

bits

)

0000

0 *

Se

tting

0/

31/1

17

TA

ux 1

Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P1

24/E

N T

08/B

44

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e

CH

APT

ER 8

M

iCO

M P

124

Pa

ge 7

3/98

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

18

TA

ux 2

Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

19

A

utor

eclo

se in

pro

gres

s Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

1A

D

efin

itive

trip

Bi

nary

(5 b

its)

00

000

*

Setti

ng

0/31

/1

63

00

LED

s C

ON

FIG

URA

TIO

N

01

Le

d 5

Bina

ry (1

6 bi

ts)

4

*

Setti

ng

0/65

535/

1

02

Le

d 6

Bina

ry (1

6 bi

ts)

16

*

Se

tting

0/

6553

5/1

03

Le

d 7

Bina

ry (1

6 bi

ts)

32

*

Se

tting

0/

6553

5/1

04

Le

d 8

Bina

ry (1

6 bi

ts)

64

*

Se

tting

0/

6553

5/1

05

Le

d P

F5

Bina

ry (9

bits

)

0 *

Se

tting

0/

511/

1

06

Le

d PF

6 Bi

nary

(9 b

its)

0

*

Setti

ng

0/51

1/1

07

Le

d PF

7 Bi

nary

(9 b

its)

0

*

Setti

ng

0/51

1/1

08

Le

d PF

8 Bi

nary

(9 b

its)

0

*

Setti

ng

0/51

1/1

69

00

SW S

UPE

RV

ISIO

N

01

Tr

ip c

ircui

t sup

ervi

sion

?

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

02

Tr

ip c

ircui

t tim

e ?

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.1

s *

6901

= 1

Se

tting

0.

1/10

.0/0

.05

s

03

SW

Ope

ratin

g tim

e?

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

04

SW

Ope

ratin

g tim

e C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

05 s

* 69

03 =

1

Setti

ng

0.05

/1.0

/0.0

1 s

05

SW

Ope

ratin

g nu

mbe

r?

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

06

SW

Clo

sing

tim

e ?

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.05

s*

6905

= 1

Se

tting

0.

05/1

.0/0

.01

s

07

SW

Clo

sing

tim

e Bi

nary

(1 b

it)

0 D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Se

tting

0/

1/1

08

SW

Ope

ratin

g nu

mbe

r U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

0 *

6907

= 1

Se

tting

0/

5000

0/1

09

SA

2n?

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

d

Setti

ng

0/1/

1

0A

Sa

2n

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0 ex

p+06

A²

* 69

09 =

1

Setti

ng

0/40

00/1

(*ex

p+06

)

P124

/EN

T08

/B44

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

CH

APT

ER 8

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e Pa

ge 7

4/98

MiC

OM

P12

4

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

0B

n

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

1

*

Setti

ng

1/2/

1

0C

TR

IP t

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.1

s*

Se

tting

0.

1/5.

0/0.

05 s

0D

C

LOSE

t C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

0.

1 s*

Setti

ng

0.1/

5.0/

0.05

s

70

00

REC

ORD

ER C

ON

TRO

L (V

ERSI

ON

P1

22 e

t >

)

01

St

art/

Trig

ger

reco

rder

In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2

Stop

ped

Trig

erre

d Ru

nnin

g *

Se

tting

1/

2/1

20

Re

cord

er S

ourc

e In

dexe

d St

ring

0 Sa

mpl

es *

Dat

a

21

Pr

etem

ps

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.1

seco

ndes

Setti

ng

0.1/

3.0/

0.1

22

Po

stem

ps

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

0.1

seco

ndes

Setti

ng

0.1/

3.0/

0.1

80

00

DIS

TURBA

NC

E REC

01

Re

cord

Num

ber

Uns

igne

d in

tege

r (1

byt

e)

0*

Setti

ng

0/5/

1 (s

elon

con

text

e)

02

Tr

igge

r Ti

me

IEC

870

Tim

e &

Dat

e

dd/m

m/y

y hh

:mm

Dat

a

03

A

vaila

ble

Cha

nnel

Bit

Mas

k Bi

nary

Fla

g

Inde

xed

Strin

g

0 1 2 3 4

1111

1

Ia

Ib

Ic

I0

Inpu

ts/O

utpu

ts

D

ata

04

C

hann

el T

ypes

Bi

nary

Fla

g 0:

dig

ital,

1:

anal

ogue

0111

1

Dat

a

05

C

hann

el O

ffset

s Re

peat

ed g

roup

of C

ourie

r nu

mbe

rs

U

ploa

d O

ffset

s

Dat

a

06

Sc

alin

g Fa

ctor

s Re

peat

ed g

roup

of C

ourie

r nu

mbe

rs

U

ploa

d Sc

al. F

acto

rs

D

ata

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

P1

24/E

N T

08/B

44

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e

CH

APT

ER 8

M

iCO

M P

124

Pa

ge 7

5/98

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

07

-0F

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

- r

éser

vé

10

Re

cord

Len

gth

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

Dat

a

11

Tr

igge

r po

sitio

n In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

D

ata

12

Ti

me

Base

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

D

ata

13

N

ON

IMPL

EMEN

TED

- r

eser

ved

14

U

ploa

d Ti

mer

Re

peat

ed g

roup

of I

nteg

ers

D

ata

15

-1F

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

D -

res

erve

d

20

U

ploa

d C

hann

el 0

Re

peat

ed g

roup

of I

nteg

ers

D

ata

21

U

ploa

d C

hann

el 1

Re

peat

ed g

roup

of I

nteg

ers

D

ata

22

U

ploa

d C

hann

el 2

Re

peat

ed g

roup

of I

nteg

ers

D

ata

23

U

ploa

d C

hann

el 3

Re

peat

ed g

roup

of I

nteg

ers

D

ata

24

U

ploa

d C

hann

el In

puts

/Out

puts

Re

peat

ed g

roup

of

Inte

ger/

Bin.

flag

s

Dat

a

90

00

AU

TOM

AT.

FLT

01

Re

cord

num

ber

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

Se

tting

(a

utom

atic

)

02

O

ccur

faul

t dat

e U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

Dat

a

03

A

ctiv

e se

t gro

up

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

1

D

ata

04

Ph

ase

in fa

ult

ASC

II Te

xt (1

0 by

tes)

PH

ASE

A

Dat

a

05

Fa

ult I

d A

SCII

Text

(18

byte

s)

I >

>

Dat

a

06

M

agni

tude

C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int

num

ber

12

.34

A

D

ata

07

Ia

Mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

12.3

4 A

Dat

a

08

Ib

Mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

12.3

4 A

Dat

a

09

Ic

Mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t

12.3

4 A

Dat

a

P124

/EN

T08

/B44

Tech

nica

l Gui

de

CH

APT

ER 8

Com

mun

icat

ion

Dat

abas

e Pa

ge 7

6/98

MiC

OM

P12

4

Col

Ro

w

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

e

Ind

Valu

es

(* :

def

au

lt)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

e M

in/M

ax/

Step

num

ber

0A

In

Mag

nitu

de

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t nu

mbe

r

12.3

4 A

Dat

a

BF

00

CO

MM

SYST

EM D

ATA

01

D

ist R

ecor

d C

ntrl

Ref

Men

u C

ell (

2)

0x

7000

Dat

a

02

D

ist R

ecor

d Ex

trac

t Ref

M

enu

Cel

l (2)

0x80

00

D

ata

03

Se

tting

Tra

nsfe

rt

04

Re

set D

eman

d Ti

mer

s N

ON

IMPL

EMEN

TED

05

Re

set E

vent

Rep

ort

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

D


3.2.2 List of events created by the relay

Code Cell text Cell reference

00 UNKNOWN EVENT -

01 TC CLOSE 0

02 TC TRIP 0

03 DIST TRIG 0

04 UNLOCK TRIP 0

05 SET. CHANGE 0

06 RESET THERM 0

07 SET MAINT MODE 0

08 SET RELAY MAINT MODE 0021

09 I> 0023

10 I>> 0023

11 I>>> 0023

12 IE> 0023

13 IE>> 0023

14 IE>>> 0023

15 TH. ALARM 0023

16 TH OVERLOAD 0023

17 tI> 0023

18 tI>> 0023

19 tI>>> 0023

20 tlE> 0023

21 tlE>> 0023

22 tlE>>> 0023

23 tI< 0023

24 BROKEN CONDUCTOR 0024

25 t Aux1 0024

26 t Aux2 0024

27 BREAKER FAILURE 0024

28 Logic Sel. 1 0020

29 Logic Sel. 2 0020

30 Blocking Logic 1 0020

31 Blocking Logic 2 0020

32 Setting group change 0020

33 52 a 0020


Code Cell text Cell reference

34 52 b 0020

35 ACK RELAY LATCHED ( by Input) 0020

36 External failure from the CB 0020

37 COLD LOAD PICKUP 0020

38 TS Change 0020

39 TRIP : TH OVERLOAD 0

40 TRIP : tI> 0

41 TRIP : tI>> 0

42 TRIP : tI>>> 0

43 TRIP : tlE> 0

44 TRIP : tlE>> 0

45 TRIP : tlE>>> 0

46 TRIP : tI< 0

47 TRIP : BROKEN CONDUCTOR 0

48 TRIP : t Aux 1 0

49 TRIP : t Aux 2 0

50 Output relays change 0021

51 ACK 1 ALARM (FRONT) 0

52 ACK ALARMS (FRONT) 0

53 ACK 1 ALARM (COM) 0

54 ACK ALARMS (COM) 0

55 Major material alarm 0022

56 Minor material alarm 0022

57 I2 > 0024

58 t 2 > 0024

59 OPEN OPERATING TIME 0024

60 TRIP OPERATION Nb 0024

61 SA2N 0024

62 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION 0024

63 CLOSE OPERATING TIME 0024

64 SUCCESS AUTORECLOSE 0024

65 LOCKED AUTORECLOSER 0024

66 AUTORECLOSER CONF. FAIL 0024

67 TRIP : t I2 > 0

NOTA : When the cell reference is different of zero this means that the event is generated on event occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance.


When the cell reference is equal to zero, only the event on edging edge is generated.

Twelve bits are available in the string of characters to describe the contain of the Courier cell:

On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to « 1 ».

On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to « 0 ».

3.3 Setting changes

This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change:

Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits

Preload Setting - Places a new value to the cell, this value is echoed to ensure that setting corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not checked by this action.

Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positive response will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will be returned.

Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change.

This is the most secure method and is ideally suited to on-line editors as the setting limits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However this method can be slow if many settings are being changed as three commands are required for each change.

3.4 Systems integration data

3.4.1 Address of the relay

The relays can have any address between 1 and 254 included. The address 255 corresponds to the global address to which all relays and all the other slave peripheries are responding. The Courier protocol specifies that no response can be resent from a slave periphery to a global message. This permits to avoid that all peripheries respond at the same time creating by this way user conflict on the Bus.

Each relay possess an address settled on 255 in order to guarantee that in case of his connection to the operating network, his address cannot create any conflict with the address of another periphery already in exploitation. In order to permit to a new periphery to get entirely operational, his address has to be settled. The address can be modified manually in capturing the password, than in following the method of the setting change through the user interface on the front plate of the relay.

The same, if the network functioning on a computer takes in charge the auto- addressing, the relay address can be settled on 0 to active the characteristic of auto- addressing of the computer software. The relay receives then the next valid address on the Bus.

If the address is 255 or not known, she can be modified in sending a new address, with a global message, to a periphery possessing a particular serial number. This method is used for those peripheries which are not having any user interface for reading or changing the address in process.

3.4.2 Measured values

Each measured value can be periodically extracted by a selective call of MiCOM P124 relay.


3.4.3 Status word

Each response of a slave periphery contains an octet of status. This octet is resent by the relay at the beginning of each message for signalling important data. The principal workstation can be design for responding automatically to these important data.

The contained indications are the following :

Bit 0 - 1 = Recording of disturbance available for retrieval Bit 1 - 1 = Change of the Unit status word Bit 2 - 1 = Change of the control status word Bit 3 - 1 = Relay busy, no response possible in time Bit 4 - 1 = Relay out of service Bit 5 - 1 = Recording of events available for retrieval Bit 6 - 1 = Switched alarm indicator Bit 7 - 1 = Switched tripping indicator

3.4.4 Unit status word

The unit status word is located in the menu 000C. Each bits pair of the Unit status word serves to indicate the status (position) of the unit elements checked through the relay.

This functionality is not supported on MiCOM P124 relay.

3.4.5 Control status word

The Control status word is located in the cell of the menu 000D. It is used for transmitting the control information of the slave periphery to the central unit. Nevertheless, the relays described in this manual are protection relays, which are not using this control characteristic.

3.4.6 Measurement control

The control functions through the MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay can be executed on a serial link. These functions are supported in particular on the changes of the individual relay settings, on the changes of the setting groups, on the remote control of the circuit breaker, as well as on the functions and the locking of the selected output relays.

The remote control is limited in the control functions selected in the table of the relays menu. The CRC and the controls of the message length are used on each received message. No response is given for messages received with an error detection. The principal unit can be re-initialised in order to resent an order as often as wanted if he is not receiving any response or if he receives a response with an error detection.

NOTE: The control commands are generally materialised by the change of the cell value. They dispose the same inherent security. No response is allowed for the global orders to avoid any user conflict of the Bus. For this type of order, a double start is used for the verification of the message by the relay. The relay transmits then a confirmation indicating that the control order or the change of setting has been accepted. If this is not the case, the relay is sending an error message.


3.4.7 Change of remote measurements

The relay is only responding to the orders of a setting change through the serial port if the SD0 link = 1 is selected. The selection of the SD0 link = 1 is blocking all the changes of remote setting with the exception of the SC logical links and the password capture. When the SD0 link = 0 is selected, the remote setting are protected by the password.

For changing the remote links, the password has to be first remote captured and the SD and SD0 function links have to be settled on 1.

3.5 Event extraction

Events can be extracted either automatically or manually . For automatic extraction all events are extracted in sequential order using the standard Courier mechanism, this includes fault. The manual approach allows the user to select events, faults at random from the stored records.

3.5.1 Automatic event extraction

This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it is produced via the rear port.

When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte, this indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest, unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command. The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0 or Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records.

Once an event has been extracted from the relay the Accept Event can be used to confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted the next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as before.

3.5.2 Event types

Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances:

• Change of state of output contact

• Change of state of opto input

• Protection element operation

• Alarm condition

• Setting Change

• Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event)


3.5.3 Event format

The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the relay:

• Cell Reference

• Timestamp

• Cell Text

• Cell Value

The table of the events created by the relay (3.2.2) indicates how the contents of the above fields are interpreted. Fault records will return a Courier Type 3 event which contains the above fields together with two additional fields:

• Event extraction column

• Event number

These events contain additional information which is extracted from the relay using the referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a setting which allows the fault record to be selected. This setting should be set to the event number value returned within the record, the extended data can be extracted from the relay by uploading the text and data from the column.

3.5.4 Manual record extraction

Column 02 of the database can be used for manual viewing fault records. The contents of this column will depend of the nature of the record selected. It is possible to select directly a fault record.

Fault Record Selection (Row 01) - This cell can be used to directly select a fault record using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault records (0 will be the most recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will then contain the details of the fault record selected (row 02 to 0A)

It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from the relay the number associated with a particular record will change when a new fault occurs.

3.6 Disturbance record extraction

The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible via the Courier interface.

Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest unextracted record, older records will be assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more recent records. To facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit of the Status byte is set by the relay whenever there are unextracted disturbance records.

Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted using the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B.

As has been stated the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide.


4. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE

The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave device. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relay conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported.

The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:

• Initialisation (Reset)

• Time Synchronisation

• Event Record Extraction

• General Interrogation

• Cyclic Measurements

• General Commands

4.1 Physical connection and link layer

Connection is available for IEC60870-5-103 through the rear RS485 port. It is possible to select both the relay address and baud rate using the front panel interface. Following a change, a reset command is required to re-establish communications.

The parameters of the communication are the following :

• Even Parity

• 8 Data bits

• 1 stop bit

• Data rate 9600 or 19200 bauds

4.2 Initialisation

Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have been changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relay's transmit buffer.

The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5, the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The following information will be contained in the data section of this ASDU:

Manufacturer Name: Schneider Electric

The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relay model number to identify the type of relay, eg P124.

In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it will also produce a power up event.


4.3 Time synchronisation

The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the time synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronisation message will be returned as Class 1 data.

4.4 Spontaneous events

The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function type/information numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes are not used, thus any events that cannot be passed using the standardised messages will not be sent.

Events are categorised using the following information:

• Common Address

• Function Type

• Information number

Section 4.10 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. The common address is used to differentiate in circumstances where the relay produces more events of a certain type than can be passed using the standardised messages. For example if the relay produces starts and trips for three stages of overcurrent only two stages can be passed using the standardised messages.

Using the different common address for two of the overcurrent stages allows each stage to be indicated. The table in 4.10 of the present chapter shows the common address as an offset value. The common address offset will be added to the station address in order to pass these events.

4.5 General interrogation

The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, information numbers and common address offsets that will be returned during the GI cycle are indicated in 4.10.

4.6 Cyclic measurements

The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used).

It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value. The selection of either 1.2 or 2.4 for a particular value is indicated in 4.10.

4.7 Commands

A list of the supported commands is contained in 4.10. The relay will respond to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command.

4.8 Disturbance records

The disturbance records stored by the relay cannot be extracted using the mechanism defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The relay maintains compatibility with the VDEW control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with no disturbance records at the start of every GI cycle.


4.9 Blocking of monitor direction

The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction.

4.10 List of events produced by the relay

Two kinds of ASDU can be generated for the events : ASDU 1 (time-tagged message) or ASDU2 (Time-tagged message with relative time)

The list of events is the following with the associated values : INFORMATION NUMBER, TYPE OF ASDU ,CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION and COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU

Status indication in monitor direction :

− Auto-recloser active : INF <16>; TYP <1>;COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑

− LED reset : INF <19>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> − Characteristic 1 : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑

− Characteristic 2 : INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑

− Logic input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑




− Logic input 5 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS+1> ↓↑

Supervision indications in monitor direction :

− Trip circuit supervision : INF <36>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑

Fault indications in monitor direction :

− Start/pick-up N : INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑

− General TRIP : INF <68>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>

− TRIP L1 : INF <69>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>

− TRIP L2 : INF <70>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− TRIP L3 : INF <71>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> − General start : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑

− Breaker failure : INF <85>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− TRIP I> : INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− TRIP I>> : INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− TRIP I>>> : INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS+1>

− TRIP IN> : INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− TRIP IN>>: INF <93>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− TRIP IN>>> : INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS+1>

− Auto-reclosure indications in monitor direction

− CB 'on' by AR : INF <128>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

− CB 'on' by long time AR : INF <129>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> − AR blocked : INF <130>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑

NOTA : The italics events are only valid for the MiCOM P124. The double arrow ↓↑ means the event is generated on event occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance.

• List of data contained in General Interrogation


Status indication in monitor direction :

− Auto-recloser active : INF <16>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>

− Characteristic 1 : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>

− Characteristic 2 : INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>

− Auxiliary input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>




− Auxiliary input 5 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS+1>

Supervision indications in monitor direction :

− Trip circuit supervision : INF <36>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>

Fault indications in monitor direction :

− Start/pick-up N : INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT <9>,<ADDRESS>

− General start : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>

Auto-reclosure indications in monitor direction

− AR blocked : INF <130>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>

• Cyclic measurements

The selection of either 1.2 or 2.4 for a particular value is the following :

For the current value Ia, Ib and Ic the rate is equal to 2.4

For the frequency the rate is equal to 1.2

The other fields of ASDU 9 are not updated.

• List of the supported commands

⇒ Autorecloser ON/OFF only on MiCOM P123 : INF<16>, TYP<20>, COT <20>

⇒ LED reset . This command corresponds to the acknowledgment of all alarms by the front plate on MiCOM P12x products : INF<19>, TYP<20>, COT <20>

⇒ Charcateristic 1 : INF<23>, TYP<20>, COT <20>

⇒ Characteristic 2 : INF<23>, TYP<20>, COT <20>


5. DNP 3.0 CONFIGURATION/INTEROPERABILITY GUIDE

5.1 Introduction

The purpose of this document is to describe the specific implementation of the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) 3.0 within P12x.

P12x uses the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library Version 2.18.

This document, in conjunction with the DNP 3.0 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP Subset Definitions Document, provides complete information on how to communicate with P12x via the DNP 3.0 protocol.

This implementation of DNP 3.0 is fully compliant with DNP 3.0 Subset Definition Level 2, contains many Subset Level 3 features, and contains some functionality even beyond Subset Level 3.

5.2 DNP V3.00 device profile

The following table provides a irDevice Profile DocumentlK in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions as a isDocument,l. it is only a component of a total interoperability guide. This table, in combination with the following should provide a complete interoperability/configuration guide for P12x :

• the Implementation Table provided in Section 0 (beginning on page 66),

• the Point List Tables provided in Section 5.4 (beginning on page 69),

DNP V3.00

DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

(Also see the Implementation Table in Section 0, beginning on page 66.)

Vendor Name: Schneider Electric

Device Name: SERIAL 20 Platform using the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source

Code Library, Version 2.18.

Highest DNP Level Supported:

For Requests: Level 2

For Responses: Level 2

Device Function:

Master

Slave

Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table):

For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00 and 01 (start-stop), 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported in addition to request qualifier code 06 (no range – or all points).

Static object requests received with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests received with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28.

For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.

16-bit and 32-bit Analog Change Events with Time may be requested.

The read function code for Object 50 (Time and Date), variation 1, is supported.

Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets):

Transmitted: 292

Received 292

Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):

Transmitted: 2048

Received: 2048


DNP V3.00



Maximum Data Link Re-tries: ! None " Fixed at 2 ! Configurable

Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:

" None ! Configurable

Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: " Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Requires Application Layer Confirmation: Never Always " When reporting Event Data " When sending multi-fragment responses Sometimes Configurable

Timeouts while waiting for: Data Link Confirm: None " Fixed at 100 ms Variable Configurable Complete Appl. Fragment: " None Fixed at ____ Variable Configurable Application Confirm: None " Fixed at 1s Variable Configurable Complete Appl. Response: " None Fixed at ____ Variable Configurable

Others: Binary input change scanning period: 5ms Analog input change scanning period: 1s

Sends/Executes Control Operations: WRITE Binary Outputs " Never Always Sometimes Configurable SELECT/OPERATE Never " Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE Never " Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Never " Always Sometimes Configurable

Count > 1 " Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse On Never " Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse Off " Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch On " Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch Off " Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Queue " Never Always Sometimes Configurable Clear Queue " Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested:

Never " Only time-tagged Configurable

Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested:

Never " Binary Input Change With Time Binary Input Change With Relative Time Configurable (attach explanation)


DNP V3.00



Sends Unsolicited Responses:

" Never Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes (attach explanation) ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED Function codes supported

Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:

" Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change

No other options are permitted.

Default Counter Object/Variation:

No Counters Reported Configurable " Default Object: 20 Default Variation: 5 Point-by-point list attached

Counters Roll Over at:

No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) " 16 Bits " 32 Bits Other Value: _____ " Point-by-point list attached

Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:

" Yes No


5.3 Implementation table

The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the P12x in both request messages and in response messages.

For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.

In the table below text shaded as Subset Level 3 indicates Subset Level 3 functionality (beyond Subset Level 2), and text shaded as beyond Subset Level 3 indicates functionality beyond Subset Level 3.

OBJECT REQUEST

(Library will parse) RESPONSE (Library will

respond with)

Object Number

Variation Number

Description Function Codes (dec)

Qualifier Codes (hex)

Function Codes (dec)


1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)

1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)

1 1 (default

see note 1)

Binary Input 1 (read) 22 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)

129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index see note 2)

2 0 Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)

1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty)

2 1 (default see note 1 for P120 -

P121)

Binary Input Change without Time


129 (response) 17, 28 (index)

2 2 (default

see note 1)

Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty)


10 0 Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)


10 2 (default

see note 1)

Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)


12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3 (select) 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6 (dir. op, noack)

00, 01 (start-stop) 0 7, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)

129 (response) echo of request

20 0 Binary Counter (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)

1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. noack)

00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)

20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. noack)



20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. noack)




OBJECT REQUEST


respond with)

Object Number

Variation Number





20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag



129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (indexsee note 2)

20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag




21 0 Frozen Counter (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)


21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)


21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)


21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag



21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag



30 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)


30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)


30 2 (default see

note 1)

16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)


30 3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag



30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag



32 0 Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)


32 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time



32 2 (default see

note 1)

16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time



32 3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time




OBJECT REQUEST


respond with)

Object Number

Variation Number





32 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time



50 0 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)


50 1 default see

note 1)

Time and Date 1 (read) 2 (write)



52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited qty) (qty = 1)

60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)

60 1 Class 0 Data 1 (read)

06 (no range, or all) 129 17,28


06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty)

129 17,28



129 17,28



129 17,28

80 1 Internal Indications 2 (write) 00 (start-stop) (index must =7)

No Object (function code only) See Note 3 13 (cold restart)

No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)

No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)

NOTE 1: A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.

NOTE 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)

NOTE 3: For P12x, a cold restart is implemented as a warm restart the executable is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.


5.4 Point List

The tables in the following sections identify all the individual data points provided by this implementation of DNP 3.0. P12x uses the database protection.

5.4.1 Binary Input Points

Every Binary Input Status points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of classes 1, 2 or 3.

Binary Input Points

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1

Change Event Object Number: 2

Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)

Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)

Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)

Point Index

Name/Description init val. Change Event Class

(1, 2, 3 or none)

0 Output relay 1 (trip) 0 1

1 Output r elay 2 0 2



4 Output relay 0 ( watch dog) 0 2



9 Opto isolator 1 0 2





14 Phase overcurrent stage 1 start 0 1

15 Phase overcurrent stage 1 trip 0 1





20 Earth overcurrent stage 1 start 0 1

21 Earth overcurrent stage 1 trip 0 1





26 tI< 0 1

27 thermal start 0 1

28 thermal trip 0 1

29 taux1 0 1


Binary Input Points






Point Index


(1, 2, 3 or none)

30 taux2 0 1

31 broken conductor 0 1

32 cb failure 0 1

33 I2> start 0 1

34 tI2> trip 0 1

35 number of cb operation 0 1

36 Cb operation time alarm 0 1

37 sa2n 0 1

38 trip circuit alarm 0 1

39 cb close time alarm 0 1

40 Recloser locked 0 1

41 Recloser success 0 1

42 Recloser running 0 1

43 Logic selectivity 1 0 1

44 Logic selectivity 2 0 1

45 Blocking logic 1 0 1

46 Blocking logic 2 0 1

47 52a 0 1

48 52b 0 1

49 CB external failure 0 1

50 Cold load pick up 0 1

51 Unlatch by logic input 0 1

52 Unlatch RL1 by remote command 0 1

53 Close remote command 0 1

54 Trip remote command 0 1

55 Reset thermal state by communication 0 1

56 Maintenance mode 0 1

57 Major hardware alarm 0 1

58 Minor hardware alarm 0 1

59 Phase overcurrent stage 1 trip alarm (latched) 0 3



62 Earth overcurrent stage 1 trip alarm (latched) 0 3



Binary Input Points






Point Index


(1, 2, 3 or none)


65 tI< alarm (latched) 0 3

66 thermal start alarm (latched) 0 3

67 thermal trip alarm (latched) 0 3

68 taux1 alarm (latched) 0 3

69 taux2 alarm (latched) 0 3

70 broken conductor alarm (latched) 0 3

71 cb failure alarm (latched) 0 3

72 tI2> alarm (latched) 0 3

73 Cb operation time alarm(latched) 0 3

74 number of cb operation (latched) 0 3

75 sa2n alarm (latched) 0 3

76 trip circuit alarm(latched) 0 3

77 cb close time alarm ( latched) 0 3

78 Conflict recloser 0 3


5.4.2 Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks

The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the Control Relay Output Blocks (Object 12).

Binary Output Status points are not included in class 0 polls.

Binary Output Status Points

Object Number: 10


Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)

Control Relay Output Blocks

Object Number: 12

Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)

Point Index

Name/Description Initial Status

Value

Supported Control Relay Output Block

Fields

0 Unlatch of the relays 0 Pulse On

1 First alarm acknowledge 0 Pulse On

2 All alarm acknowledge 0 Pulse On

3 Trip c ommand 0 Pulse O n

4 Close command 0 Pulse On

5 Change of setting group 0 Pulse On

6 Thermal state reset 0 Pulse On

7 Peak and average value reset 0 Pulse On

8 RAM hardware alarm acknowledge 0 Pulse On

9 Reclose counter reset 0 Pulse On


5.4.3 Counters

The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.

Binary Counters and Frozen Counters are not included in class 0 polls.

P120 and P121 do not support binary Counters and Frozen Counters.

Binary Counters

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20 Change Event Object Number: not supported Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze and clear, noack) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported

Frozen Counters

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21 Change Event Object Number: not supported Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Frozen Binary without Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported

Point Index

Name/Description Data type

0 Max I a R ms D1

1 Max I b R ms D1

2 Max I c R ms D1

3 Average I a R ms D1

4 Average I b R ms D1

5 Average I c R ms D1

6 CB operations D2

7 Σ Amps (n) Ia D3

8 Σ Amps (n) Ib D3

9 Σ Amps (n) Ic D3

10 total number of reclosing shots D2

11 cycle 1 number D2




15 definitive trip number D2

16 close command number D2


5.4.4 Analog Inputs

The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of Analog Inputs, Analog Output Control Blocks, and Analog Output Statuses are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767. For each point, the ihScaling and Unitsli column indicates the value of a transmitted 32767. This also implies the value of a transmitted 32767. The entry in the column does not imply a valid value for the point.

Always indicating the representation of 32767 in the tables below is a consistent method for representing scale, applicable to all scaling possibilities.

The ihDefault Deadband,ln and the ihDefault Change Event Assigned Classl columns are used to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before an analog change event will be generated, and once generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3) will the change event be reported. Only the default values for these columns are documented here because the values may change in operation due to either local (user-interface) or remote (through DNP) control.

Every Analog Inputs points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of classes 1, 2 or 3.

Analog Inputs Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Analog Change Event w/o Time) Change Event Scan Rate: The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s

Point Index Name/Description

Initial Value

Scaling and Units (representation of

32767 see above) Valid Range

Change Event Dead-band

Initial Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or

none)

0 active group 1 32767 1 à 2 1 1

1 module IA 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.1 In 2

2 module IB 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.1 In 2

3 module IC 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.1 In 2

4 module IN 0 40 I0n 0 to 40 I0n 0.02 In 2

5 rms IA 0A 327.67A 0 to 40000000 A/100

10% 2

6 rms IB 0A 327.67A 0 to 40000000 A/100

10% 2

7 rms IC 0A 327.67A 0 to 40000000 A/100

10% 2

8 rms IN 0A 327.67A 0 to 40000000 A/100

10% 2

9 thermal state 0% 32767% 0 to 65535 10 2

10 frequency 0 327,67 Hz 45Hz to 65 Hz and 99.99Hz ==

ERROR

1Hz 2

11 module I2 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.1 In 2

12 module I1 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.1 In 2

13 trip time 0 327.67s 0 to 10.00s 10 ms 2

14 close time 0 327.67s 0 to 10.00s 10 ms 2

Technical Guide P124/EN TA1/B44 MiCOM P124

APPENDIX 1 Connection diagrams

Technical Guide P124/EN TA1/B44 Connection Diagrams APPENDIX 1 MICOM P124 Page 1/6

MiCOM P124 Self-powered model Typical application diagram

P12

4S

elt-

po

wer

ed m

od

el

3 p

has

e C

Ts

con

nec

tio

nC

B

A

3537 36 44 42 40 39+

41-

Wat

chd

og

Tri

p o

utp

ut

for

CB

co

il

Tri

p o

utp

ut

for

stri

ker

Cas

e ea

rth

con

nec

tio

n

No

tes

:(1

)

(2)

(a)

CT

co

nn

ecti

on

s ar

e ty

pic

al o

nly

CT

sh

ort

ing

lin

ks m

od

e b

efo

re (

b)

and

(c)

dis

con

nec

t

(b)

Sh

ort

term

inal

s b

reak

bef

ore

(c)

(c)

Lo

ng

term

inal

s

(d)

Pin

s te

rmin

als

(p c

b t

ype)

RL

0

RL

1

Ph

ase

rota

tio

n

Alt

ern

ativ

e :

3 p

has

e C

Ts

+ co

re b

alan

ced

CT

co

nn

ecti

on

A B C

P2

P1

S2

S1

49 501

A o

u 5A

1 A

ou

5 A

1 A

ou

5 A

S2

S1

-

-

51 52 53 54 56 55 48 47

1 A

ou

5A

1 A

ou

5A

A B C

P2

P1

S2

S1

49 501

A o

u 5A

1 A

ou

5 A

-

51 52 53 54 56 55

1 A

ou

5A

1 A

ou

5A

48 47

30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56

29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55

Mo

du

le t

erm

inal

blo

ckvi

ewed

fro

m r

ear

Alt

ern

ativ

e :

2 p

has

e C

Ts

+ co

re b

alan

ced

CT

co

nn

ecti

on

A B C

P2

P1

S2

S1

49 501

A o

u 5A

1 A

ou

5 A

S2

S1

-

51 52 53 54 56 55 48 47

1 A

ou

5A

1 A

ou

5A

SCHEME REPRESENTING MiCOM RELAY OFF

P124/EN TA1/B44 Technical Guide APPENDIX 1 Connection Diagrams Page 2/6 MiCOM P124

MiCOM P124 self-powered model Rear connections

In case of Self-powered model, only one 28 connection points Midos connector is used following the diagram below :

29

31

33

35

37

39

41

43

45

47

49

51

53

55

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

44

46

48

50

52

54

56

NC

NC

NC

Common RL0 (Watchdog)

NC

Common RL1 (trip)

RL1 (trip) normally closed contact

RL1 (trip) normally open contact

Reserve, do not use

Common earth current inputfor 3CTs connectionCommun

Phase A

Common Phase B

Common Phase C

Common earth current input(2)

NC

NC

NC

RL0 (WD) normally closed contact

RL0 (WD) normally open contact

Striker output +

Striker output -

Reserved, do not use

Reserve, do not use

Earth current input (1)for 3CTs connection

Phase A (1)

Phase B (1)

Phase C (1)

Earth current input (1)(2)

Rear view, connector 1 :

NC : no connected

(1) the current inputs are 1 or 5A and defined on ordering code

(2) inputs used when it is necessary to power the MiCOM P124 relay via the earth current input.


MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model Typical application diagram

C

A

3537 36 44 42 40 39+

41-

30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56

29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

RL

0

RL

1

11-

13+

15-

17+

19-

21+

23-

25+

3334

+-

27-

6 4 2R

L2

12 10 8R

L3

22 20 18R

L4

28 26 24R

L5

5 3 1R

L6

*

29 30

+ -31 32

A B C

P2

P1

S2

S1

49 50

S2

S1

-

-

51 52 53 54 56 55 48 47

A B

BC

P2

P1

S2

S1

49 50

-

51 52 53 541A

or

5A

1A o

r 5A

1A o

r 5A

1A o

r 5A

1A o

r 5A

1A o

r 5A

1A o

r 5A

1A o

r 5A

1A o

r 5A

56 55 48 47 9 +

1

Wat

chd

og

Trip

ou

tpu

tco

nta

ct fo

r C

B c

oil

Pro

gra

mm

eble

ou

tpu

t

Pro

gra

mm

eble

o

utp

ut

Trip

ou

tpu

tfo

r st

rike

r

Cas

e ea

rth

con

nec

tio

n

RS

485

com

mu

nic

atio

n p

ort

P12

4D

ual

-po

wer

edm

od

el

3 p

has

e C

Ts

con

nec

tio

n

(*)

term

inat

ing

res

isto

r fo

r th

e la

stre

lay

to b

e co

nn

ecte

d b

etw

een

30-3

2

Au

xilia

rysu

pp

ly

CT

s sh

ort

ing

lin

ks m

od

eb

efo

re (

b)

and

(c)

dis

con

nec

t

Lo

ng

ter

min

als

Pin

s te

rmin

als

(p c

b t

ype)

CT

co

nn

ecti

on

s ar

e ty

pic

al o

nly

(2)

(1)

(a)

No

tes

:

(b)

(c)

(d)

Pro

gra

mm

eble

o

utp

ut

Pro

gra

mm

eble

o

utp

ut

Pro

gra

mm

eble

o

utp

ut

Mo

du

le t

erm

inal

blo

ckvi

ewed

fro

m r

ear

Alt

ern

ativ

e :

3 p

has

e C

Ts

+ co

re b

alan

ced

CT

co

nn

ecti

on

.

Ph

ase

rota

tio

n

Pro

gra

mm

able

inp

ut

L1

Pro

gra

mm

able

inp

ut

L2

Pro

gra

mm

able

inp

ut

L3

Pro

gra

mm

able

inp

ut

L4

Pro

gra

mm

able

inp

ut

L5

A B C

P2

P1

S2

S1

49 50

S2

S1

-

51 52 53 54 56 55 48 47

1A o

r 5A

1A o

r 5A

1A o

r 5A

1A o

r 5A

1A o

r 5A

Alt

ern

ativ

e :

3 p

has

e C

Ts

+ co

re b

alan

ced

CT

co

nn

ecti

on

.

Sh

ort

ter

min

als

bre

ak b

efo

re (

c)

SHEME REPRESENTING MiCOM RELAY OFF


MiCOM Dual-powered model Rear connections

In case of dual-powered model, two 28 connection points Midos connectors (total 56 connection points) are used following the diagram below :


29

31

33

35

37

39

41

43

45

47

49

51

53

55

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

44

46

48

50

52

54

56

RS485 terminating resistor for the last relay

RS485 -

Auxiliary suppl -

Common RL0 (Watchdog)

NC

Common RL1 (trip)

RL1 (trip) normally closed contact

RL1 (trip) normally open contact

Reseved, do not use

Common earth current inputFor 3CTs connection

Common Phase A

Common Phase B

Common Phase C

Common earth current input(2)

0V (to be linked to the earth case)

RS485+

Auxiliary supply +

RL0 (WD) normally closed contact

RL0 (WD) normally open contact

Striker output +

Striker output -

Reserved, do not use

Reseved, do not use

Earth current input (1)for 3CTs connection

Phase A (1)

Phase B (1)

Phase C (1)

Earth current input(1)(2)

NC : no connected

(1) the current inputs are 1 or 5A and defined on ordering code

(2) inputs used when it is necessary to power the MiCOM P124 relay via the earth current input.


MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model Real connections (continued)

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

Common RL2

RL2 normally closed contact

RL6 normally open contact

Common RL3

RL3 normally closedcontact


NCR

NC

Common RL4



Common RL5



Common RL6

RL6 normally closed contact


NC

Logic input EL1+

Logic input EL1 -

Logic input EL2+

Logic input EL2 -

Logic input EL3+

Logic input EL3 -

Logic input EL4+

Logic input EL4 -

Logic input EL5+

Logic input EL5 -


NC : no connected


BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide P124/EN TA2/B44 MiCOM P124

APPENDIX 2 Commissioning Test and Record

Sheets

Technical Guide P124/EN TA2/B44 Commissioning test and APPENDIX 2 record sheets MiCOM P124 Page 1/32

CONTENT

1. COMMISSIONING TEST SHEETS 3

1.1 Relay identification 3

1.2 Commissioning test record 3

2. COMMISSIONING SETTING RECORD SHEETS 7

2.1 MiCOM P124 Self-powered model 7

2.1.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu 7

2.1.2 CONFIGURATION / CT Ratio Menu 7




2.2 MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model 11

2.2.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu 11


2.2.3 COMMUNICATION Menu 13

2.2.4 PROTECTION G1 Menu 14

2.2.5 PROTECTION G2 Menu 19

2.2.6 AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu 23


P124/EN TA2/B44 Technical Guide APPENDIX 2 Commissioning test and record sheets Page 2/32 MiCOM P124

BLANK PAGE


1. COMMISSIONING TEST SHEETS

1.1 Relay identification

Commissioning date : ________________________________________________

Engineer : ________________________________________________

Substation : ________________________________________________

Circuit : ________________________________________________

Rated frequency : ________________________________________________

Model ! !

P124 Self-powered model

P124 Dual-powered model

Serial number : __________________________________________________

Rated current In : __________________________________________________

Auxiliary voltage Uaux (Dual-powered model only): __________________________________________________ Communication protocol (Dual-powered model only): __________________________________________________ Language : __________________________________________________

1.2 Commissioning test record

(put a cross after each checked stage)

Serial number check ? !

All current transformer shorting switches closed ? !

Wiring checked against diagram (if available) ? !

Case earth installed ? !

Test block connections checked (if installed) ? !

Insulation tested ? !


Auxiliary supply control (Dual-powered model only)

Auxiliary voltage to relay ! Auxiliary voltage value ___________ Vdc/Vac

Watchdog contacts

With auxiliary supply off Terminals 35 36 37 !

With auxiliary supply on Terminals 35 36 37 !

NOTE : for the Self-powered model the watchdog test is done with the battery box MiCOM E1.


Measurements

Applied value Relay value

Phase CT input

Phase A current _____________A ______________A

Phase B current _____________A ______________A

Phase C current _____________A ______________A

Earth CT input

Earth current _____________A ______________A

Phase protection test

Theoretical value Relay value

I> threshold _____________A

I> threshold ______________A

I> drop threshold ______________A

Time delay

Time delay at 2 x I> _____________ms ______________ms

Time delay at 10 x I> _____________ms ______________ms

I>> threshold _____________A

I>> threshold ______________A

I>> drop threshold ______________A

Time delay

Time delay at 2 x I>> _____________A ______________A

Time delay at 10 x I>> _____________A ______________A


Earth protection test

Theoretical value Relay value

Ie> threshold _______________A

Ie> threshold ______________A

Ie> drop threshold ______________A

Time delay

Time delay at 2 x Ie> ______________ms ______________ms

Time delay at 10 x Ie> ______________ms ______________ms

Ie>> threshold ______________A

Ie>> threshold ______________A

Ie>> drop threshold ______________A

Time delay

Time delay at 2 x Ie>> ______________ms ______________ms

Time delay at 10 x Ie>> ______________ms ______________ms

Commissioning Engineer Date

____________________________________________ ______________


2. COMMISSIONING SETTING RECORD SHEETS

2.1 MiCOM P124 Self-powered model

2.1.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu

Password : ________________________________________

Reference : ________________________________________

Software version : ________________________________________

Frequency: ! 50 Hz ! 60 Hz

2.1.2 CONFIGURATION / CT Ratio Menu

Line CT primary Primary phase CT ratio

E/Gnd CT primary Primary earth CT ratio

P124/EN TA2/B44 Technical Guide APPENDIX 2 Commissioning test and record sheets Page 8/32 MiCOM P124 2.1.3 PROTECTION Menu

2.1.3.1 Phase Overcurrent [50/51]

2.1.3.1.A [50/51] I>

I> ? ! YES ! NO

I> In

Delay Type ! IDMT ! DMT ! RI

2.1.3.1.A.A [51] I> DMT

tI> ms

2.1.3.1.A.B [51] I> IDMT

! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

Idmt

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

Tms

2.1.3.1.A.C [51] I> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.1.3.1.A.D [51] I> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.1.3.1.A.E [51] I> RI

K

t Reset ms

2.1.3.1.B [51] I>>

I>> ? ! YES ! NO

I>> In

tI>> ms

2.1.3.1.C [51] I>>>

I>>> ? ! YES ! NO

I>>> In

tI>>> ms


2.1.3.2 Earth Overcurrent [50N/51N]

2.1.3.2.A [50N/51N] E/Gnd

le> ? ! YES ! NO

le> len


2.1.3.2.A.A [51N] Ie > DMT

tle> ms

2.1.3.2.A.B [51N] Ie > IDMT

! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

Idmt

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

Tms

2.1.3.2.A.C [51N] Ie> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.1.3.2.A.D [51N] Ie> IDMT reset time

Rtms ms

2.1.3.2.A.E [51N] Ie> RI

K

t Reset ms

2.1.3.2.B [51N] Ie>>

le>> ? ! YES ! NO

Ie>> Ien

tIe>> ms

2.1.3.2.C [51N] Ie>>>

Ie>>> ? ! YES ! NO

Ie>>> Ien

tIe>>> ms


2.1.3.3 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD

Therm OL ? ! YES ! NO

Iθ > In

Te ms

k

θ Trip %

θ Alarm ? ! YES ! NO

θ Alarm %


2.1.4.1 TRIP Command allocation

Trip tI> ! YES ! NO

Trip tI>> ! YES ! NO

Trip tI>>> ! YES ! NO

Trip tIe> ! YES ! NO

Trip tIe>> ! YES ! NO

Trip tIe>>> ! YES ! NO

Trip Thermal θ ! YES ! NO

2.1.5 RECORDS Menu

2.1.5.1 TIME PEAK VALUE

Time Window mn

Technical Guide P124/EN TA2/B44 Commissioning test and APPENDIX 2 record sheets MiCOM P124 Page 11/32 2.2 MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model

2.2.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu

Password : ________________________________________

Reference : ________________________________________

Software version : ________________________________________

Frequency: ! 50 Hz ! 60 Hz


2.2.2.1 Display

Phase A Text ! A ! L1 ! R

Phase B Text ! B ! L2 ! S

Phase C Text ! C ! L3 ! T

E/Gnd Text ! N ! E ! G

2.2.2.2 CT Ratio

Line CT primary Primary phase CT ratio

E/Gnd CT primary Primary earth CT ratio

2.2.2.3 Configuration of the trip output relay RL1 operation

Fail-safe operation ! YES ! NO


2.2.2.4 LEDs 5 to 8 configuration

Functions LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8

I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Therm Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Brkn. Cond ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

CB Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI2> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Input 1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO





T Aux 1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

T Aux 2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Recloser Run ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Recloser Blocked ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO


2.2.2.5 Group selection configuration

Setting group ! Group 1 ! Group 2

Change group input configuration ! on edge ! on level

2.2.2.6 Alarm operation

Instantaneous alarm : self-reset operation ! YES ! NO

Display of alarm battery message in case of battery or backed RAM memory failure

! YES ! NO

2.2.2.7 Configuration of the input mode operation

EL 5 4 3 2 1 Inputs

! ! ! ! !

2.2.2.8 Format of the Modbus date

Format of the date ! IEC ! PRIVATE

2.2.3 COMMUNICATION Menu

2.2.3.1 COMMUNICATION Menu (MODBUS)

Communication ? ! YES ! NO

! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1 200 bds ! 2 400 bds

! 4 800 bds ! 9 600 bds

Baud Rate

! 19 200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Parity ! Odd ! Even ! None

Data bits ! 7 ! 8

Stop bits ! 1 ! 2

Relay Address

2.2.3.2 COMMUNICATION Menu (Courier)


Relay Address


2.2.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu (IEC 60870-5-103)


! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1 200 bds ! 2 400 bds

! 4 800 bds ! 9 600 bds Baud Rate

! 19 200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Relay Address

2.2.3.4 COMMUNICATION Menu (DNP3)


! 300 bds ! 600 bds

! 1 200 bds ! 2 400 bds

! 4 800 bds ! 9 600 bds Baud Rate

! 19 200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Relay Address

2.2.4 PROTECTION G1 Menu


2.2.4.1.A [50/51] I>

l> ? ! YES ! NO

l> ln


2.2.4.1.A.A [51] I> DMT

tl> ms

2.2.4.1.A.B [51] I> IDMT

! IEC SI ! IEC STI ! IEC RC

! IEC VI ! IEC EI ! IEC LTI ! CO2 ! IEEE MI ! CO8

Idmt

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI Tms



t Reset ms


Rtms

2.2.4.1.A.E [51] I> RI

K

t Reset ms

2.2.4.1.B [51] I>>

I>> ? ! YES ! NO

I>> In

tI>> ms

2.2.4.1.C [51] I>>>

I>>> ? ! YES ! NO

I>>> In

tI>>> ms


2.2.4.2.A [50N/51N] E/Gnd

le> ? ! YES ! NO le> len

Delay Type ! IDMT ! DMT ! RI ! LABOR.

2.2.4.2.A.A [51N] Ie > DMT

tle> ms

2.2.4.2.A.B [51N] Ie > IDMT



Idmt



2.2.4.2.A.C [51N] Ie> LABOR.

Delay type LABOR.

Idmt ! 1 ! 2 ! 3

2.2.4.2.A.D [51N] Ie> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.2.4.2.A.E [51N] Ie> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.2.4.2.A.F [51N] Ie> RI

K

t Reset ms

2.2.4.2.B [51N] Ie>>

Ie>> ? ! YES ! NO

Ie>> Ien

tIe>> ms

2.2.4.2.C [51N] Ie >>>

Ie>>> ? ! YES ! NO

Ie>>> Ien

tIe>>> ms


[49] Therm OL ? ! YES ! NO

Iθ > In

Te ms

k

θ Trip %

[49] θ Alarm ? ! YES ! NO

θ Alarm %

2.2.4.4 [37] UNDERCURRENT I<

I< ? ! YES ! NO

I< %

tI< ms


2.2.4.5 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>

I2> ? ! YES ! NO

I2> In


2.2.4.5.A [46] I2> DMT

tI2> ms

2.2.4.5.B [46] I2> IDMT

! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

Idmt

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

Tms

2.2.4.5.C [46] I2> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.2.4.5.D [46] I2> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.2.4.5.E [46] I2> RI

K

t Reset ms


2.2.4.6 [79] AUTORECLOSER (OPTION)

[79] Autoreclose ? ! YES ! NO

Ext CB Fail ? ! YES ! NO

Ext CB Fail Time ms

Ext Block ? ! YES ! NO

Dead Time tD1 ms

Dead Time tD2 ms

Dead Time tD3 ms

Dead Time tD4 ms

Reclaim Time tR ms

Inhib Time tI ms

Phase Cycles

E/Gnd Cycles

Cycles tI>

Cycles tI>>

Cycles tI>>>

Cycles tIe>

Cycles tIe>>

Cycles tIe>>>

Cycles tAux1

Cycles tAux2

Technical Guide P124/EN TA2/B44 Commissioning test and APPENDIX 2 record sheets MiCOM P124 Page 19/32 2.2.5 PROTECTION G2 Menu


2.2.5.1.A [50/51] I>

I> ? ! YES ! NO

I> In


2.2.5.1.A.A [51] I> DMT

tI> ms

2.2.5.1.A.B [51] I> IDMT



Idmt



t Reset ms


Rtms

2.2.5.1.A.E [51] I> RI

K

t Reset ms

2.2.5.1.B [51] I>>

I>> ? ! YES ! NO

I>> In

tI>> ms

2.2.5.1.C [51] I>>>

I>>> ? ! YES ! NO

I>>> In

tI>>> ms



2.2.5.2.A [50N/51N] E/Gnd

Ie> ? ! YES ! NO

Ie> Ien

Delay Type ! IDMT ! DMT ! RI ! LABOR.

2.2.5.2.A.A [51N] Ie > DMT

tIe> ms

2.2.5.2.A.B [51N] Ie > IDMT



Idmt


2.2.5.2.A.C [51N] Ie> LABOR.

Delay type LABOR.

Idmt ! 1 ! 2 ! 3

2.2.5.2.A.D [51N] Ie> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.2.5.2.A.E [51N] Ie> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.2.5.2.A.F [51N] Ie> RI

K

t Reset ms

2.2.5.2.B [51N] Ie>>

Ie>> ? ! YES ! NO

Ie>> len

tIe>> ms


2.2.5.2.C [51N] Ie >>>

Ie>>> ? ! YES ! NO

Ie>>> len

tIe>>> ms


[49] Therm OL ? ! YES ! NO

Iθ > In

Te mn

k

θ Trip %

[49] θ Alarm ? ! YES ! NO

θ Alarm %

2.2.5.4 [37] UNDERCURRENT I<

I< ? ! YES ! NO

I< %

tI< ms

2.2.5.5 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>

I2> ? ! YES ! NO

I2> In


2.2.5.5.A [46] I2> DMT

tI2> ms

2.2.5.5.B [46] I2> IDMT

! IEC SI ! IEC STI

! IEC VI ! IEC EI

! IEC LTI ! CO2

! IEEE MI ! CO8

Idmt

! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI

Tms


2.2.5.5.C [46] I2> DMT reset time

t Reset ms

2.2.5.5.D [46] I2> IDMT reset time

Rtms

2.2.5.5.E [46] I2> RI

K

t Reset ms

2.2.5.6 [79] AUTORECLOSER (OPTION)

[79] Autoreclose ? ! YES ! NO

Ext CB Fail ? ! YES ! NO

Ext CB Fail Time ms

Ext Block ? ! YES ! NO

Dead Time tD1 ms

Dead Time tD2 ms

Dead Time tD3 ms

Dead Time tD4 ms

Reclaim Time tR ms

Inhib Time tI ms

Phase Cycles

E/Gnd Cycles

Cycles tI>

Cycles tI>>

Cycles tI>>>

Cycles tIe>

Cycles tIe>>

Cycles tIe>>>

Cycles tAux1

Cycles tAux2

Technical Guide P124/EN TA2/B44 Commissioning test and APPENDIX 2 record sheets MiCOM P124 Page 23/32 2.2.6 AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu

2.2.6.1 TRIP Command allocation (RL1)

Trip tI> ! YES ! NO

Trip tI>> ! YES ! NO

Trip tI>>> ! YES ! NO

Trip tIe> ! YES ! NO

Trip tIe>> ! YES ! NO

Trip tIe>>> ! YES ! NO

Trip tI< ! YES ! NO

Trip t I2> ! YES ! NO

Trip Thermal θ ! YES ! NO

Trip Brkn Cond ! YES ! NO

Trip tAux1 ! YES ! NO

Trip tAux2 ! YES ! NO

2.2.6.2 Latch function allocation to RL1

Latch tI> ! YES ! NO

Latch tI>> ! YES ! NO

Latch tI>>> ! YES ! NO

Latch tIe> ! YES ! NO

Latch tIe>> ! YES ! NO

Latch tIe>>> ! YES ! NO

Latch tI< ! YES ! NO

Latch tI2> ! YES ! NO

Latch Thermal θ ! YES ! NO

Latch Brkn . Cond ! YES ! NO

Latch tAux1 ! YES ! NO

Latch tAux2 ! YES ! NO


2.2.6.3 Blocking Logic 1 function allocation

Block 1 tI> ! YES ! NO

Block 1 tI>> ! YES ! NO

Block 1 tI>>> ! YES ! NO

Block 1 tIe> ! YES ! NO

Block 1 tIe>> ! YES ! NO

Block 1 tIe>>> ! YES ! NO

Block 1 tI2> ! YES ! NO

Block 1 Thermal θ ! YES ! NO

Block 1 Brkn. Cond ! YES ! NO

Block 1 tAux1 ! YES ! NO


2.2.6.4 Blocking Logic 2 function allocation

Block 2 tI> ! YES ! NO

Block 2 tI>> ! YES ! NO

Block 2 tI>>> ! YES ! NO

Block 2 tIe> ! YES ! NO

Block 2 tIe>> ! YES ! NO

Block 2 tIe>>> ! YES ! NO

Block 2 tI2> ! YES ! NO

Block 2 Thermal θ ! YES ! NO

Block 2 Brkn. Cond ! YES ! NO



2.2.6.5 Selective Scheme Logic1 function allocation

Logic Select 1 ! YES ! NO

Sel1 tI>> ! YES ! NO

Sel1 tI>>> ! YES ! NO

Sel1 tIe>> ! YES ! NO

Sel1 tIe>>> ! YES ! NO

t Sel1 ms


2.2.6.6 Selective Scheme Logic2 function allocation

Logic Select 2 ! YES ! NO

Sel2 tI>> ! YES ! NO

Sel2 tI>>> ! YES ! NO

Sel2 tIe>> ! YES ! NO

Sel2 tIe>>> ! YES ! NO

t Sel2 ms


2.2.6.7 OUTPUT RELAYS allocation

2.2.6.7.A OUTPUT RELAYS allocation (RL2 to RL4)

Functions RL 2 RL 3 RL 4

Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI< ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI2> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Therm Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Therm Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

CB Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

52 Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Brkn Cond ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

CB Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

CB Close ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tAux1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tAux2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

79 Run ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

79 Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Active Group ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO


2.2.6.7.B OUTPUT RELAYS allocation (RL5 and RL6)

Functions RL 5 RL 6

Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI< ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tI2> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Therm Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Therm Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

CB Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

52 Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Brkn Cond ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

CB Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

CB Close ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tAux1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

tAux2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

79 Run ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

79 Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO

Active Group ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO


2.2.6.8 Configuration of the latch of the output relays RL2 to RL6

Output 2 ! YES ! NO

Output 3 ! YES ! NO

Output 4 ! YES ! NO

Output 5 ! YES ! NO

Output 6 ! YES ! NO


2.2.6.9 LOGIC INPUT allocation

2.2.6.9.A Inputs

! None ! Unlatch ! 52a

! 52b ! CB FLT ! Aux 1

! Aux 2 ! Blk Log (1) ! Blk Log (2)

! Strt Dist ! Cold L PU ! Log Sel 1

! Log Sel 2 ! Change Set ! θ Reset

Input 1

! Block - 79 ! Trip Circ ! Start tBf






Input 2







Input 3







Input 4







Input 5



2.2.6.9.B t AUX

Aux 1 : Time tAux 1 ms

Aux 2 : Time tAux 2 ms

2.2.6.10 BROKEN CONDUCTOR

Brkn Cond ! YES ! NO

tBC ms

RATIO I2/I1 %

2.2.6.11 Cold Load Pick up

Cold Load PU ? ! YES ! NO

tI> ? ! YES ! NO

tI>> ? ! YES ! NO

tI>>> ? ! YES ! NO

tIe> ? ! YES ! NO

tIe>> ? ! YES ! NO

tIe>>> ? ! YES ! NO

t2> ? ! YES ! NO

T Therm ? ! YES ! NO

Level %

tCL ms

2.2.6.12 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE

CB Fail ? ! YES ! NO

I< % In

tBF ms

Block I> ? ! YES ! NO

Block Ie> ? ! YES ! NO


2.2.6.13 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION

CT Supervision ! YES ! NO

t SUP s

CB Open S'vision ! YES ! NO

CB Open Time ms

CB Close S'vision ! YES ! NO

CB Close Time ms

CB Open Alarm? ! YES ! NO

CB Open NB

Σ Amps(n)? ! YES ! NO

n

t Open Pulse ms

t Close Pulse ms

2.2.7 RECORDS Menu

2.2.7.1 DISTURBANCE RECORD

Pre-time ms

Post-time ms

Disturb Rec Trig ! SUR INST. ! ON TRIP

2.2.7.2 TIME PEAK VALUE

Time Window mn


BLANK PAGE

Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE

Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric

Publication: P124/EN T/E44 11/2010

© 2

010

Sch

neid

er E

lect

ric. A

ll rig

hts

rese

rved

.

micom p124 · technical guide p124/en t/e44 micom p124 page 1/2 self & dual powered overcurrent...

Documents